ELMARK Electric

ELMARK HOLDING SE United Kingdom
The Brand of Electricity
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
10 - 41
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
10 - 41
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
14 - 49
14 - 24
Miniature circuit
breakers (MCB)
25
Auxiliary devices
for circuit
breakers
26 - 30
31
High power safety Switch
devices and
disconnectors ISS
isolating switches
32
Isolating switches
ISS2
33
Manual switching
to reserve series
EQ 2M
35 - 42
Moulded case
circuit breakers
37
Moulded case
circuit breakers
with lock
39
Moulded case
circuit breakers
42
Moulded case
circuit breaker
DW1 series
43 - 49
Auxiliary devices
for oulded case
circuit breakers
34
Dual power
change-over
switch
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
10 - 41
40
Moulded case
circuit breaker
with ELCB
INDIRECT PROTECTION
DEVICES
52 - 55
52 - 61
Residual current
devices
56 - 58
Combined residual
current devices
59 - 61
Surge arresters
CONTACTORS
64 - 66
64 - 73
Low voltage
contactors LT1-D/K
67
Low voltage
contactors LT1-F
68
Low voltage
contactors- LP-1D
69
70
Low voltage
Low voltage
contactors CJ19-43 reverse contactors
71 - 72
Auxiliary contact
blocks
DEVICES FOR CONTROLAND

PROTECTION OF ELECTRICAL
MOTORS
76 - 77
76 - 87
Thermal relays
78 - 79
Thermomagnetic
automatic breaker
80
81 - 85
Auxiliary devices
Starters
for thermomagnetic
automatic breaker
86
Frequency
inverters
87
Soft starter
CAPACITY COEFFICIENT
COMPENSATION
90
90 - 91
Complex
compensating
devices
91
91
Capacitor batteries Cos regulator

for reactive energy
compensation
TIMERS, RELAYS AND

DISPLAYING DEVICES
94 - 98
94 - 111
Programmable
timers
99 - 100
Digital counters
101- 102
Industrial relays
103 - 104
Current
measurement
transformers
105 - 106
Voltage
transformers
107 - 111
Displaying
measurement
devices
73
Module contactors
ELEMENTS FOR AUTOMATION,

MONITORING AND CONTROL
114 - 119
114 - 135
Limit switches
120
Proximity sensor
121
Capacitive sensor
122
Photoelectrical
sensor
123
Power supplies
124 - 127
Rotary switches
128 - 132
Buttons and LED
indicators
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
133
10 - 41
Devices for telpher

control
134 - 135
Warning lights and
towers
INDUSTRIAL PLUGS AND

SOCKETS
138
138 - 145
Industrial plugs
139
Industrial sockets
DISTRIBUTION BOXES
148 - 150
148 - 157
151 - 153
Plastic distribution Metal distribution

boxes
boards
151
Metal distribution
boxes for flush and
surface mounting
154 - 155
156 - 157
Plastic distribution Plastic distribution

boards
boards and
accessories
CABLE TERMINALS
160 - 162
160 - 165
Connection tubes
163 - 165
Isolated cable
terminals
CABLE INSTALATION SYSTEM
168
168 - 183
Plastic cable
trunking
169 - 171
172 - 179
Plastic cable trunking Cable support

accessories
systems
180 - 181
Distribution boxes
182 - 183
Waterproof
junction boxes
ACCESSORIES
186 - 191
186 - 197
Consummative
192
Heat shrinkage
tubes
193 - 197
Terminal blocks
TOOLS
200 - 205
200 - 199
Manual meters
206 - 210
Crimping tools
211
212 - 213
Mechanical cutting Isolated VDE tools

tools
ELECTRICAL SWITCHES AND

SOCKETS
216 - 236
216 - 221
222 - 227
City series
Lecce series
228 - 233
Rhyme series
234 - 237
Splendor series
238 - 241
Life style series
242 - 245
Basic series
246 - 247
Waterproof for
surface mounting
247 - 248
Plugs
COMPANY
INFORMATION
ELMARK
is a leading European certified trademark of LOW

VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL AND LIGHTING EQUIPMENT,
complying with the applicable European standards,
incl. the Directive 2006/95/EC (ex.73/23/EEC) Low
Voltage Directives (LVD), INTERTEK, RoHS, EMC, ISO
9001:2008 and in reference with the requirements
for CE marking.
COMPANY INFORMATION
The holder of the trademark ELMARK is the

European company ELMARK HOLDING SE with
HEADQUARTER in LONDON, UK.
It represents a group of 14 affiliate companies in

10countries: United Kingdom, Bulgaria, Romania,
Hungary, Slovenia, Croatia, Serbia, Bosnia and
Herzegovina, Greece, United Arab Emirates.
EUROPEAN FACTORY AND

WAREHOUSE
ELMARK INDUSTRIES SC, Dobrich, Bulgaria

The facilities manufacture and maintain significant
stock availabilities and provides competitive and
quick distribution throughout Europe.
MIDDLE EAST FACTORY AND

WAREHOUSE
ELMARK INDUSTRIES SC Branch, Dubai, UAE

As located in Dubai Silicon Oasis, we are able to
provide faster and cost effective solutions
to our clients in Middle East and Africa as well as
keep close relationship with our partners to handle
and satisfy all demands and requirements.
INTERNATIONAL TRADE OFFICE
ELMARK TRADE LTD, Varna, Bulgaria

Our professional team of International Trade
Managers is dedicated to expand our ELMARK
sales network and establish close relations with
our clients around the globe and offer quick
and competent assistance on any enquiries and
questions.
Our successful commercial policy is due to the high

quality of the product range and the successful
balance of supply and demand of electrical
and lighting equipment. As a result, ELMARK
HOLDING SE has been a reliable and reputable
partner on the European and world market for
already fifteen years, offering good quality products
at competitive prices.
SOLUTIONS
Over 7000 LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL
LIABILITY
1 500 000 EUR ALLIANZ GERMANY
QUALITY
Up to 7 YEARS WARRANTY
CERTIFICATES
AND LIGHTING SOLUTIONS
EMC LVD
COMPANY INFORMATION
QUALITY
QUALITY
Certificate
Certificate
QUALITY
QUALITY
Certificate
Certificate
QUALITY
QUALITY
Intertek Sweden and RoHs certificate
*You can find the full size and information about the certificates on our website www.elmarkholding.eu
QUALITY
QUALITY
QUALITY
QUALITY
EMC and LVD certificate
10
QUALITY
QUALITY
11
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Miniature circuit breakers (MCB) | 14

Auxiliary devices for circuit breakers | 25
High power safety devices and isolating switches | 26
Switch disconnectors ISS | 31
Isolating switches ISS2 | 32
Manual switching to reserve series EQ 2M | 33
Dual power change-over switch | 34
Moulded case circuit breakers | 35
Moulded case circuit breakers with lock | 37
Moulded case circuit breakers | 39
Moulded case circuit breaker with ELCB | 40
Moulded case circuit breaker DW1 series | 42
Auxiliary devices for oulded case circuit breakers | 43
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Miniature circuit breakers (MCB)
TERMINAL
NON-FLAMMABLE COVER
JUMP KNUCKLE
HANDLE
LOCK KNUCKLE
MOVABLE CONTACT
ARC CHAMBER
STATIC CONTACT
MAXIMUM CURRENT RELEASE
AUXILIARY CONTACT (accessory)
10
UNDER VOLTAGE RELEASE (accessory)
11
SHUNT RELEASE (accessory)
12
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
7
9
14
6
Characteristics
10
11
12
Circuit breakers are automatically-operated electrical switches, designed to protect

electrical circuits from damage caused by overload or short circuit. They can also be
used as devices for commutation and control of electrical circuits. They differ in the
following characteristics:
Operating voltage: 230, 400V
Number of poles: 1, 2, 3, 4
Tripping curve:
curve B breaks between 3 and 5 In, used for low voltage short circuit currents
(long circuits and generators)
curve C breaks between 5 and 10 In, used for protection of main power supply
cables and conventional consumers
curve D breaks between 10 and 20 In, used for protection of industrial consumers with high initial current flow (electric motors)
Breaking capacity: 4.5, 6, 10kA
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Cx
number of poles (1,2,3)

breaking capacity in (kA)
tripping curve C
rated current in (A)
tripping curve
Documents corresponding
to the product:
Standard EN60898-1
EN60947-2
Miniature circuit breakers (MCB) C40N

Functions:
protection of the electrical circuits from overload
or short circuits of the outer circuit
it can be used as a device for commutation and
control of electrical circuits
in combination with auxiliary devices it allows
remote control, commutation or indication of the
protected circuit
for mounting in residential and industrial buildings
for mounting at a distance from the transformer
post from 150 to 850 m
allows protection of consumers generating short
circuit currents up to 4500 A
Technical data:
Rated voltage: 230/400V; 50/60Hz
Breaking capacity (cycle O-CO) in accordance with
standard EN 60 898-1: 4500A
Rated breaking capacity Ics= 75% Icu
Isolating voltage:2000V
Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles): 4000
Mechanical (number of cycles): 20000
Class of current limiting:3
IP code: IP>20
Tripping:
C the maximum current release breaks between 5 and 10 In; used to protect main power
supply cables and conventional consumers
Joining terminal: flat (tunnel) screw terminal with
composition 1.5 coldly draw-plated plane Q235 A
Plastic box not keeping the burning material
nylon PA66, UV rays wear resistance
Box permitivity strength: >18MV/m
Abnormal heating wear resistance and fire of the
outer parts: 960C / 3s
Maximum current release containing:
copper coil - composition: pure copper T2 type
resistance: from 0.6 to 180m
welding effort: <150 000 N/mm
bimetal plate composition: 5J158 to TB180
depending on the current
YEAR
WARRANTY
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty
thickness: 0.6mm (up to 40A) and 0.8mm (up

to 63A)
magnetic core composition: coldly drawplated metal wire (1Gr18Ni9)
thickness: 1.15 to 2.24m
drawing effort: from 200 to 400N/mm
contact head of the movable contact composition: silver graphite CAg(5)
dimension 3x3x0.8 (up to 40A) and 4x4x0.8 (up
to 63A)
static contact composition: pure copper T2Y2
composition of the contact head: silver graphite CAg(5)
Power supply (conducting)
power supply busbar 1P63, 2P63, 3P63
rigid conductors up to 25 mm
flexible conductors up to 16 mm
Tightening moment:1.33Nm
Mounting:
vertical
DIN-rail
for mounting in housing or industrial environment
without serious interference
ambient temperature: -5C to + 65C2 C
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
4xN
15
Dimensions (mm)
D1
D2
D3
H1
40
65
72
78
H2
W1
W2
W3
W4
45
18
36
54
72
1P
2P
3P
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
16
Type
Number of
poles
Rated
current In
(A)
Breaking
capacity
(kA)
C41N / 2A
1P
4.5
Recommended
sections of the Packing/Box
(pcs)
conductor
(g/mm2)
1.0
12 / 240
Catalogue number
Curve C
41460
C41N / 4A
1P
4.5
1.0
12 / 240
41461
C41N / 6A
1P
4.5
1.0
12 / 240
41451
C41N / 10A
1P
10
4.5
1.5
12 / 240
41452
C41N / 16A
1P
16
4.5
2.5
12 / 240
41453
C41N / 20A
1P
20
4.5
2.5
12 / 240
41454
C41N / 25A
1P
25
4.5
4.0
12 / 240
41455
C41N / 32A
1P
32
4.5
6.0
12 / 240
41456
C41N / 40A
1P
40
4.5
10.0
12 / 240
41457
C41N / 50A
1P
50
4.5
10.0
12 / 240
41458
C41N / 63A
1P
63
4.5
16.0
12 / 240
41459
Type
Number of
poles
Rated
current In
(A)
Breaking
capacity
(kA)
Recommended
(pcs)
conductor
(g/mm2)
Catalogue number
Curve C
C42N / 6A
2P
4.5
1.0
6 / 120
41470
C42N / 10A
2P
10
4.5
1.5
6 / 120
41471
C42N / 16A
2P
16
4.5
2.5
6 / 120
41472
C42N / 20A
2P
20
4.5
2.5
6 / 120
41473
C42N / 25A
2P
25
4.5
4.0
6 / 120
41474
C42N / 32A
2P
32
4.5
6.0
6 / 120
41475
C42N / 40A
2P
40
4.5
10.0
6 / 120
41476
C42N / 50A
2P
50
4.5
10.0
6 / 120
41477
C42N / 63A
2P
63
4.5
16.0
6 / 120
41478
Type
Number of
poles
Rated
current In
(A)
Breaking
capacity
(kA)
C43N / 6A
3P
4.5
1.0
4 / 80
41541
C43N / 10A
3P
10
4.5
1.5
4 / 80
41542
C43N / 16A
3P
16
4.5
2.5
4 / 80
41543
C43N / 20A
3P
20
4.5
2.5
4 / 80
41544
C43N / 25A
3P
25
4.5
4.0
4 / 80
41545
C43N / 32A
3P
32
4.5
6.0
4 / 80
41546
C43N / 40A
3P
40
4.5
10.0
4 / 80
41547
C43N / 50A
3P
50
4.5
10.0
4 / 80
41548
C43N / 63A
3P
63
4.5
16.0
4 / 80
41549
Recommended
(pcs)
conductor
(g/mm2)
Catalogue number
Curve C
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Cx
number of poles (1,2,3,4)

tripping curve C
tripping curve ,B
to the product:
Standard EN60898-1
Miniature circuit breakers (MCB) C60N

Functions:
protected circuit
for mounting in industrial buildings with high
contamination level of the electric systems
for mounting at a distance from the transformer
post from 150 to 850 m
allows protection of consumers generating short
circuit currents up to 6000 A
Technical data:
standard EN 60 898-1: 6000A
Isolating voltage:2000V
Mechanical (number of cycles): 50000
IP code: IP>20
Tripping curve:
B the maximum current release breaks between 3 and 5 In; used to protect long circuits
and generators
C the maximum current release breaks between 5 and 10 In; used to protect main power
supply cables and conventional consumers
Joining terminal: Combined screw clamp made of
1.5 cold extruded Q235-A material with additional
coating
Status indicator
Heat resistance of internal non-electrical components: 850 / 10 s
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty
YEAR
WARRANTY

depending on the current
to 63A)
dimension 3x3x0.8 (up to 40A) and 4x4x0.8 (up
to 63A)
power supply busbar 1P63, 2P63, 3P63
Mounting:
vertical
DIN-rail
without serious interference
1P
2P
3P
4P
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
6xN
17
D1
D2
D3
H1
50
65
72
81
H2
W1
W2
W3
W4
45
18
36
54
72
Dimensions (mm)
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Type
C61N / 1A
C61N / 2A
C61N / 4A
C61N / 6A
C61N / 10A
C61N / 16A
C61N / 20A
C61N / 25A
C61N / 32A
C61N / 40A
C61N / 50A
C61N / 63A
Type
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
C62N / 2
C62N / 4A
C62N / 6A
C62N / 10A
C62N / 16A
C62N / 20A
C62N / 25A
C62N / 32A
C62N / 40A
C62N / 50A
C62N / 63A
18
Type
C63N/2A
C63N/4A
C63N / 6A
C63N / 10A
C63N / 16A
C63N / 20A
C63N / 25A
C63N / 32A
C63N / 40A
C63N / 50A
C63N / 63A
Type
C64N / 2A
C64N / 4A
C64N / 6A
C64N / 10A
C64N / 16A
C64N / 20A
C64N / 25A
C64N / 32A
C64N / 40A
C64N / 50A
C64N / 63A
Rated Breaking Recommended

Number
Packing/Box
current capacity
sections of the
of poles
(pcs)
2
In (A)
(kA) conductors (g/mm )
1P
1P
1P
1P
1P
1P
1P
1P
1P
1P
1P
1P
1
2
4
6
10
16
20
25
32
40
50
63
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.5
2.5
2.5
4.0
6.0
10.0
10.0
16.0

Number
current capacity
sections of the
of poles
In (A)
(kA)
conductor (g/mm2)
2P
2P
2P
2P
2P
2P
2P
2P
2P
2P
2P
2
4
6
10
16
20
25
32
40
50
63
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.5
2.5
2.5
4.0
6.0
10.0
10.0
16.0

Number
current capacity
sections of the
of poles
In (A)
(kA)
conductor (g/mm2)
3P
3P
3P
3P
3P
3P
3P
3P
3P
3P
3P
2
4
6
10
16
20
25
32
40
50
63
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.5
2.5
2.5
4.0
6.0
10.0
10.0
16.0

Number
current capacity
sections of the
of poles
In (A)
(kA)
conductor (g/mm2)
4P
4P
4P
4P
4P
4P
4P
4P
4P
4P
4P
2
4
6
10
16
20
25
32
40
50
63
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.5
2.5
2.5
4.0
6.0
10.0
10.0
16.0
Catalogue
number
Curve C
Catalogue
number
Curve B
12 / 240
12 / 240
12 / 240
12 / 240
12 / 240
12 / 240
12 / 240
12 / 240
12 / 240
12 / 240
12 / 240
12 / 240
41100N
41102N
41104N
41106N
41110N
41116N
41120N
41125N
41132N
41140N
41150N
41163N
41501N
41502N
41504N
41506N
41510N
41516N
41520N
41525N
41532N
41540N
41550N
41563N
Packing/Box
(pcs)
Catalogue
number
Curve C
Catalogue
number
Curve B
6 / 120
6 / 120
6 / 120
6 / 120
6 / 120
6 / 120
6 / 120
6 / 120
6 / 120
6 / 120
6 / 120
41202N
41204N
41206N
41210N
41216N
41220N
41225N
41232N
41240N
41250N
41263N
41602N
41604N
41606N
41610N
41616N
41620N
41625N
41632N
41640N
41650N
41663N
Packing/Box
(pcs)
Catalogue
number
Curve C
Catalogue
number
Curve B
4 / 80
4 / 80
4 / 80
4 / 80
4 / 80
4 / 80
4 / 80
4 / 80
4 / 80
4 / 80
4 / 80
41302N
41304N
41306N
41310N
41316N
41320N
41325N
41332N
41340N
41350N
41363N
41702N
41704N
41706N
41710N
41716N
41720N
41725N
41732N
41740N
41750N
41763N
Packing/Box
(pcs)
Catalogue
number
Curve C
Catalogue
number
Curve B
3 / 60
3 / 60
3 / 60
3 / 60
3 / 60
3 / 60
3 / 60
3 / 60
3 / 60
3 / 60
3 / 60
41402N
41404N
41406N
41410N
41416N
41420N
41425N
41432N
41440N
41450N
41463N
41802N
41804N
41806N
41810N
41816N
41820N
41825N
41832N
41840N
41850N
41863N
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
to the product:
Standard EN60898-1
EN60947-2
Miniature circuit breakers (MCB) C100L

Functions:
protected circuit
Technical data:
standard EN 60 898-1: 10000A
Isolating volatage:2000V, 1 min at impulse wave
1.2/50s
Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):4000
C101L/6A
C101L/10A
C101L/16A
C101L/20A
C101L/25A
C101L/32A
C101L/40A
C101L/50A
C101L/63A
Type
C102L/6A
C102L/10A
C102L/16A
C102L/20A
C102L/25A
C102L/32A
C102L/40A
C102L/50A
C102L/63A
Type
C103L/6A
C103L/10A
C103L/16A
C103L/20A
C103L/25A
C103L/32A
C103L/40A
C103L/50A
C103L/63A
Rated
Number of
current In
poles
(A)
1P
1P
1P
1P
1P
1P
1P
1P
1P
6
10
16
20
25
32
40
50
63
Rated
Number of
current In
poles
(A)
2P
2P
2P
2P
2P
2P
2P
2P
2P
6
10
16
20
25
32
40
50
63
Rated
Number of
current In
poles
(A)
3P
3P
3P
3P
3P
3P
3P
3P
3P
6
10
16
20
25
32
40
50
63
Breaking
capacity
(kA)
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
Breaking
capacity
(kA)
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
Breaking
capacity
(kA)
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty
Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles):

20000
IP code: IP>20
Tripping curve: C
Mounting:
vertical
DIN-rail
possibility for labeling
1P
Type
YEAR
WARRANTY
2P
3P
Recommended
Packing/Box Catalogue number
sections of the
(pcs)
Curve C
conductors (g/mm2)
1.0
1.5
2.5
2.5
4.0
6.0
10.0
10.0
16.0
12 / 240
12 / 240
12 / 240
12 / 240
12 / 240
12 / 240
12 / 240
12 / 240
12 / 240
41101
41103
41105
41107
41108
41109
41111
41112
41113
Recommended
sections of the
(pcs)
Curve C
conductors (g/mm2)
1.0
1.5
2.5
2.5
4.0
6.0
10.0
10.0
16.0
6/120
6/120
6/120
6/120
6/120
6/120
6/120
6/120
6/120
41201
41203
41205
41207
41208
41209
41211
41212
41213
Recommended
sections of the
(pcs)
Curve C
2
conductors (g/mm )
1.0
1.5
2.5
2.5
4.0
6.0
10.0
10.0
16.0
4 / 80
4 / 80
4 / 80
4 / 80
4 / 80
4 / 80
4 / 80
4 / 80
4 / 80
41301
41303
41305
41307
41308
41309
41311
41312
41313
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Cx
number of poles (1,2,3)

tripping curve C
tripping curve
19
10xL
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
100M constructive series
number of poles (1;2;3;4)
Dx
Functions:
protected circuit
rated current
tripping curve , D
Documents corresponding to
the product:
Standard EN60898-1
EN 60947-2
Technical data:
standard EN 60 898-1: 10000A
Isolating volatage:2000V
Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles):20000
IP code: IP>20
Tripping curve: C,D
Joining terminal: flat (tunnel) screw terminal with
composition 1.5 coldly draw-plated plane Q235
A
resistance: from 148 to 230m
welding effort: <400 N/
bimetal plate composition: TB180/0.5
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
20
Dimensions (mm)
C
D1
D2
D3
H1
50
65
74
45
H2
W1
W2
W3
W4
81
27
54
81
108
Miniature circuit breakers (MCB) C100M
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty
YEAR
WARRANTY
thickness: 0.8mm
drawing effort: 20N/mm2
dimension 6x6x1
power supply busbar
rigid conductors up to 50
flexible conductors up to 35
Mounting:
vertical
DIN-rail
possibility for labeling
for mounting in industrial environment
1P
2P
3P
4P
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Number of
Rated
Breaking
Catalogue number Catalogue number
Packing/Box (pcs)
poles current In (A) capacity (kA)
Curve C
Curve D
C100M
1P
80
10
9 / 180
41180
41180D
C100M
1P
100
10
9 / 180
41190
41190D
C100M
1P
125
10
9 / 180
41195
41195D
Type
Number of
Rated
Breaking
Packing/Box (pcs)
Curve C
Curve D
C100M
2P
80
10
6 / 120
41280
41281
C100M
2P
100
10
6 / 120
41290
41291
Type
Number of
Rated
Breaking
Packing/Box (pcs)
Curve C
Curve D
C100M
3P
80
10
4 / 60
41380
41381
C100M
3P
100
10
4 / 60
41390
41391
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Type
21
Number of
Rated
Breaking
Packing/Box (pcs)
Curve C
Curve D
C100M
4P
80
10
3 / 60
41480
41481
C100M
4P
100
10
3 / 60
41490
41491
Type
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
C6xDC
Cx
number of poles (1,2)

tripping curve C
tripping curve
to the product:
Standard EN60898-1
EN60898-2
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Functions:
for lowering constant current voltaic arc and
use of the breaker at constant current consumer
protection
or short circuit of the outer circuit at alternating
current and constant current power supply circuits
for commutation and control of electrical circuits
in combination with auxiliary alternating current
devices for remote control, commutation or
indication of the protected circuit
for mounting in industrial buildings
for protection of consumers generating short
circuit currents to 6000 A at alternating current
power supply
Technical data:
Rated voltage: 240V; AC/DC
Breaking capacity (cycle O -CO) in accordance
with standard EN 60 898- 1: 6000A
Rated breaking capacity Ics=75% Icu
Insulating voltage: 2000V
Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):
4000
20000
Class of current limiting: 3
IP code: IP>20
Tripping curve: C the maximum current release
breaks between 5 and 10 In; used to protect
power supply cables and conventional consumers
Joining terminal: flat (tunnel) screw terminal
with composition 1.5 coldly draw-plated plane
Q235 A
Dimensions (mm)
22
Miniature circuit breakers (MCB) C60DC series
D1
D2
D3
49
65
72
H1
H2
W1
W2
78
45
18
36
YEAR
WARRANTY
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty

according to the current
to 63A)
dimension 3x3x0.8 (up to 40A) and 4x4x0.8
(up to 63A)
static contact composition: pure copper
T2Y2
metal magnetic plate for lowering the constant current arc
Conducting:
power supply busbar 1P63, 2P63
Tightening moment: 1.33Nm
Mounting
vertical
DIN-rail
without serious current interference
Ambient temperature: -5C to + 65C2 C
1P
2P
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Rated
current In
(A)
Breaking
capacity
(kA)
Recommended
sections of the
conductor (g/mm2)

(pcs)
Curve C
61DC / 1A
1P
1.0
12 / 240
41164
61DC / 2A
1P
1.0
12 / 240
41165
61DC / 4A
1P
1.0
12 / 240
41166
61DC / 6A
1P
1.0
12 / 240
41167
61DC / 10A
1P
10
1.5
12 / 240
41168
61DC / 16A
1P
16
2.5
12 / 240
41169
61DC / 20A
1P
20
2.5
12 / 240
41170
61DC / 25A
1P
25
4.0
12 / 240
41171
61DC / 32A
1P
32
6.0
12 / 240
41172
61DC / 40A
1P
40
10.0
12 / 240
41173
61DC / 50A
1P
50
10.0
12 / 240
41174
61DC / 63A
1P
63
16.0
12 / 240
41175
Type
Number of
poles
Rated
current In
(A)
Breaking
capacity
(kA)
Recommended
sections of the
conductor (g/mm2)
62DC / 2A
2P
1.0
6 / 120
41176
62DC / 4A
2P
1.0
6 / 120
41177

(pcs)
Curve C
62DC / 6A
2P
1.0
6 / 120
41178
62DC / 10A
2P
10
1.5
6 / 120
41179
62DC / 16A
2P
16
2.5
6 / 120
41181
62DC / 20A
2P
20
2.5
6 / 120
41182
62DC / 25A
2P
25
4.0
6 / 120
41183
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Number of
poles
23
Type
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Miniature circuit breakers (MCB) DP1N (1P + E)

Functions:
or short circuit of the outer circuit
it breaks simultaneously the lead and the neutral
conductor as the heat protection is only at the lead
conductor
YEAR
WARRANTY
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty
Connecting:
Power supply (conducting):
power supply busbar DP1N
flexible or rigid conductor
Mounting: on DIN-rail
Technical data:
Rated voltage: 230V; 50/60Hz
standard EN 60 898-1: 4500 A
Rated breaking capacity Ics = 50% Icu
Insulating voltage: 2000V
IP code: IP>20
Tripping curve: C the maximum current release
breaks between 5 and 10 In; used to protect main
power supply
cables and conventional consumers
Circuit breakers DP1N (1P+N) - SIGMA design
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Dimensions (mm)
C
D1
D2
D3
40
65
72
Type
Rated current
In (A)
Breaking
capacity (kA)
Recommended
sections of the
conductor (g/mm2)

(pcs)
Curve C
DP1N / 6
4.5
1.0
12 / 240
41006
DP1N / 10
10
4.5
1.5
12 / 240
41010
DP1N / 16
16
4.5
2.5
12 / 240
41016
DP1N / 20
20
4.5
2.5
12 / 240
41020
DP1N / 25
25
4.5
4.0
12 / 240
41025
DP1N / 32
32
4.5
6.0
12 / 240
41032
Padlock adaptor for MCB
24
YEAR
WARRANTY
An adaptor makes it possible to block the operating lever whether switched ON or OF

Type
Catalogue number
Padlock adaptor for MCB
41904
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Auxiliary devices for circuit breakers
Type designation:
OF - constructive series
number of poles - 1
to the product:
Standard EN60898-1
Functions:
when the voltage is reduced below 170V operation
is initiated and the automatic switch is turned off
when the voltage is increased above 280V operation is initiated and the automatic switch is turned
off
allows manual turning on of the switch after powering is restored
indication of the position of the device
Technical characteristics:
Insulation voltage: 2000V
YEAR
WARRANTY
IP code: IP>20
Connection method:
Double connector: flat (tunnel) screw connector
Feeding (conducting):
flexible conductors up to 1.5mm2
Tightening moment of the screw: 1.33Nm
Mounting:
vertical, by means of two pins attached to the
rivets of the circuit-breaker, while the operating
mechanism is connected to the switching off
mechanism of the circuit breaker after the sealing
lid is demounted
Type
Rated voltage
Type breaker
Packing/Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
ELMARK MN 2 60
230V
60
12 / 240
41909
Shunt release MX (independent release)

Functions:
remote circuit breaker switching off at voltage feed
allows manual switching on of the breaker at voltage recovery
indication of the devices location
Technical data:
Isolating voltage: 2000V
IP code: IP>20
YEAR
WARRANTY
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty
Connecting:
Power supply (conducting):
flexible conductors up to 1.5mm2
The power supply of the release is accomplished at
the outlet of the breaker
Mounting:
vertical, clamps with two pins to the breakers
rivets and the executive mechanism is joined up
to the switching mechanism of the breaker after
dismounting the seal cover
Type
Rated voltage
Type breaker
Packing/Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
ELMARK MX 60
230V
60
12 / 240
41902
Auxiliary contact OF
Functions:
at circuit breaker switching off it sends a signal to
the control or signalization system
indication of the location of the auxiliary contact
and the breaker
Technical data:
Rated voltage: 230V
IP code: IP>20
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty
YEAR
WARRANTY
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty
Connecting:
Power supply (conducting): - flexible conductors up
to 1.5mm
Mounting:
vertical, clamps with two pins to breakers rivets,
and the executive mechanism is joined up to
the switching mechanism of the breaker after
dismounting the seal cover
Type
Rated voltage
Type breaker
Packing/Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
ELMARK OF 60
230V
60
17 / 170
41901
ELMARK SD100
230V
C60
12 / 240
41905
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Type designation:
X - constructive series
number of poles - 1
to the product:
Standard EN60898-1
Combined voltage circuit-breaker N2
25
Auxiliary devices for circuit breakers
Type designation:
N - constructive series
number of poles - 1
to the product:
Standard EN60898-1
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
High power safety devices and isolating switches
Documents corresponding to the
product:
Standard EN 60269-1
Bases for high power safety devices
YEAR
WARRANTY
The series bases for high power safety device is manufactured of permitivity alloy with mounted contact jaws
of electrolytic copper supplied with special springs for contact compression and easy fuse links taking out. All
current leading parts are connected to inlet outlet terminals with bolts; the terminals also end with bolts, to
which the power supply conductors are connected. The bases are offered in five type sizes corresponding to
the five types of fuse links.
Base type
Overall dimensions (mm)

1
A2
A3
B1
B2
C1
C2
SIST00
25
100
120
30
25
60
7.5
SIST 0
25
150
170
30
37
72
7.5
SIST1
25
175
200
30
58
38
84
10.5
SIST2
25
200
225
30
60
38
100
10.5
SIST3
25
210
250
30
60
40
105
10.5
Rated current Rated voltage

()
Un (V)
Base type
Fuse link type
SIST00
N 00
up to 160
SISP00
NT 00
up to 160
Weight
(gr)
Packing /
Box (pcs)
Catalogue
number
600
193
5 / 120
12001
600
215
5 / 120
12001
Weight
(gr)
Packing /
Box (pcs)
Catalogue
number
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Remark : Fuse bases SISP are made of porcelain
26

()
Un (V)
Base type
Fuse link type
SIST0
N 0
up to 160
600
295
3 / 54
12010
SISP0
NT 0
up to 160
600
319
3 / 54
12010P
Weight
(gr)
Packing /
Box (pcs)
Catalogue
number

()
Un (V)
Base type
Fuse link type
SIST1
N 1
up to 250
600
550
3 / 36
12100
SISP1
NT 1
up to 250
600
550
3 / 36
12100P
Weight
(gr)
Packing /
Box (pcs)
Catalogue
number

()
Un (V)
Base type
Fuse link type
SIST2
N 2
up to 400
600
770
1 / 20
12200
SISP2
NT 2
up to 400
600
810
1 / 20
12200
Weight
(gr)
Packing /
Box (pcs)
Catalogue
number

()
Un (V)
Base type
Fuse link type
SIST3
N 3
up to 630
600
965
1 / 20
12300
SISP3
NT 3
up to 630
600
987
1 / 20
12300P
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Fuse links for high power safety device

The series fuse links for high power safety devices
is designed for short circuit protection. They are
distinguished with high speed of operation and high
reliability. The element is a ceramic (porcelain) body
filled with fine quartz sand for voltaic arc lowering.
In the ceramic body is mounted a fusible, specially
profiled wafer connecting the current leading
terminals. These terminals are manufactured of
copper alloy with special nickel coating and have the
form of knives to provide more contact surface. The
fuse links correspond to gL gG class which means
that they are with common function and normal
response time.
NH Fuses
Two operating classes of NH Fuses are available:

Operating class gL/gG general purpose, line
protection, slow acting
Technical data:
Rated voltage: 500V
Rated short circuit current: 120 kA
IP code: IP 00
Ambient temperature: -5 to +65C
Altitude: up to 2000m
NT00
78
40
15
29
56.5
NT 0
125
68
15
29
56.5
NT1
135
68
21
48
62
NT 2
150
68
27
58
72
NT 3
150
68
33
67
84.5
NT00C
78
40
15
21
56,5
NT1C
135
68
21
29
62
NT2C
150
68
33
48
84,5
Type
In (A)
Un (V)
Packing / Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
NT00
NT00
NT00
NT00
NT00
NT00
NT00
NT00
NT00
NT00
16
25
32
40
50
63
80
100
125
160
500,600
500,600
500,600
500,600
500,600
500,600
500,600
500,600
500,600
500,600
3 / 90
3 / 90
3 / 90
3 / 90
3 / 90
3 / 90
3 / 90
3 / 90
3 / 90
3 / 90
10001
10002
10003
10004
10005
10006
10008
10009
10012
10016
Type
In (A)
Un (V)
Packing / Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
NT0
NT0
NT0
NT0
NT0
NT0
NT0
NT0
NT0
NT0
16
25
32
40
50
63
80
100
125
160
500,600
500,600
500,600
500,600
500,600
500,600
500,600
500,600
500,600
500,600
3 / 90
3 / 90
3 / 90
3 / 90
3 / 90
3 / 90
3 / 90
3 / 90
3 / 90
3 / 90
10015
10025
10032
10040
10050
10063
10080
10090
10092
10096
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Base type
YEAR
WARRANTY
27

product:
Standard EN 60269-1
EN 60269-2
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
28
Type
In (A)
Un (V)
Packing / Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
NT1
NT1
NT1
NT1
NT1
NT1
NT1
80
100
125
160
200
225
250
500,600
500,600
500,600
500,600
500,600
500,600
500,600
3 / 36
3 / 36
3 / 36
3 / 36
3 / 36
3 / 36
3 / 36
10108
10110
10112
10116
10120
10122
10125
Type
In (A)
Un (V)
Packing / Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
NT2
NT2
NT2
NT2
NT2
160
200
250
315
400
500,600
500,600
500,600
500,600
500,600
1 / 24
1 / 24
1 / 24
1 / 24
1 / 24
10216
10220
10225
10231
10240
Type
In (A)
Un (V)
Packing / Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
NT3
NT3
500
630
500,600
500,600
1 / 24
1 / 24
10350
10363
Type
In (A)
Un (V)
Packing / Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
NT00C
16
500,600
3/120
10001C
NT00C
25
500,600
3/120
10002C
NT00C
32
500,600
3/120
10003C
NT00C
40
500,600
3/120
10004C
NT00C
50
500,600
3/120
10005C
NT00C
63
500,600
3/120
10006C
NT00C
80
500,600
3/120
10008C
NT00C
100
500,600
3/120
10009C
Type
In (A)
Un (V)
Packing / Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
NT1C
80
500,600
3/54
10108C
NT1C
100
500,600
3/54
10110C
NT1C
125
500,600
3/54
10112C
NT1C
160
500,600
3/54
10116C
Type
In (A)
Un (V)
Packing / Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
NT2C
160
500,600
1/30
10216C
NT2C
200
500,600
1/30
10220C
NT2C
250
500,600
1/30
10225C
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Isolating switches
Designed in two types horizontal and vertical. They
represent a combination of low voltage isolating
switch and high power safety devices mounted in a
common plastic corpus. They are used for low voltage distribution boards and complete transformer
substations (CTS) where visible circuit distribution is
necessary. They provide safety and convenience at
fuse links change. The plastic corpus increases the IP
code and the plastic lid provides simultaneous circuits switching on/off. The lid allows easy removing
which is additional measure at repairs. The vertical
isolating switches are mounted directly to the power
supply rails which enables the exploitation and
improves the safety of the staff.
YEAR
WARRANTY
Technical data:
Rated voltage: 500V
Rated short circuit current: according to the
mounted fuse links
Number of poles: 3
Impulse voltage wear resistance: 8kV
Mechanical wear resistance: 3000 cycles
IP code: IP 40
Plastic: UV rays wear resistance
THB -160
105
160
85
45
100
THB - 250
185
220
111
66
180
THB - 400
210
260
130
88
205
THB - 630
256
270
140
94.5
245
Type
In (A)
Un (V)
Fuse link size
Packing / Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
THB
160
500, 660
NT00
1 / 18
44801
THB
250
500, 660
NT1
1/6
44802
THB
400
500, 660
NT2
1 /4
44803
THB
630
500, 660
NT3
1/4
44804
W1
W2
50
99
185
290
57
58
746
146
195
Type
In (A)
Un (V)
Fuse link size
Packing / Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
HG2B
160
500, 660
NT00
1 /4
44805
HG2B
250
500, 660
NT1
1 /4
44806
HG2B
400
500, 660
NT2
1 /4
44807
HG2B
630
500, 660
NT3
1 /4
44808
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Base type
29

product:
Standard EN 60947-1;
EN 60947-3
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
product:
Standard EN 60269-2; IEC269-2
Switch disconnectors
The series of switch disconnectors are developed for
short-circuit protection. They have a high speed of
start and high reliability. They have a plastic body of
non-flammable plastics adapted for mounting on a
DIN rail, where a porcelain round plug, which is filled
with fine quartz sand for extinguishing the electric
arc. LED indicator is mounted on the front panel
to show fuse link condition. In this ceramic body is
mounted melting, specifically profiled plate, which
connects the input power terminals. These terminals
are produced from copper alloy with especially laid
nickel layer and contact with the projecting bolts
from the plastic body. There are offered two types of
insertions according to the degree of quick opera-
YEAR
WARRANTY
tion: normally quickly operating ones class gG.

Suitable for DC system.
Technical data:
Rated voltage: 500V
Insulation voltage: >2500V
Rated current on short-circuit: 100
Direct mounting to the load
Two insulated points to the load
IP code: IP 44
Cross-section of the supply conductors:
up to 35mm2
Environmental temperature: -5 to +65
Utization category: AC - 20B; DC - 20B
Overall dimensions
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Base type
30
Rated
Number of
current
poles
()
Base dimensions (mm)
Type of the
fuse
Packing /
Box (pcs)
Catalogue
number
1PRT18 - 32x
1P
32
xxG1038
37
82
18
60
78
12 / 240
10RT1831
1NRT18 - 32x
1P+N
32
xxG1038
37
82
36
60
78
6 / 120
10RT18311
2PRT18 - 32x
2P
32
xxG1038
37
82
36
60
78
6 / 120
10RT1832
3PRT18 - 32x
3P
32
xxG1038
37
82
54
60
78
4 / 80
10RT1833
3NRT18 - 32x
3P+N
32
xxG1038
37
82
72
60
78
3 / 60
10RT18331
1PRT18 - 63x
1P
63
xxG1451
37
105
27
80
110
6 / 108
10RT1861
1NRT18 - 63x
1P+N
63
xxG1451
37
105
54
80
110
6 / 108
10RT18611
2PRT18 - 63x
2P
63
xxG1451
37
105
54
80
110
6 / 108
10RT1862
3PRT18 - 63x
3P
63
xxG1451
37
105
81
80
110
6 / 108
10RT1863
3NRT18 - 63x
3P+N
63
xxG1451
37
105
108
80
110
6 / 108
10RT18631
Type of the fuse

class gG
Voltage
(V)
Rated current
()
Size of the fuse

A x B x C
Packing / Box
(pcs)
Catalogue number
01G1038
500
38x10.3x10mm
10 / 2000
10G10381
02G1038
500
38x10.3x10mm
10 / 2000
10G10382
04G1038
500
38x10.3x10mm
10 / 2000
10G10384
06G1038
500
38x10.3x10mm
10 / 2000
10G10386
10G1038
500
10
38x10.3x10mm
10 / 2000
10G103810
16G1038
500
16
38x10.3x10mm
10 / 2000
10G103816
20G1038
500
20
38x10.3x10mm
10 / 2000
10G103820
25G1038
500
25
38x10.3x10mm
10 / 2000
10G103825
32G1038
500
32
38x10.3x10mm
10 / 2000
10G103832
40G1451
500
40
51x14.3x12mm
10 / 500
10G145140
50G1451
500
50
51x14.3x12mm
10 / 500
10G145150
63G1451
500
63
51x14.3x12mm
10 / 500
10G145163
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Switch disconnectors ISS
Switch disconnectors ISS 20...100A series

Functions:
switching on/off heavy loaded electrical circuits
breaking of electrical circuits
can be used as a main breaker
it has no protective function
Technical data:
Connecting: power supply busbar, rigid or flexible conductors
Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles): 20000
IP code: IP>20
Mounting: DIN-rail
Plastic material of UV rays
Ambient temperature: -20C + 65C
Type
YEAR
WARRANTY
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty
Dimensions (mm)
H1
H2
D1
D2
D3
81
45
50
65
76
W1
W2
W3
W3
17,5
35
52,5
70
Rated
Recommended
Number of
Packing/Box
current In
sections of the
poles
(pcs)
2
(A)
conductor (g/mm )
Catalogue
number
ISS
1P
40
10
12 / 240
41914
ISS
1P
63
16
12 / 240
41911
ISS
1P
80
25
12 / 240
41912
ISS
1P
100
35
12 / 240
41913
Rated
Recommended
Number of
Packing/Box
current In
sections of the
poles
(pcs)
(A)
conductor (g/mm2)
Catalogue
number
ISS
2P
40
10
6 / 120
41924
ISS
2P
63
16
6 / 120
41921
ISS
2P
80
25
6 / 120
41922
ISS
2P
100
35
6 / 120
41923
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Type
Catalogue
number
31
Type
Rated
Recommended
Number of
Packing/Box
current In
sections of the
poles
(pcs)
(A)
conductor (g/mm2)
4/80
41935
6.0
4/80
41936
10
4 / 80
41934
63
16
4 / 80
41931
3P
80
25
4 / 80
41932
3P
100
35
4 / 80
41933
ISS
3P
20
2.5
ISS
3P
32
ISS
3P
40
ISS
3P
ISS
ISS
Type
Rated
Recommended
Number of
Packing/Box
current In
sections of the
poles
(pcs)
(A)
conductor (g/mm2)
Catalogue
number
ISS
4P
40
10
3 / 60
41944
ISS
4P
63
16
3 / 60
41941
ISS
4P
80
25
3 / 60
41942
ISS
4P
100
35
3 / 60
41943
Switch disconnectors ISS
to the product:
Standard EN 60947-3 and IEC947-3
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Isolating switches ISS2
to the product:
Standard EN 60947-1
EN 60947-3 and IEC 60947-6
The series three- and four-pole load switch disconnectors ISS2 xxx are produced for mounting in main
electrical boards for disconnection of the circuits,
switching on of generators because of the fact they
are not affected by the frequency variations. High
mechanical strength and resistance to circulation.
Simple and secure management. There is a possibility
for the products to be produced with an window for
visible disconnection.
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Type
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty
Dimensions (mm)
A
J1
ISS2-125/3
140
135
125
27
73
120
120
65
20
25
3.5
25
ISS2-125/4
170
135
125
27
73
150
150
65
20
25
3.5
25
ISS2-160/3
140
135
125
27
73
120
120
65
20
25
3.5
25
ISS2-160/4
170
135
125
27
73
150
150
65
20
25
3.5
25
ISS2-250/3
180
170
138
35
86
160
160
90
25
30
3.5
25
ISS2-250/4
230
170
138
35
86
210
210
90
25
30
3.5
25
ISS2-400/3
230
240
165
50
110
210
210
140
32
40
37
ISS2-400/4
295
240
165
50
110
275
275
140
32
40
37
ISS2-630/3
230
260
165
50
110
210
210
140
40
50
37
ISS2-630/4
295
260
165
50
110
275
275
140
40
50
37
ISS2-800/3
378
312
240
50
140
353
353
175
60
56
48
ISS2-800/4
498
312
240
50
140
473
473
175
60
56
48
Type
Isolating switches ISS2
YEAR
WARRANTY
Technical features:
Rated voltage: not higher than 660V; 50/60Hz
Double connector: screw connection
Connection: solid or flexible conductors
Resistance to impulse voltage: 8000V
Electrical endurance (number of cycles): 5 000
Mechanical endurance (number of cycles): 10 000
IP code: IP>20
Mounting method: to a surface by means of bolts
Plastic resistant to UV raysPlastic resistant to UV rays
Ambient temperature: -2065
Functions:
switching on and off of electrical circuits under load
disconnection of electrical circuits
used as main circuit-breaker
resistant to high voltages, to short circuits in the
protected circuit
32
Switch disconnectors ISS2 125...800A
Rated
Maximum
current In
breaking
(A)
capacity Icu (A)
Catalogue
Tightening
Packing/Box
number threemoment (Nm)
(pcs)
pole
Catalogue
number
four-pole
ISS2-125in
125
1250
6.5
1 / 12
41951
41961
ISS2-125out
125
1250
6.5
1 / 12
41952
41962
ISS2-160in
160
1250
6.5
1 / 12
41953
41963
ISS2-160out
160
1250
6.5
1 / 12
41954
41964
ISS2-250in
250
2000
10
1/6
41955
41965
ISS2-250out
250
2000
10
1/6
41956
41966
ISS2-400in
400
3200
14.5
1/2
41957
41967
ISS2-630in
630
4000
14.5
1/2
41958
41968
ISS2-800in
800
1000
27
1/2
41959
41969
Note: ISS2-xxx in load circuit-breaker for mounting in the interior of a board

ISS2 -xxx out load circuit-breaker with an extended lever for mounting on the front panel of the board
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Manual switching to reserve series EQ 2M
from 160...800A
The series three- and four-pole load isolating switch
EQ 2 M xxx are produced for mounting in main electrical boards for disconnection of the circuits, manual
switching between two power supplies or switching
ON of generators because of the fact they are not
affected by the frequency variations. High mechanical strength and resistance to circulation. Simple and
secure management. There is a possibility for the
products to be produced with an window for visible
disconnection.
Functions:
switching on and off of low voltage electrical
circuits under load
disconnection of the electrical circuit from one of
the power supplies, while providing immediately
switching to the other
used as main switch
resistant to high voltages, to short circuits in the
protected circuit
YEAR
WARRANTY
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty

Rated voltage: not higher than 690V; 50/60Hz
Double connector: screw connection
Connection: hard or flexible conductors
Resistance to impulse voltage: 8000V
IP code: IP>20
Mounting method: to a surface by means of bolts
Plastic resistant to UV rays
Option for moving the handle on the front panel of
the board
Small size
Indication which of the two supplies is operating
Dimensions (mm)
A
J1
Y1
Q2M-160/3
270
135
212
89
150
120
65
95
20
25
3.5
55
25
EQ2M-160/4
300
135
212
104
150
150
65
95
20
25
3.5
55
25
Q2M-250/3
307
170
260
110
180
160
65
115
25
30
3.5
70
25
EQ2M-250/4
357
170
260
135
180
210
65
115
25
30
3.5
70
25
Q2M-400/3
372
240
297
150
236
210
77
180
32
40
83
37
EQ2M-400/4
432
240
297
180
236
275
77
180
32
40
83
37
Q2M-630/3
372
240
297
150
236
210
77
180
40
50
83
37
EQ2M-630/4
432
240
297
180
236
275
77
180
40
50
83
37
Q2M-8003
372
240
297
150
236
210
77
180
60
56
83
48
EQ2M-800/4
432
240
297
180
236
275
77
180
60
56
83
48
Type
Rated
Maximum
current In
breaking
(A)
capacity Icu (A)
Catalogue
Tightening
Packing/Box
number threemoment (Nm)
(pcs)
pole
Catalogue
number fourpole
Q2M-160
160
1250
6.5
1/4
44641
44641P
Q2M-250
250
2000
10
1/2
44642
44642P
Q2M-400
400
3200
14.5
1/2
44643
44643P
Q2M-630
630
4000
14.5
1/2
44644
44644P
Q2M-800
800
1000
27
1/2
44645
44645P
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Type
33
to the product:
Standard EN 60947-1
EN 60947-3 and IEC 60947-6
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Dual power change-over switch
to the product:
EN 60947-1
EN 60947-2; EN 60947-6-1
Dual power change-over switch EQ1 series (ATS)
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Dual power change-over switch
34
YEAR
WARRANTY
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty
Surge voltage wear resistance: 6000V

Joining terminal: bolt connection with 4 bolts to
the power supply rail
Connecting:
copper rails
flexible or rigid conductors
2000
6000
IP code: IP21
Mounting:
clamping with bolts
mounting position: vertical gradient maximum 5
Plastic material of the breakers of UV rays and nonflammable
Installation altitude: up to 2000m
Basic functions of the control device:
Overload protection
Instantaneous short circuit protection
Under phase protection
Undervoltage protection
Possibility for setting the change-over time between the two sources min 3s
Possibility for automatic switch-over to the main
power supply source after restoring its parameters
The system for dual power change-over switch is
offered in two types:
with display (control device) mounted on the
mounting plate (integrated type)
with separated control display
The system for dual power change-over switch EQ1 is

designed to provide continuous power supply and two
electrical sources automatic switch in case of failure or
deviation from the set parameters. It switches only when
the three phases of the second power supply source are
available. The system for dual power change-over switch
consists of two molded case circuit breakers mounted
on a metal frame connected with common operating
mechanism and controlled by a command device that
controls the system parameters correspondence.
Functions:
Switching on/off heavy loaded electrical circuits at
main power supply discrepancy
Switching to dual power change-over at power
supply phase lack
with option to connect to fire alarm controller. In case
of fire, the ATS switches off both power supply sources
Breaking of electrical circuits and control of powerful
consumers
Used as a main breaker in housing or industrial distributing installations supplied with a generator or a
second power supply source (hospitals, post offices,
military sites, control rooms)
Remarkable with high reliability of current characteristics
Control: motor
Controls the following circuit parameters:
presence of the three phases
the phase voltage to be in the set limits
overload
short circuit at the outlet
Technical data:
Rated operating voltage: 690V; 50/60Hz
Type of the breaker
Type
EQ1 - 100
inner type
480
240
450
210
140
EQ1 - 225
inner type
480
240
450
210
140
EQ1 - 400
inner type
620
300
590
270
235
EQ1 - 630
inner type
660
300
630
270
240
EQ1 - 800
inner type
EQ1 - 100*
moved type
420
230
390
200
145
EQ1 - 225*
moved type
420
230
390
200
145
EQ1 - 400*
moved type
570
300
540
270
235
EQ1 - 630*
moved type
610
300
580
270
240
EQ1 - 800*
moved type
Type
EQ1 - 100
Mechanical
Max.
Operating Section of the Electrical wear
Packing
Rated
wear
breaking breaking power supply resistance
Catalogue
/ Box
current
resistance
capacity capacity () conductor (number of
number
(pcs)
In (A)
(number
of
(kA) Icu
Ics
(mm2)
cycles)
cycles)
100
50
35
35
2000
6000
1/1
44100
EQ1 - 225
225
50
35
70
2000
6000
1/1
44225
EQ1 - 400
400
100
65
180
2000
6000
1/1
44403
EQ1 - 630
630
100
65
240
1000
3000
1/1
44633
EQ1 - 800
800
100
65
240
1000
3000
1/1
44833
EQ1 - 100*
100
50
35
35
2000
6000
1/1
44101
EQ1 - 225*
225
50
35
70
2000
6000
1/1
44226
EQ1 - 400*
400
100
65
180
2000
6000
1/1
44404
EQ1 - 630*
630
100
65
240
1000
3000
1/1
44634
EQ1 - 800*
800
100
65
240
1000
3000
1/1
44834
Note: *Dual power change-over switch with separated control display
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Moulded case circuit breakers
13
13
15
16
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
14
COVER
TERMINALS
10
CONTACTS WITH BIMETAL PLATES
NON-FLAMABLE BASE
11
THERMAL SYSTEM WITH MOVABLE CONTACTS
STATIC CONTACTS
12
UNDER VOLTAGE RELEASE - UVR (accessory)
PART FROM THE COVER
13
REMOTE CONTROL electrical (accessory)
SCREWS FOR TERMINALS
14
AUXILIARY CONTACT (accessory)
ARC CHAMBERS
15
SHUNT RELEASE (accessory)
ELEMENT FOR ADJUSTMENT
16
REMOTE CONTROL manual (accessory)
TERMINAL PLASTIC PLATE
35
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
to the product:
Standard EN 60947-1
EN 60947-2
Moulded case circuit breakers (MCCB) DS1 series

from 40...1250A
Functions:
breaking of electrical circuits and control of powerful consumers
can be used as a main breaker in housing or industrial distributing installations
endures high currents of short circuit in the protected circuit
remarkable with high reliability of current characteristics
control: manual
possibility for auxiliary devices mounting for
automation
Technical data:
Rated operating voltage: 415/690V; 50/60Hz
Joining terminal: flat (tunnel) screw terminal for the
breakers up to 160A and a bolt connection for the
breakers from 250A to 1600A
Type
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty
Installation dimensions (mm)
76.2
120
70
DS1-160/3P
90
120
70
93
30
100
60
DS1-250/3P
105
170
104
238
143.5
35
139
70
210
8.5
DS1-400/3P
140
257
104
316
144
44
214
87.5
285
11
DS1-630/3P
210
275
104
310
172
70
230
140
280
11
DS1-125/3P
36
YEAR
WARRANTY
Connecting:
rigid or flexible conductors
front conductors joining
possibility for mounting to lengthening terminal
Plastic elements
not keeping the burning material nylon PA66
box permitivity strength: >16MV/m
outer parts: 960C
Static contacts alloy: pure copper T2Y2
contact head: silver graphite CAg(5)
thickness: depends on the current
IP code: IP>20
Mounting:
joining with bolts
mounting position: vertical
Plastic material of UV rays and non-flammable
Test button

H1
D1
W1
90
25
100
50
H2
4
5
DS1-800/3P
210
275
104
347
172
70
230
140
307
16
DS1-1600/3P
210
410
140
410
210
70
300
140
350
10
12
DS1-125/4P
110
120
70
90
25
100
50
DS1-160/4P
120
120
70
93
30
100
60
DS1-250/4P
140
170
104
238
143.5
35
139
70
210
8.5
DS1-400/4P
184
257
104
316
144
44
214
87.5
285
11
4
5
DS1-630/4P
280
275
104
310
172
70
230
140
280
11
DS1-800/4P
280
275
104
347
172
70
230
140
307
16
DS1-1600/4P
280
410
140
410
210
70
300
140
350
10
12
Type
Operating Maximum breaking Thermal Section of

Rated
Catalogue
capacity () Icu
breaking
current
the
Packing/
current
number
capacity
adjustment conductor Box (pcs)
In (A)
tree-poles
415V
690V
(kA) Ics
(A)
(mm2)
Catalogue
number
four-poles
DS1-125
40
16
35
10
fixed
16
1 / 20
44040
444040
DS1-125
50
16
35
10
fixed
16
1 / 20
44050
444050
DS1-125
63
16
35
10
fixed
25
1 / 20
44063
444063
DS1-125
80
16
35
10
fixed
25
1 / 20
44080
444080
DS1-125
100
16
35
10
fixed
35
1 / 20
44090
444090
DS1-125
125
16
35
10
fixed
50
1 / 20
44125
444125
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Catalogue Catalogue
number
number
tree-poles four-poles
DS1 - 160
63
22
35
15
44 - 63
25
1 / 20
44163
444163
DS1 - 160
80
22
35
15
56 - 80
25
1 / 20
44164
444164
DS1 - 160
100
22
35
15
70 - 100
50
1 / 20
44165
444165
DS1 - 160
125
22
35
15
88 - 125
50
1 / 20
44166
444166
DS1 - 160
160
22
35
15
112 - 160
70
1 / 20
44160
444160
DS1 - 160
160
22
35
15
fixed
70
1 / 20
441601

Rated
breaking
capacity () Icu
current
the
Packing/
current
capacity
In (A)
415V
690V
(kA) Ics
(A)
(mm2)
Catalogue Catalogue
number
number
DS1 - 250
200
35
50
15
140 - 200
120
1/8
44200
444200
DS1 - 250
250
35
50
15
175 - 250
120
1/8
44250
444250
Type

Rated
breaking
capacity () Icu
current
the
Packing/
current
capacity
In (A)
415V
690V
(kA) Ics
(A)
(mm2)
Catalogue Catalogue
number
number
DS 1 - 400
315
50
65
25
fixed
240
1/4
44315
444315
DS 1 - 400
400
50
65
25
fixed
240
1/4
44401
444401
Type
DS1 - 630

Rated
breaking
capacity () Icu
current
the
Packing/
current
capacity
In (A)
415V
690V
(kA) Ics
(A)
(mm2)
500
65
75
25
fixed
185
Catalogue Catalogue
number
number
1/2
44500
444500
DS1 - 630
630
65
75
25
fixed
185
1/2
44630
444630
DS1 - 800
800
75
85
30
fixed
240
1/2
44800
444800
Operating Section of the

Max. breaking
Rated current
breaking power supply Protection Packing/Box
capacity (kA)
In (A)
capacity () conductor from overload
(pcs)
Icu
Ics
(mm2)
Catalogue
number
Type
DS1 - 1250
1000
85
65
240
fixed
1/1
44000
DS1 - 1250
1250
85
65
240
fixed
1/1
44502
Moulded case circuit breakers (MCCB) DS1 with lock

Rated
current In
(A)
Operating
breaking
capacity
(kA) Ics
DS1 - 125
125
DS1 - 250
Type
Maximum breaking
capacity () Icu
Thermal Section of
current
the
Packing/
(A)
(mm2)
Catalogue
number
tree-poles
415V
690V
16
35
10
fixed
25
1/20
44163K
160
35
50
15
125-160
25
1/16
44160K
DS1 - 250
250
35
50
15
160-250
50
1/6
44250K
DS1 - 400
400
50
65
25
fixed
50
1/3
44401K
DS1 - 630
630
65
75
25
fixed
185
1/2
44630K
DS1 - 800
800
75
85
30
fixed
240
1/2
44800K
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Type
37
Type

Rated
breaking
capacity () Icu
current
the
Packing/
current
capacity
In (A)
415V
690V
(kA) Ics
(A)
(mm2)
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
to the product:
Standard EN 60947-1
EN 60947-2
Moulded case circuit breakers (MCCB) DS1 to

1600A-electronic type
Functions:
control: manual
possibilities for electrical module parameters
adjustment through direct modules (combination
of keys) thus providing accurate protection from
overload and short circuit
simultaneous protection of the three phases
automation
contactor for TT test 15V DC
YEAR
WARRANTY
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty
Technical data:
Connecting:
IP code: IP>20
outer parts: 960C
Mounting:
joining with bolts
Test button
Protecting functions:
Function L step adjustment for protection against overload. Adjustment of the operating current I1=0.4+1xIn
with discreet coefficients as the value can be 0.4; 0.5; 0.6; 0.7; 0.8; 0.9; 0.95 and 1
Time delay adjustment t1 of the protection against overload step adjustment with four values A-3s; B-6s; C12s; D-18s when current is I=6I1. The diagram of the current curves is presented on fig.1
Adjustment of the transitory protection current against short circuit I3=X x I1 where X can take discreet value
OFF; 1.5; 2; 4; 6; 8; 10
38
Type
Operating Maximum breaking

Thermal Section of
Rated
Catalogue
breaking
capacity () Icu
current
the
Packing/
current
number
capacity
In (A)
tree-poles
415V
690V
(kA) Ics
(A)
(mm2)
DS1 - 400
400
50
65
25
160 - 400
240
1/3
44940
DS1 - 630
630
65
75
25
252 - 630
240
1/2
44963
DS1 - 800
800
65
75
30
320 - 800
240
1/2
44980
DS1 - 1250
1000
85
100
65
400 - 1000
240
1/1
44999
DS1 - 1250
1250
85
100
65
500 - 1250
240
1/1
44925
DS1 - 1600
1600
85
100
65
640 - 1600
240
1/1
44960
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
High breaking capacity level moulded case circuit
breakers (MCCB) DS1 MAX from 63A... 800A
Functions:
high breaking capacity level
remarkable with high reliability of current characteristics control: manual
automation
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty
DS1 MAX 125/63 3P M

DS1 MAX 125/80 3PM
DS1 MAX 125/100 3P M
DS1 MAX 125/125 3P M
DS1 MAX 250/160 3P M
DS1 MAX 250/200 3P M
DS1 MAX 250/250 3P H
DS1 MAX 400/400 3P H
DS1 MAX 630/630 3P H
DS1 MAX 800/800 3P H
DS1 MAX 125/63 4P M
DS1 MAX 125/80 4PM
DS1 MAX 125/100 4P M
DS1 MAX 125/125 4P M
DS1 MAX 250/160 4P M
DS1 MAX 250/200 4P M
DS1 MAX 250/250 4P H
DS1 MAX 400/400 4P H
DS1 MAX 630/630 4P H
DS1 MAX 800/800 4P H
L1
L2
L3
L4
92
92
92
92
92
107
107
150
182
210
122
122
122
122
142
142
142
198
240
280
150
150
150
150
165
165
165
257
270
28
150
150
150
150
165
165
165
257
270
280
110
110
110
110
110
110
110
146
155
155
110
110
110
110
110
110
110
146
155
155
92
92
92
92
90
90
90
106
116
116
92
92
92
92
90
90
90
106
116
116
30
30
30
30
35
35
35
44
116
70
60
60
60
60
70
70
70
44
116
70
129
129
129
129
126
126
126
194
200
243
129
129
129
129
126
126
126
194
200
243
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
7
7
7
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
7
7
7
Operating
Rated
breaking
current
capacity
ln (A)
(kA) lcs
63
80
100
125
160
200
250
400
630
800
36
36
36
36
36
36
42
50
50
65
Maximum breaking
capacity (kA) lcu
415V
690V
50
50
50
50
50
50
65
85
85
100
20
20
20
20
20
20
25
30
30
50
Thermal
Catalogue
current Packing/
number
adjusment box
three-poles
(A)
50,4-63
64-80
80-100
100-125
128-160
160-200
200-250
320-400
504-630
640-800
1/16
1/16
1/16
1/16
1/6
1/6
1/6
1/3
1/2
1/2
44163MM
44164MM
44165MM
44166MM
44160MM
44200MM
44250MH
44401MH
44630MH
44800MH
Catalogue
number
four-poles
444163MM
444164MM
444165MM
444166MM
444160MM
444200MM
444250MH
444401MH
444630MH
444800MH
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Type
DS1 MAX - 125

DS1 MAX - 125
DS1 MAX - 125
DS1 MAX - 125
DS1 MAX - 250
DS1 MAX - 250
DS1 MAX - 250
DS1 MAX - 400
DS1 MAX - 630
DS1 MAX - 800
YEAR
WARRANTY
Plastic elements
not keeping the burning material nylon PA66
box permitivity strength: >16MV/m
outer parts: 960C
Static contacts alloy: pure copper T2Y2
contact head: silver graphite CAg(5)
thickness: depends on the current
10000
20000
IP code: IP>20
Mounting:
joining with bolts
Test button
Ambient temperature: -20/65C.
Technical data:
Connecting:
Type
39
to the product:
Standard EN 60947-1
EN 60947-2
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
to the product:
Standard EN 60947-1
EN 60947-2

breakers (MCCB) DS1 MAX with ELCB
YEAR
WARRANTY
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty
Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker (ELCB). Combine all functions of a standard circuit breaker, and prevent the
consequences caused by short circuit, overload and shock. Widely used product for protection of low voltage circuits from fire.
Technical data:
Rated residual operating current In (mA) - 100mA;
300mA 500mA- adjustable
Tripping time In- instantaneous; 0.4s; 1s -adjustable
Max delayed 2 ln limit non-actuating time 1s 0.2/0.5
Isolating voltage: 2000V.
Joining terminal: flat (tunnel) screw terminal.
Connecting:
possibility for mounting to lengthening terminal.
Type
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
DS1 MAX 225/125 3P M
40
Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles): 10000.

20000.
IP code: IP>20.
outer parts: 960C
Mounting:
joining with bolts
mounting position: vertical.
Plastic material of UV rays and non-flammable.
Residual indicating push button
Test button.
L1
L2
L3
L4
92
150
110
92
30
129
4.5
DS1 MAX 400/250 3P H
150
257
146
106
44
194
DS1 MAX 400/400 3P H
150
257
146
106
44
194
DS1 MAX 225/125 4P M
122
150
110
92
60
129
4.5
DS1 MAX 400/250 4P H
198
257
146
106
44
194
DS1 MAX 400/400 4P H
198
257
146
106
44
194
Type
DS1 MAX - 225
Maximum
Operating
Rated residual
Rated
breaking
breaking
operating
Packing
current
capacity capacity (kA) lcu
current In
/box
ln (A)
(kA) lcs
(mA)
415V
690V
125
36
50
20
100/300/500
Catalogue
number
three-poles
Catalogue
number
four-poles
1/16 44163MMEL 444163MMEL
DS1 MAX - 400
250
42
65
25
100/300/500
1/6
44250MHEL 444250MHEL
DS1 MAX - 400
400
50
85
30
100/300/500
1/3
44401MHEL 444401MHEL
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
breakers (MCCB) DS1 MAX to 800A-electronic type
Functions:
high breaking capacity level
control: manual
possibilities for electrical module parameters
adjustment through direct modules (combination
of keys) thus providing accurate protection from
overload and short circuit
simultaneous protection of the three phases
automation
contactor for TT test 15V DC
Operating
Rated
breaking
current
capacity
ln (A)
(kA) lcs
YEAR
WARRANTY
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty
Technical data:
Connecting:
10000
20000
IP code: IP>20
outer parts: 960C
Mounting:
joining with bolts
Test button
Maximum breaking
capacity (kA) lcu
415V
690V
85
30
Thermal
current Packing/
adjusment box
(A)
Catalogue
number
three-poles
Catalogue
number
four-poles
200-400
44940MH
444940MH
DS1 MAX - 400E
400
50
DS1 MAX - 630E
630
50
85
30
400-630
1/2
44963MH
444963MH
DS1 MAX - 800E
800
65
100
50
630-800
1/2
44980MH
444980MH
Tripping characteristic:
1/3
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Type
Ir1(A) Over-load long time delay tripping

current
Ir1 adjustment, according to the different rated
current of MCCB.
DS1 MAX - 400E
41
t1(s) Long time delay tripping time t1

adjustment.
Ir2(XIr1) Short circuit short time delay tripping
time Ir2 adjustment.
t2(s) Short time delay tripping time t2
adjustment.
DS1 MAX - 630E
Ir3(XIr1) Short circuit instantaneous tripping

current Ir3 adjustment.
Ir0(XIr1) Pre-alarm tripping current Ir0
adjustment.
DS1 MAX - 800E
to the product:
Standard EN 60947-1
EN 60947-2
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
The DW1 series is an intelligent type circuit breaker

used to control and protect low voltage electrical
distribution network. Possibility to set the parameters
of the circuit protection, built in under voltage release,
remote control, earth protection and load monitoring.
Functions:
used as a main breaker in housing or industrial
distributing installations
motor control
mounted auxiliary devices for automation - under
voltage release, earth protection, intelligent controlling block with a possibility for a choice of the
protected function
Technical data:
Rated operating voltage: 690V; 50/60Hz
Surge voltage wear resistance: 2kV
Joining terminal: bolt connection with 4 bolts to
the power supply rail
Connecting:
copper rails
busway connection at the back
DW1-2000 FIXED
DW1-3200 FIXED
DW1-2000 DRAW-OUT
DW1-3200 DRAW-OUT
DW1-4000 DRAW-OUT
DW1-6300 DRAW-OUT
DW1-2000 FIXED
DW1-2000 FIXED
DW1-3200 FIXED
DW1-3200 FIXED
DW1-2000 DRAW-OUT
DW1-2000 DRAW-OUT
DW1-3200 DRAW-OUT
DW1-3200 DRAW-OUT
DW1-4000 DRAW-OUT
DW1-4000 DRAW-OUT
DW1-6300 DRAW-OUT
DW1-6300 DRAW-OUT

In (A)
Un (V)
1600
2000
2500
3200
1600
2000
2500
3200
3600
4000
5000
6300
AC400V
AC400V
AC400V
AC400V
AC400V
AC400V
AC400V
AC400V
AC400V
AC400V
AC400V
AC400V
Breaking
capacity ()
400 V
690 V
80
80
100
100
80
80
100
100
100
100
120
120
50
50
65
65
50
50
65
70
75
75
75
75
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty
A commutation type of breakers with RS 485 connection for duplex transmission of all function parameters,
adjustment and data can also be produced at clients
order and delivery terms agreement.
Type
Type
YEAR
WARRANTY

9000
IP code: IP54
Mounting:
clamping with bolts
Test button
Basic protective functions:
Overload protection with long time delay
Short circuit protection with short time delay, time
inversion limit
Short circuit protection with short time delay, time
fixed limit
Instantaneous short circuit protection
Earth protection function
Full stability function
Overload alarm function
Test function
Auto diagnostics function
42
Moulded case circuit breaker(MCCB) DW1 series
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
to the product:
Standard EN 60947-1; EN 60947-2;
IEC 947-2
362
422
375
435
550
813
Dimensions
H
W
402
402
432
432
432
452
373
363
461
494
494
504
Electrical wear
resistance (number
of cycles)
Mechanical wear
resistance (number
of cycles)
Packing/
Box (pcs)
Catalogue
number
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
9000
9000
9000
9000
9000
9000
9000
9000
9000
9000
9000
9000
1/1
1/1
1/1
1/1
1/1
1/1
1/1
1/1
1/1
1/1
1/1
1/1
44208
44209
44255
44329
44208DO
44209DO
44255DO
44329DO
44436DO
44440DO
44650DO
44663DO
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Auxiliary devices for MCCB DS1 and DS1 MAX type
Shunt release (MX)

The device is used for remote control of breakers as at
voltage signal it starts operating and switches off the
breaker to which it is mounted
Technical data:
rated operating voltage: 230/400V 50/60Hz
electromagnetic coil 100VA for breakers up to 400A
electromagnetic coil 150VA for breakers 630-800A
available joining conductors
Connecting:
Connected with the operative system through the
provided conductors
*Note: The breakers are offered with mounted accessory
DS1 MAX-electronic type with mounted MX
Catalogue number
400V
230V
DS1 400/3300
444511
44452
DS1 630/3300
44455
DS1 800/3300
44459
Type
Catalogue number
400V
230V
DS1 MAX 400/3300
444511M
44452M
44456
DS1 MAX 630/3300
44455M
44456M
44460
DS1 MAX 800/3300
44459M
44460M
DS1-thermomagnetic type with mounted MX

Type
Mounting:
Mounted in a special jack after cover dismounting
DS1 MAX-thermomagnetic type with mounted

MX
Catalogue number
400V
230V
DS1 125/40
44317
44318
DS1 125/50
44321
44322
DS1 125/63
44326
44327
DS1 125/80
44331
44332
DS1 125/100
44336
44337
DS1 125/125
44340
44341
DS1 160/100
44463
44464
DS1 160/160
44333
44344
DS1 250/200
44347
44348
DS1 250/250
44351
44352
DS1 400/315
44467
44468
DS1 400/400
44355
44356
DS1 630/500
44359
44360
DS1 630/630
44363
44364
DS1 800/800
44367
44368
Type
Catalogue number
400V
230V
DS1 MAX 125/63
44326M
44327M
DS1 MAX 125/80
44331M
44332M
DS1 MAX 125/100
44336M
44337M
DS1 MAX 125/125
44340M
44341M
DS1 MAX 250/160
44333M
44344M
DS1 MAX 250/200
44347M
44348M
DS1 MAX 250/250
44351M
44352M
DS1 MAX 400/400
44355M
44356M
DS1 MAX 630/630
44363M
44364M
DS1 MAX 800/800
44367M
44368M
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Type
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty
43
DS1-electronic type with mounted MX
YEAR
WARRANTY
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Under voltage release (MN)

The device switches off and/or does not allow the
switching on of the breaker to which it is mounted at
power breakdown or voltage decrease under certain
limits
MN for DS1 - 125-160
Technical data:
operating voltage: 230/400V 50Hz
electromagnetic coil 6VA for breakers up to 400A
electromagnetic coil 10VA for breakers 630-800A
DS1-electronic type with mounted MN

Type
MN for DS1 - 250-800
400V
230V
DS1 400/3300
44483
44484
DS1 630/3300
44487
DS1 800/3300
44491
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty
switches off at voltage decrease under 75% of the

operating
Mounting:
Note: The breakers are offered with mounted accessory
Connecting:
provided conductors
DS1 MAX-electronic type with mounted MN

Type
Catalogue number
400V
230V
DS1 MAX 400/3300
44483M
44484M
44488
DS1 MAX 630/3300
44487M
44488M
44492
DS1 MAX 800/3300
44491M
44492M
DS1-thermomagnetic type with mounted MN

Type
44
Catalogue number
YEAR
WARRANTY

MN
Catalogue number
400V
230V
DS1 125/40
44383
44384
DS1 125/50
44387
44388
DS1 125/63
44391
44392
DS1 125/80
44395
44396
DS1 125/100
44399
44402
DS1 125/125
44407
44408
DS1 160/100
44475
44476
DS1 160/160
44411
44412
DS1 250/200
44415
44416
DS1 250/250
44419
44420
DS1 400/315
44479
44480
DS1 400/400
44423
44424
DS1 630/500
44427
44428
DS1 630/630
44431
44432
DS1 800/800
44435
44436
Type
Catalogue number
400V
230V
DS1 MAX 125/63
44391M
44392M
DS1 MAX 125/80
44395M
44396M
DS1 MAX 125/100
44399M
44402M
DS1 MAX 125/125
44407M
44408M
DS1 MAX 250/160
44411M
44412M
DS1 MAX 250/200
44415M
44416M
DS1 MAX 250/250
44419M
44420M
DS1 MAX 400/400
44423M
44424M
DS1 MAX 630/630
44431M
44432M
DS1 MAX 800/800
44435M
44436M
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Auxiliary contact (OF)

According to the way of mounting the auxiliary
devices can be divided into two groups:
internal devices accessories for whose mounting
it is necessary to dismount the cover of the breakers
and fix them in specially designed jacks
external devices they are mounted right on the
top cover of the breaker
INTERNAL DEVICES
Auxiliary contact (OF)
The device changes its condition conformably to the
breakers condition; it has a NO and a NC contactor.
YEAR
WARRANTY
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty
Technical data:
for breakers up to 160A operating current through
the auxiliary contact: 3A
for breakers from 250 to 800A operating current
through the auxiliary contact: 6A
labeling of the cables
Mounting:
Note:
The breakers are offered with mounted accessory
Connecting:
provided conductors
DS1-thermomagnetic type with mounted OF

Catalogue number
DS1 125/40
44301
Type
Catalogue number
DS1 125/50
44302
DS1 MAX 125/63
44303M
DS1 125/63
44303
DS1 MAX 125/80
44304M
DS1 125/80
44304
DS1 MAX 125/100
44305M
DS1 125/100
44305
DS1 MAX 125/125
44306M
DS1 125/125
44306
DS1 MAX 250/160
44307M
DS1 160/160
44307
DS1 MAX 250/200
44308M
DS1 250/200
44308
DS1 MAX 250/250
44309M
DS1 250/250
44309
DS1 MAX 400/400
44310M
DS1 400/400
44310
DS1 MAX 630/630
44312M
DS1 630/500
44311
DS1 MAX 800/800
44313M
DS1 630/630
44312
DS1 800/800
44313
CIRCUIT BREAKERS

OF
Type
45
to the product:
Standard EN 60947-1
EN 60947-2
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MCCB with auxiliary devices mounted (MX+OF)
and (MN+OF)
DS1 -electronic type with mounted MX+OF
Type
Catalogue number
400V
230V
DS1 400/3300
44453
44454
DS1 630/3300
44457
44458
DS1 800/3300
44461
44462
DS1-thermomagnetic type with mounted

MX+OF
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Type
46
Catalogue number
400V
230V
DS1 125/40
44319
44320
DS1 125/50
44323
44324
DS1 125/63
44328
44330
YEARS
GUARANTEE
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty
DS1 MAX-electronic type with mounted MX+OF

Type
Catalogue number
400V
230V
DS1 MAX 400/3300
44453M
44454M
DS1 MAX 630/3300
44457M
44458M
DS1 MAX 800/3300
44461M
44462M
DS1 MAX- thermomagnetic type with mounted

MX+OF
Type
Catalogue number
400V
230V
44328M
44330M
DS1 MAX 125/80
44334M
44335M
DS1 MAX 125/100
44338M
44339M
DS1 MAX 125/63
DS1 125/80
44334
44335
DS1 MAX 125/125
44342M
44343M
DS1 125/100
44338
44339
DS1 MAX 250/160
44345M
44346M
DS1 125/125
44342
44343
DS1 MAX 250/200
44349M
44350M
DS1 160/100
44465
44466
DS1 MAX 250/250
44353M
44354M
DS1 160/160
44345
44346
DS1 MAX 400/400
44357M
44358M
DS1 250/200
44349
44350
DS1 MAX 630/630
44365M
44366M
DS1 250/250
44353
44354
DS1 MAX 800/800
44369M
44370M
DS1 400/315
44469
44470
DS1 400/400
44357
44358
DS1 630/500
44361
44362
DS1 630/630
44365
44366
DS1 800/800
44369
44370

MN+OF
Type
Catalogue number
400V
230V
DS1 MAX 125/63
44393M
44394M
DS1 MAX 125/80
44397M
44398M
DS1 MAX 125/100
44405M
44406M
DS1 MAX 125/125
44409M
44410M
DS1 MAX 250/160
44413M
44414M
DS1 MAX 250/200
44417M
44418M
DS1 MAX 250/250
44421M
44422M
DS1 MAX 400/400
44425M
44426M
DS1 MAX 630/630
44433M
44434M
DS1 MAX 800/800
44437M
44438M
DS1 MAX-electronic type with mounted MN+OF

Type
Catalogue number
400V
230V
DS1 MAX 400/3300
44485
44486M
DS1 MAX 630/3300
44489M
44490M
DS1 MAX 800/3300
44493M
44494M
DS1-thermomagnetic type with mounted MN+OF

Type
Catalogue number
400V
230V
DS1 125/40
44385
44386
DS1 125/50
44389
44390
DS1 125/63
44393
44394
DS1 125/80
44397
44398
DS1 125/100
44405
44406
DS1 125/125
44409
44410
DS1 160/100
44477
44478
DS1 160/160
44413
44414
DS1 250/200
44417
44418
DS1 250/250
44421
44422
DS1 400/315
44481
44482
DS1 400/400
44425
44426
DS1 630/500
44429
44430
DS1 630/630
44433
44434
DS1 800/800
44437
44438
DS1-electronic type with mounted MN+OF

Type
Catalogue number
400V
230V
DS1 400/3300
44485
44486
DS1 630/3300
44489
44490
DS1 800/3300
44493
44494
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Terminal plates for MCCB - DS1 and DS1 MAX type
YEAR
WARRANTY
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty
Straight copper electro-tinned extensions enabling cable connection outside the switch terminals and providing excellent contact with the switch terminal base. Terminal extensions with different cross section are available depending on the switch rated power.
Mounting:
Extensions are directly bolt mounted to the switch terminal base.
Terminal plates for MCCB - DS1

Type
Rated current ()
Catalogue number
3pcs/set
Catalogue number
4pcs/set
TP 125
125
31125
314125
TP 160
160
31160
314160
TP 250
250
31250
314250
TP 400
400
31400
314400
TP 630
630
31630
314630
TP 800
800
31850
314850
TP 1250
1250
311250
Type
Rated current ()
Catalogue number
3pcs/set
Catalogue number
4pcs/set
TP 125 MAX
125
31125M
TP 250 MAX
250
31250M
TP 400 MAX
400
31400M
314400M
TP 630 MAX
630
31630M
314630M
TP 800 MAX
800
31850M
314850M
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Terminal plates for MCCB - DS1 MAX
47
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Remote control (manual)

Description:
The device switches off/on the breaker to which
manual operative rotary mechanism is mounted
two operating positions of the executive mechanism fixed at 90C
YEAR
WARRANTY
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty
Mounting:
The base is mounted with bolts right on the cover
(scheme 1 mounting), and the handle is mounted at
the door of the distribution box, using an extension
axis it is joined to the base
Remote control for MCCB, DS1

Type of the breaker
DS1 125A
DS1 160A
DS1 250A
DS1 400A
DS1 630A
DS1 800A
Dimensions (mm)
C
Dmin
25
30
35
45
70
70
50
50
70
107
119
119
50
50
70
107
119
119
65
65
80
85
110
110
Dmax
Packing/
Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
115
115
130
105
110
110
1
1
1
1
1
1
44967
44968
44969
44970
44971
44972
Dmax
Packing/
Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
115
115
130
105
110
1
1
1
1
1
44966M
44967M
44969M
44970M
44972M
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Remote control for MCCB, DS1 MAX
48
Type of the breaker
DS1 MAX 63A

DS1 MAX 125A
DS1 MAX 250A
DS1 MAX 400A
DS1 MAX 630/800A
Dimensions (mm)
C
Dmin
25
25
35
45
70
50
50
70
107
119
50
50
70
107
119
65
65
80
85
110
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Remote control (electrical)

Description:
The device switches off/on the breaker to which
manual operative rotary mechanism is mounted
two operating positions of the executive mechanism fixed at 90C
YEARS
GUARANTEE
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty
Mounting:
The base is mounted with bolts right on the cover
(scheme 1 mounting), and the handle is mounted at
the door of the distribution box, using an extension
axis it is joined to the base
DS1 - 125-160
Electrical remote control for MCCB DS1
Dimensions (mm)
Type of the breaker
DS1 - 250-800
DS1 125
DS1 160
DS1 250
DS1 400
DS1 630
DS1 800
A1
B1
103.5
103.5
139
226
226
226
110
110
-
30
35
132
132
132
132
90
90
-
92
92
105
132
132
132
Packing/
Box (pcs)
1
1
1
1
1
1
Catalogue number
Operating voltage (V)
230V
400V
44912
44913
44914
44915
44916
44916
44907
44908
44909
44910
44911
44911
Electrical remote control for MCCB DS1 MAX
L1
H1
116
116
116
176
176
90
90
90
130
130
50
50
70
107
119
77
77
77
115
115
12,5
12,5
15
27
31
1
1
1
1
1
Catalogue number
Operating voltage (V)
230V
400V
44917M
44912M
44914M
44915M
44916M
44906M
44907M
44909M
44910M
44911M
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
DS1 MAX - 63-250
DS1 MAX 63A

DS1 MAX 125A
DS1 MAX 250A
DS1 MAX 400A
DS1 MAX 630/800A
Packing/
Box (pcs)
49
Dimensions (mm)
Type of the breaker
INDIRECT PROTECTION
DEVICES
INDIRECT
PROTECTION DEVICES
Residual current devices | 52

Combined residual current devices | 56
Surge arresters | 59
INDIRECT PROTECTION DEVICES

Residual current devices
COVER
TERMINALS
NON-FLAMABLE BASE
CONTACT
TEST BUTTON
SECONDARY WINDING OF TT
PRIMARY WINDING
SUMMING CURRENT TRANSFORMER (TT) WITH TOROID
ELECTROMAGNETIC RELAY
BREAKING (RELEASE) UNIT
10
10
2
8
5
52
9
1
6
10

Residual current devices JEL1

The residual current device works with no extra power supply to the operating mechanism. It compares
the magnitude of the currents through the neutral
and phase conductors. The conductors are coiled on
toroid and together with the secondary winding form
a measurement transformer. The power conductors
are coiled in such a way that the magnetic fields
generated at electrical current flow through them
are mutually neutralized. At failure in the insulation
of some of the conductors or at presence of a person
under voltage, the system is misbalanced and the
magnetic fields can not be neutralized. This residual
field generates in the secondary current winding,
called current leakage. The device breaks when the
value of this current exceeds the limit value of the
residual current breaker.
Type AC for AC current
Functions:
switching off heavy-loaded electrical circuits
at insulation damage of the conductors to the
consumers
switching off heavy-loaded electrical circuits at
presence of a person under voltage
used to protect not only particular consumers/
circuits, but also the whole panel
control: manual switching on and automatic
switching off at exit failure
Technical data:
Rated operating voltage: 230/400V; 50/60 Hz
Rated current: according to the table
Responsiveness: 30; 100; 300; 500mA
Time delay until break: <0.1s at I n and <0.04s
at 2I n
Dimensions (mm)
W1
W2
H1
H2
D1
D2
35
70
81
35
45
50
72
YEAR
WARRANTY
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty
Short circuit current wear resistance: 4500, 6000

Joining terminal: flat (tunnel) screw terminal made
of 1.5 coldly draw-plated plane Q235A
Type of the plastic:
material: self-extinguishing nylon PA66
permitivity strength: >18MV/m
Contact head: silver graphite CAg(5)
Static contact: pure copper T2Y2 type
IP code: IP>20
Indication for operating (switched on) position
Plastic material of the breakers of UV rays and nonflammable
Connecting:
power supply busbar (only for bipolar)
flexible or rigid conductors with corresponding
section
Mounting:
on DIN-rail
The residual current device is mounted in the
distribution box, and after the device the neutral
conductor and the earthing conductor must not be
connected together. In order to work accurately, the
device must have three- or five-conductor grid with
separate protective conductor (PE) (e.g. earthing
system TN-S or TT with three or five conductors). The
corpus of the consumer depending on the grid type
must be connected either to the protective conductor or be earthed. (Fig.1)
to the product:
EN 61008-1
EN 61008-2; EN 60947-1
53
Connecting scheme
Fig. 1

Residual current devices JEL1
YEAR
WARRANTY
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty
Residual current devices JL 1, 6kA - Type - alternating fault currents sensible. Impulse withstand voltage 2000VAC
54
Catalogue number
Leakage current I n (mA)
30
100
300
Type
Number
of poles
Breaking
capacity
(kA)
JEL 1
2P
10.0
1 / 60
40210
40212
40213
40214
JEL 1
2P
16.0
1 / 60
40216
40217
40218
40219
JEL 1
2P
20.0
1 / 60
40292
40293
40294
40295
JEL 1
2P
25.0
1 / 60
40221
40222
40223
40224
JEL 1
2P
32.0
1 / 60
40231
40232
40233
40234
JEL 1
2P
40.0
1 / 60
40241
40242
40243
40244
JEL 1
2P
63.0
1 / 60
40261
40262
40263
40264
JEL 1
2P
80.0
1 / 60
40281
40282
40283
40284
JEL 1
2P
100.0
1 / 60
40291
40296
40297
40298
Type
Number
of poles
Breaking
capacity
(kA)
JEL 1
4P
10.0
1 / 30
40410
40412
40413
40414
JEL 1
4P
16.0
1 / 30
40416
40417
40418
40419
JEL 1
4P
20.0
1 / 30
40492
40493
40494
40495
JEL 1
4P
25.0
1 / 30
40421
40422
40423
40424
JEL 1
4P
32.0
1 / 30
40431
40432
40433
40434
JEL 1
4P
40.0
1 / 30
40441
40442
40443
40444
JEL 1
4P
63.0
1 / 30
40461
40462
40463
40464
JEL 1
4P
80.0
1 / 30
40481
40482
40483
40484
JEL 1
4P
100.0
1 / 30
40491
40496
40497
40498
Rated current Packing/Box

In (A)
(pcs)

In (A)
(pcs)
Catalogue number
30
100
300
500
500

These are Residual Current Devices (RCDs) JEL 1A with

enhanced sensibility and fast - operating protection
devices applicable in circuits with harmonic or direct
pulsating current component presence.
Functions:
switching off electrical circuits on load at conductor insulation breaking to the consumer
switching off electrical circuits on load at direct and
indirect contact
switching off electrical circuits on load at alternating earth fault currents during consequent light
impact
switching off consumers at harmonic presence due
to luminescent lights
switching off consumers in DC circuits at fault currents presence
mechanical indicator for ON position
YEAR
WARRANTY
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty
Technical data:
Rated operating voltage: 230/400V; 50 Hz
Rated current: according to the table
Responsiveness: 30; 100; 300; 500mA
Time delay until break: <0.1s at I n and <0.04s
at 2I n
Short circuit current wear resistance: 6000
IP code: IP>20
Connecting:
power supply busbar (only for bipolar)
section
Mounting:
on DIN-rail
Residual current devices JL 1A, 6kA - Type - alternating and pulsating direct fault currents sensible Impulse withstand voltage 2000VAC/ 400VDC
Type
Number
of poles
Breaking
capacity
(kA)

In (A)
(pcs)
Catalogue number
30
100
300
500
JEL 1A
2P
10.0
1 / 60
40510
40512
40513
40514
JEL 1A
2P
16.0
1 / 60
40516
40517
40518
40519
JEL 1A
2P
20.0
1 / 60
40592
40593
40594
40595
JEL 1A
2P
25.0
1 / 60
40521
40522
40523
40524
JEL 1A
2P
32.0
1 / 60
40531
40532
40533
40534
JEL 1A
2P
40.0
1 / 60
40541
40542
40543
40544
JEL 1A
2P
63.0
1 / 60
40561
40562
40563
40564
JEL 1A
2P
80.0
1 / 60
40581
40582
40583
40584
JEL 1A
2P
100.0
1 / 60
40591
40596
40597
40598
Type
Number
of poles
Breaking
capacity
(kA)
JEL 1A
4P
10.0
1 / 30
40610
40612
40613
40614
JEL 1A
4P
16.0
1 / 30
40616
40617
40618
40619

In (A)
(pcs)
Catalogue number
30
100
300
Type A for AC/DC current
Residual current protection type A - JEL 1A
55
500
JEL 1A
4P
20.0
1 / 30
40692
40693
40694
40695
JEL 1A
4P
25.0
1 / 30
40621
40622
40623
40624
JEL 1A
4P
32.0
1 / 30
40631
40632
40633
40634
JEL 1A
4P
40.0
1 / 30
40641
40642
40643
40644
JEL 1A
4P
63.0
1 / 30
40661
40662
40663
40664
JEL 1A
4P
80.0
1 / 30
40681
40682
40683
40684
JEL 1A
4P
100.0
1 / 30
40691
40696
40697
40698
to the product:
EN 61008-1
EN 61008-2; EN 60947-1

Combined residual current devices
to the product:
EN 61 009-1; EN 61009-2;
Combined circuit breakers with residual current

devices(RCD)-JEL5
Description of the operating system:
It is a combination of automatic circuit breaker and
residual current electromagnetic device. It combines
the properties of the two elements. The circuit breaker
reacts at short circuit or overload in the protected circuit, and the electromagnetic residual current device
- at failure in the conductors insulation. It compares
the magnitude of the currents through the neutral
and phase conductors. The conductors are coiled on
toroid and together with the secondary winding form
a measurement transformer. The power conductors
are coiled in such a way that the magnetic fields
generated at electrical current flow through them
are mutually neutralized. At failure in the insulation
of some of the conductors or at presence of a person
under voltage, the system is misbalanced and the
magnetic fields can not be neutralized. This residual
magnetic field generates in the secondary current
winding, called current leakage. When the value of
this current exceeds the limit value of the residual
current breaker the device breaks and the residual
current device switches off from the power supply
grid. The device operates without any extra power
supply to the electromagnetic residual current and is
not influenced by voltage varying or decreasing.
Functions:
short circuit or overload
consumers
presence of a person and animals under voltage
switching off at failure in the insulation after the
breaker
Dimensions (mm)
56
W1
C1
C2
D1
D2
35
81
35
45
50
72
YEAR
WARRANTY
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty
Technical data:
Rated operating voltage: 230V 50 Hz
Circuit breaker rated current: according to the table
Residual current responsiveness: 30; 100; 300;
500mA
Time delay until break:
of the residual current device: <0.1s at I n and
<0.04s at 2I n
of the circuit breaker: <0.1s
Circuit breaker tripping curve: C
Surge voltage wear resistance:2000V
Breaking capacity: 10000
Joining terminal: flat (tunnel) screw terminal made
of 1.5 coldly draw-plated plane Q235A
Type of the plastic:
material: self-extinguishing nylon PA66
dielectrical strength: >18MV/m
Contact head: silver graphite CAg(5)
Static contact: pure copper T2Y2 type
IP code: IP>20
Breakers plastic material of UV rays and nonflammable
Connecting:
section
Mounting:
on DIN-rail
The residual current device is mounted in the distribution box, and after the device the neutral conductor
and the earthing conductor must not be connected
together. In order to work accurately, the device must
have three- or five-conductor grid with separate operating neutral conductor (N) and separate protecting
conductor (PE) (e.g. earthing system TN-S or TT with
three or five conductors).
Combined electromagnetic residual current device and circuit breaker 2P 6kA

Type
designation
Breaking
Number of
capacity
poles
(kA)
Rated
current
(A)
Packing /
Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
30
100
300
500
JEL5
10
7 / 60
40010
40011
40013
40015
JEL5
16
7 / 60
40016
40017
40018
40019
JEL5
25
7 / 60
40025
40021
40023
40026
JEL5
32
7 / 60
40032
40031
40033
40035
JEL5
40
7 / 60
40040
40041
40043
40045

Description of the operating system:

It is a combination of automatic circuit breaker and
residual current electromagnetic device. It combines
part of the properties of the two elements. The circuit
breaker reacts at short circuit in the protected circuit,
and the electromagnetic residual current device - at
failure in the conductors insulation. It compares the
rate of the currents through the conductors in an
electronic comparator. The residual current device
operates normally at voltage feed. The voltage is
needed for the comparators energizing a semiconductor element with constantly set leakage
current rate. This rate is compared with the actual
rate. When the margin of the comparison is neutral,
the residual current device does not operate, but
at failure in the protected circuit insulation when
it exceeds the set margin it operates and switches
off the protection. For the normal operation of the
residual current device, the power supplying circuit
voltage must be over 170V and there must be no
time variation.
C1
C2
D1
D2
81
35
45
50
72
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty
Connecting:
power supply busbar (for two- or three polar)
section
Mounting:
on DIN-rail
The residual current device is mounted in the
distribution box, and after the device the neutral
conductor and the earthing conductor must not be
connected together. In order to work accurately, the
device must have separate conductors for operational neutral conductor (N) and protective conductor
(e.g. earthing system TN-S or TT with three or five
conductors).
Dimensions (mm)
35
YEAR
WARRANTY
Technical data:
Rated operating voltage: 230/400V 50 Hz
Circuit breaker rated current: according to the table
Residual current responsiveness: 30; 100; 300;
500mA
Time delay until break:
of the residual current device: <0.1s at I n and
<0.04s at 2I n
of the circuit breaker: <0.1s
Circuit breaker tripping curve: C
Breaking capacity: 4500A; 6000
IP code: IP>20
Functions:
short circuit or overload
consumers
presence of a person under voltage
switching off at exit failure
W1
Combined circuit breakers with electronic residual

current devices
Combined electronic residual current device with circuit breaker 2P, 10

Type designation
Number of
poles
JEL 3 C6
JEL 3 C10
JEL 3 C16
JEL 3 C20
JEL 3 C25
JEL 3 C32
JEL 3 C40
2P
2P
2P
2P
2P
2P
2P
Breaking Rated current "Packing/Box Leakage current

Catalogue number
capacity (kA)
(A)
(pcs)"
I n (mA)
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
6
10
16
20
25
32
40
5/100
5/100
5/100
5/100
5/100
5/100
5/100
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
40906
40910
40916
40920
40925
40932
40940
Combined electronic residual current device with circuit breaker 2P, 6

Type
designation
JEL 4 C10
JEL 4 C16
JEL 4 C20
JEL 4 C25
JEL 4 C32
JEL 4 C40
Breaking
Number of
capacity
poles
(kA)
2
2
2
2
2
2
6
6
6
6
6
6
Rated
current
(A)
Packing /
Box (pcs)
10
16
20
25
32
40
1 / 60
1 / 60
1 / 60
1 / 60
1 / 60
1 / 60
30
40211E
40215E
40225E
40240E
40265E
40274E
Catalogue number
100
300
40207E
40245E
40229E
40204E
40260E
40270E
40208E
40235E
40230E
40246E
40236E
40273E
500
40209E
40237E
40238E
40268E
40269E
40275E
57
to the product:
EN 61 009-1; EN 61009-2;

Combined circuit breakers with electronic
residual current devices-JEL6
YEAR
WARRANTY
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty
Combined electronic residual current device 1P + N

Compares the leakage current between the phase and neutral conductors.
Type
designation
Breaking Rated
Number
Packing /
capacity current
of poles
Box (pcs)
(kA)
(A)
Catalogue number
30
100
300
500
JEL 6 C10
1P+N
10
12 / 240
40110
40111
40113
40114
JEL 6 C16
1P+N
16
12 / 240
40116
40117
40118
40119
JEL 6 C25
1P+N
25
12 / 240
40125
40121
40123
40126
JEL 6 C40
1P+N
40
12 / 240
40140
40141
40133
40145
JEL 6 C50
1P+N
50
12 / 240
40163
40161
40136
40165

Combined electronic residual current device 2P
Compares the leakage current between the phase and neutral conductors or between two phases.
Type
designation
58
Breaking Rated
Number
Packing /
capacity current
of poles
Box (pcs)
(kA)
(A)
Catalogue number
30
100
300
500
JEL 6 C10
2P
10
6 / 120
40211
40207
40208
40209
JEL 6 C16
2P
16
6 / 120
40215
40245
40235
40237
JEL 6 C25
2P
25
6 / 120
40225
40229
40230
40238
JEL 6 C40
2P
40
6 / 120
40240
40204
40246
40268
JEL 6 C50
2P
50
6 / 120
40265
40260
40236
40269
Combined electronic residual current device 3P

Compares the leakage current between the phases.
Type
designation
Breaking Rated
Number
Packing /
capacity current
of poles
Box (pcs)
(kA)
(A)
Catalogue number
30
100
300
500
JEL 6 C10
3P
10
3 / 60
40310
40311
40313
40314
JEL 6 C16
3P
16
3 / 60
40316
40317
40318
40319
JEL 6 C25
3P
25
3 / 60
40325
40321
40323
40324
JEL 6 C40
3P
40
3 / 60
40340
40341
40343
40344
JEL 6 C50
3P
50
3 / 60
40363
40361
40336
40365
Combined electronic residual current device 3P+N

Compares the leakage current between the three phases and neutral conductors.
Type
designation
Breaking Rated
Number
Packing /
capacity current
of poles
Box (pcs)
(kA)
(A)
Catalogue number
30
100
300
500
JEL 6 C10
3P+N
10
2 / 40
40411
40407
40408
40409
JEL 6 C16
3P+N
16
2 / 40
40415
40445
40439
40438
JEL 6 C25
3P+N
25
2 / 40
40425
40420
40428
40429
JEL 6 C40
3P+N
40
2 / 40
40440
40404
40447
40446
JEL 6 C50
3P+N
50
2 / 40
40465
40401
40436
40469

Surge arresters
The breakers are in accordance with the

directives of EC Low voltage directives
(LVD) no. 2006/95/EC and Electromagnetic Compatibility Directives (EMC) no.
2004/108/EC.
Surge arresters SPD type

The surge arrester consists of a semi-conductor
valve element that opens at certain conditions. At
normal conditions of the system, the surge arrester
has infinitely high resistance between the protected
conductors and earthing circuit. At voltage increase
due to atmospheric nature or system failure, the valve
element opens and leads the excessive voltage to the
grounded circuit.
After reversion of the normal voltage the valve element closes. The arrester can endure high momentary
overloading.
Functions:
protection of heavy-loaded electrical circuits from
overload
control: automatic switching off at exit failure and
recovery after eliminating the danger
Technical data:
Rated operating voltage Uc: - the operating voltage
of the surge arrester 275/440V; 50Hz
Surge voltage Up: the voltage created in surge arrester terminals at rated discharge current running:
according to the tables
YEAR
WARRANTY
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty
Rated discharge current In the rated value of

discharge current with a sinusoid 8/20s, which
can be repeatedly led to the ground: according to
the tables
Full discharge current Imax the peak value of the
discharge current with a sinusoid 8/20s, which
the surge arrester can bear once: according to the
table
Constant operating current: up to 800A for 1P, 2P
and 3P; up to 600A for 1P + N, 3P + N
Indication for damaged surge arrester
Offered in types: 1P; 1P + N; 3P; 3P + N
Connecting:
section
Mounting:
on DIN-rail
mounting in the distribution box on the front or
right before the breaker according to the attached
schemes
COLOUR CODE for all types 5 - yellow; white 10; green 20 and red 40
Dimensions (mm)
H1
H2
D1
D2
90
45
43,5
58
59
Surge arresters
the product:
Standard EN61 643-1
The surge arrester selection is made according to the overload risk level or atmosphere activity, named B, C or D
(from high to low risk level).
The company offers the following models of arresters:
Model SPD Bxxxx for systems with exceptionally high risk level. Mounted mainly in the beginning of the
installation or in the main panel.
Model SPD Cxxxx for systems with high or average risk level. Mounted in the beginning of the installation or
before the breaker.
Model SPD Dxxxx for systems with low risk level. Suitable for secondary protection of consumers in combination with SPD Bxxxx/SPD Cxxxx
Surge arresters
Surge arresters
60
Type of the arrester
In (kA)
Imax (kA)
Uc (V)
Up (kV)
Packing/Box (pcs) Catalogue number
SPD-D5/1p
10
275
1.2
17 / 170
64101
SPD-C10/1p
10
20
275
1.2
17 / 170
64102
SPD-C20/1p
20
40
275
1.8
17 / 170
64103
SPD-B40/1p
40
60
275
17 / 170
64104
In (kA)
Imax (kA)
Uc (V)
Up (kV)
SPD-D5/1pN
10
275
1.2
8 / 80
64201
SPD-C10/1pN
10
20
275
1.2
8 / 80
64202
SPD-C20/1pN
20
40
275
1.8
8 / 80
64203
SPD-B40/1pN
40
60
275
8 / 80
64204
In (kA)
Imax (kA)
Uc (V)
Up (kV)
SPD-D5/3p
10
440
1.2
5 / 50
64301
SPD-C10/3p
10
20
440
1.2
5 / 50
64302
SPD-C20/3p
20
40
440
1.8
5 / 50
64303
SPD-B40/3p
40
60
440
5 / 50
64304
In (kA)
Imax (kA)
Uc (V)
Up (kV)
SPD-D5/3pN
10
440
1.2
4 / 40
64401
SPD-C10/3pN
10
20
440
1.2
4 / 40
64402
SPD-C20/3pN
20
40
440
1.8
4 / 40
64403
SPD-B40/3pN
40
60
440
4 / 40
64404

Surge arresters
Combined surge arresters AC DC
YEAR
WARRANTY
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty
Specially designed surge arresters providing protection of solar and photo - voltaic systems; designed to protect
system against overvoltages resulting from indirect light impact. They could be installed in earthed and non earthed systems. They break photo - voltaic generator electric circuit when voltage reaches or over passes limit
threshold value, providing photo - voltaic protection against destroying.
COLOUR CODE for all types 5 - yellow; white 10; green 20 and red 30
In (kA)
Imax (kA)
Uc (V)
Up (kV)
Packing/Box
(pcs)
Catalogue
number
SPD-DC-D5/1p
10
275 AC/440 DC
1.2
17 / 170
64105
SPD-DC-C10/1p
10
20
275 AC/440 DC
1.5
17 / 170
64106
SPD-DC-C20/1p
20
40
275 AC/440 DC
1.8
17 / 170
64107
SPD-DC-B40/1p
30
60
275 AC/440 DC
2.2
17 / 170
64108
In (kA)
Imax (kA)
Uc (V)
Up (kV)
Packing/Box
(pcs)
Catalogue
number
10
275 AC/440 DC
1.2
8 / 80
64205
10
20
275 AC/440 DC
1.5
8 / 80
64206
SPD-DC-C20/1pN
20
40
275 AC/440 DC
1.8
8 / 80
64207
SPD-DC-B40/1pN
30
60
275 AC/440 DC
2.2
8 / 80
64208
In (kA)
Imax (kA)
Uc (V)
Up (kV)
Packing/Box
(pcs)
Catalogue
number
SPD-DC-D5/3p
10
385 AC/500 DC
1.2
5 / 50
64305
SPD-DC-C10/3p
10
20
385 AC/500 DC
1.5
5 / 50
64306
SPD-DC-C20/3p
20
40
385 AC/500 DC
1.8
5 / 50
64307
SPD-DC-B40/3p
30
60
385 AC/500 DC
2.2
5 / 50
64308
In (kA)
Imax (kA)
Uc (V)
Up (kV)
Packing/Box
(pcs)
Catalogue
number
SPD-DC-D5/3pN
10
385 AC/500 DC
1.2
4 / 40
64405
SPD-DC-C10/3pN
10
20
385 AC/500 DC
1.5
4 / 40
64406
SPD-DC-C20/3pN
20
40
385 AC/500 DC
1.8
4 / 40
64407
SPD-DC-B40/3pN
30
60
385 AC/500 DC
2.2
4 / 40
64408
61
Surge arresters
SPD-DC-D5/1pN
SPD-DC-C10/1pN
Type AC for AC/DC current
CONTACTORS
CONTACTORS
Low voltage contactors LT1-D/K | 64

Low voltage contactors LT1-F | 67
Low voltage contactors- LP-1D | 68
Low voltage contactors CJ19-43 | 69
Low voltage reverse contactors | 70
Auxiliary contact blocks | 71
Module contactors | 73
CONTACTORS
Low voltage contactors LT1-D/K
BASE
STATIC MAGNETIC CORE
COIL
REVERSE SPRING
MOVABLE MAGNETIC CORE
MOVABLE CONTACTS
LID
STATIC CONTACTS
AUXILIARY CONTACT
SCREWS
10
TERMINAL PROTECTION CAPS
11
CONTACTORS
11
10
64
CONTACTORS
LT 1 D contactors are alternating current contactors for control of circuits and consumers operating
in class AC3. It is suitable for consumers with rated
current up to 95A. The contactors are offered in a
type with 1 NO contact for operating circuit making
and the models over 40A also have 1NC operating
contactor.
Functions:
switching on/off heavy-loaded electrical circuits at
controlling signal to the coil
making of control systems
used as an operating element in process control
panels
reliable separation of power contactors
secured cover of the movable part of the contactor
Technical data:
Operation class: utilization category AC-3
Rated operating voltage of power contactors: up to
690V; 50/60Hz
Composition of the power contact surfaces: unalloyed copper with coating 80% AgSnO
Surge voltage wear resistance: >8000V
Rated voltage of the coil: from 12 to 400V AC
Coil material: pure copper type QA-1
Magnetic core material: alloy steel type 360
Type
LT1-HK 06~12/LT-1K
YEAR
WARRANTY
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty
Moveable part material: Bakelite

Limits of the controlling coil voltage: operating
range of coil
Joining terminal: screw terminal
Connecting:
flexible conductors with or without cable
terminal
rigid conductors
Number of cycles per hour: 1200 UP TO 32A; 600
for 40-95A
Pole leaking power: up to 13W
Mounting:
on DIN-rail
with bolts to the surface
mounting position: vertical gradient maximum
5
Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and non-flammable (self-extinguishing material)

a
34/35
45
4.5
45
50
50
LT-D 09~12
34/35
50/60
4.5
47
70
82
LT1 D18
34/35
50/60
4.5
47
70
87
LT1 D25
40
48
4.5
57
80
95
LT1 D32
40
48
4.5
57
80
100
LT-D 40~65
40
100/110
6.5
77
126
116
LT-D 80~95
40
100/110
6.5
87
126
127
CONTACTORS

product:
Standard EN 60947-1; EN 60 947-4-1
The products are in accordance with the
(LVD) no. 73/23 EEC and Electromagnetic Compatibility Directives (EMC) no.
89/336 EEC.
65

product:
Standard EN 60947-1; EN 60 947-4-1
2004/108/EC.
CONTACTORS
Power
consumption Rated
of coil (VA) current in
AC-3 440V
220V 380V
660V closed open
to up
415V 440V
230V 400V
690V inrush hold
Rated capacity (kW)
CONTACTORS
Type number
66
Tight- Section of
ening the power Packing/
moment supply Box (pcs)
(N.m) conductor
Catalogue number according to the coil voltage (V)

230V
400V
12V
24V
36V
48V
110V
LT 1 - K 0610
1.5
1NO
2.2
2.2
2.2
60
6A
1.7
0.75-2.5 1 / 100 23061E 23062E 23063E 23064E 23065E 23066E 23067E
LT 1 - K 0910
2.2
1NO
3.7
3.7
3.7
60
9A
1.7
0.75-2.5 1 / 100 23091E 23092E 23093E 23094E 23095E 23096E 23097E

0.75-2.5 1 / 100 23121E 23122E 23123E 23124E 23125E 23126E 23127E
LT 1 - K 1210
1NO
60
12A
1.7
LT1 - D0910
1NO
2.2
5.5
60
9A
1.7
1-4
1 / 50
23091 23092 23093 23094 23095 23096 23097
LT1 - D0901
1NC
2.2
5.5
60
9A
1.7
1-4
1 / 50
23273 23270 23271 23272 23277 23278 23279
LT1 - D1210
1NO
5.5
5.5
5.5
7.5
60
12A
1.7
1-4
1 / 50
23121 23122 23123 23124 23125 23126 23127
LT1 - D1201
1NC
5.5
5.5
5.5
7.5
60
12A
1.7
1-4
1 / 50
23274 23280 23281 23282 23283 23284 23285
LT1 - D1810
1NO
7.5
10
60
18A
1.7
1-4
1 / 50
23181 23182 23183 23184 23185 23186 23187
LT1 - D1801
1NC
7.5
10
60
18A
1.7
1-4
1 / 50
23275 23286 23287 23288 23289 23290 23291
LT1 - D2510
1NO
5.5
11
11
11
15
7.5
90
25A
2.5
2.5-10
1 / 50
23251 23252 23253 23254 23255 23256 23257
LT1 - D2501
1NC
5.5
11
11
11
15
7.5
90
25A
2.5
2.5-10
1 / 50
23276 23292 23293 23294 23295 23296 23297
LT1 - D3210
1NO
7.5
15
15
15 18.5 7.5
90
32A
2.5
2.5-10
1 / 50
23321 23322 23323 23324 23325 23326 23327
LT1 - D4011
1NO+1NC
11 18.5 22
22
30
20
200
40A
2.5-16
1 / 20
23401 23402 23403 23404 23405 23406 23407
LT1 - D5011
1NO+1NC
15
22
25
25
33
20
200
50A
6-25
1 / 20
23501 23502 23503 23504 23505 23506 23507
LT1 - D6511
18.5 30
1NO+1NC
37
37
37
20
200
65A
6-25
1 / 20
23651 23652 23653 23654 23655 23656 23657
LT1 - D8011
1NO+1NC
22
37
45
45
45
20
200
80A
10-50
1 / 15
23801 23802 23803 23804 23805 23806 23807
LT1 - D9511
1NO+1NC
25
45
45
45
45
20
200
95A
10-50
1 / 15
23951 23952 23953 23954 23955 23956 23957
CONTACTORS
Low voltage contactors LT1-F

The contactors LT 1- F are alternating current contactors used to control circuits and consumers operating
in normal working conditions with switching on /
off the consumer and dirty working environment.
They are suitable for consumers with electrical power
consumption from 115A to 800A.
Functions:
frequently switching on/off heavy-loaded electrical
circuits at controlling signal to the coil
making of systems for consumers control
panels
reliable separation of power contactors
Technical data:
Operation class: utilization category AC-3
Rated operating voltage of power contactors: up to
1000V; 50/60Hz
Composition of the power contact surfaces: unalloyed copper with coating 80% AgSnO
Coil composition: pure coil copper QA-1 type
Magnetic core composition: steel alloy 360
Movable part composition: bakelite
YEAR
WARRANTY
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty

range of coil
Connecting:
terminal
rigid conductors
rail
Number of cycles (switching on) per hour: 200
Pole leaking power: from 16 to 80W
Mounting:
mounting position: vertical gradient maximum 10C
Type
Q1
LT 1 F150
163.5
170
171
107
150
26
57.5
40
LT 1 F225
168.5
197
181
113.5
172
21
51.5
48
LT 1 F265
201.5
203
181
141
178
39
66.5
48
LT 1 F400
213
206
219
145
182
43
74
48
LT 1 F630
309
304
255
155
264
60
89
80
LT 1 F800
309
304
255
155
264
60
89
80
CONTACTORS

product:
Standard EN 60947-1; EN 60 947-4-1
2004/108/EC.
67
Type number
Tightening Packing/
moment Box (pcs)
(N.m)
Catalogue number according to the coil voltage (V)

230V
400V
12V
24V
36V
48V
110V
LT1 - F115
30
55
59
59 59
80
60
45
550
115 A
18
1/4
23111 23112 23113 23114 23115 23116 23117
LT1 - F150
40
75
80
80 90
100
65
45
550
150 A
25
1/4
23151 23152 23153 23154 23155 23156 23157
LT1 - F225
63
110 110 110 129 129
100
55
805
225 A
35
1/2
23861 23862 23863 23864 23865 23866 23867
LT1 - F265
75
132 140 140 160 160
147
10
700
265 A
35
1/2
23261 23262 23263 23264 23265 23266 23267
LT1 - F400
110 200 220 250 257 280
185
18 1000 400 A
50
1/1
23751 23752
LT1 - F630
200 335 375 400 400 450
450
25 1500 630 A
50
1/1
23771 23772
LT1 - F800
250 450 450 450 450 475
450
15 1300 800 A
50
1/1
23881 23882
Note: At mounting the containers from the series in control schemes a distance must be provided at the side of the contactor in case of eventual coil change.
Power
consumption Rated
of coil (VA) current in
AC-3 440V
220V 380V
660V
to up
415V 440V 500V
1000V closed open
230V 400V
690V
Motor rated capacity (kW)
CONTACTORS
Low voltage contactors- LP-1D
product:
Standard EN60947-1; EN 60947-4-1
The products are in accordance
with the directives of EC Low voltage
directives (LVD) no. 2006/95/EC and
Electromagnetic Compatibility Directives (EMC) no. 2004/108/EC
Low voltage contactors with direct current coil

LP-1D
The contactors LP1 D are alternating current contactors with DC operating of coil for control. The power
plugs of the contactor are designed for control of
alternating current circuits and consumers operating in normal operating class AC-3 with frequently
switching on/off the consumer and dirty working environment. The contactors are suitable for consumers
with electrical power consumption from 9A to 225A.
Functions:
switching on/off alternating current consumers in
direct current controlling schemes at controlling
signal to the coil
making of systems for consumers control
panels
reliable separation of power contacts
Technical data:
Rated operating voltage of the coil: from 12V DC
to 220V DC
Rated operating voltage of the power circuit: up to
690V DC
CONTACTORS
Low voltage contactors- LP-1D
68
Type
Rated
current
()
Auxiliary
contact
(pcs.)
230V
400V
415V
440V
LP 1 D0910
1NO
2.20
4.00
4.00
4.00
YEAR
WARRANTY
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty
insulation voltage: 690V

range of coil
Connecting:
terminal
rigid conductors
Number of cycles per hour: 1200 up to 32A; 600
for 40-95A
Mounting:
on DIN-rail

C
47
47
47
57
57
77
77
77
87
163.5
163.5
168.5
76
76
76
86
86
129
129
129
129
170
170
197
95
95
95
101
101
176
176
176
182
171
171
181
34/35
34/35
34/35
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
48
50/60
50/60
50
50
50
100
100
100
100
150
150
172
Type
LP 1 D0910
LP 1 D1210
LP 1 D1810
LP 1 D2510
LP 1 D3210
LP 1 D4011
LP 1 D5011
LP 1 D6511
LP 1 D9511
LP 1 F115
LP 1 F150
LP 1 F225
690V
Packing/Box
(pcs)
12V
24V
36V
48V
110V
230V
5.50
1/40
23962
23098
23130
23971
23980
23139
Rated capacity of the consumer (kW)
Catalogue number according to the coil voltage (V DC)
LP 1 D1210
12
1NO
3.00
5.50
5.50
5.50
7.50
1/40
23963
23128
23131
23972
23981
23140
LP 1 D1810
18
1NO
4.00
7.50
7.50
7.50
10.0
1/30
23964
23188
23132
23973
23982
23141
LP 1 D2510
25
1NO
5.50
11.0
11.0
11.0
15.0
1/20
23925
23258
23133
23974
23983
23142
1NO
LP 1 D3210
32
7.50
15.0
15.0
15.0
18.5
1/30
23966
23328
23134
23975
23984
23143
LP 1 D4011
40
1NO+1NC 11.0
18.5
18.5
18.5
30.0
1/10
23967
23408
23135
23976
23985
23144
LP 1 D5011
50
1NO+1NC 15.0
22.0
22.0
22.0
33.0
1/10
23968
23508
23136
23977
23986
23145
LP 1 D6511
65
1NO+1NC 18.5
30.0
30.0
30.0
37.0
1/10
23969
23658
23137
23978
23987
23146
LP 1 D9511
95
1NO+1NC 25.0
45.0
45.0
45.0
45.0
1/10
23970
23958
23138
23979
23988
23147
LP 1 F115
115
30.0
55.0
59.0
59.0
80.0
1/4
23911
23118
23914
23917
23989
23148
1NO
LP 1 F150
150
1NO
40.0
75.0
80.0
80.0
100
1/4
23912
23158
23915
23918
23990
23149
LP 1 F225
225
1NO
63.0
110
110
110
129
1/2
23913
23228
23916
23919
23994
23201
CONTACTORS
Low voltage contactors CJ19-43
Low voltage contactors for switching on of
capacitor banks CJ19-43
Functions:
switching on/off of capacitor banks for reactive
power compensation
making of systems for compensation of the energy
reactive component
lowering of the peak transitional currents at switching on/off of the capacitor
reliable separation of power contacts
secured part of the contactor against consumer
contact
do not allow manual operation
Type
CJ19-32 DPK

B
C
56
75
85
85
122
122
122
32
74
127
127
127
165
165
165
Rated capacity
of the consumer (kVAr)
130
180
200
200
230
230
230
150
150
157
157
157
157
157
CONTACTORS
Rated current
()
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty
Mounting:
on DIN-rail or
5
Technical data:
Operation class: utilization category AC6b
Rated operating voltage of the controlling coil:
230V AC; 50/60Hz
CJ19-32 DPK
CJ19-40 DPK
CJ19-65 DPK
CJ19-95 DPK
CJ19-115DPK
CJ19-150DPK
CJ19-170DPK
YEAR
WARRANTY

690V AC
Limits of the controlling coil voltage: from 0.8 to
1.15 Uc
Number of the contacts: 3 NO power contacts
+1NO operative
Connecting:
terminal
rigid conductors
Number of cycles (switching on) per hour: up to
600
The AC contactors CJ19-43 are specially designed

electrical devices for commutation of three phase
capacitors used for power correction. They are
alternating current contactor LT1 Dxx with mounted a
group for peak current lowering from the transitional
process of the capacitors switching on/off. This group
is a combination of current limiting resistors, switched
on in the beginning of the transitional process
(switching on/off of the capacitor group).
The contactors are suitable for capacitors with rate up
to 50 kVAr.
Type
69
Coil voltage
(V)
Packing/Box
(pcs)
Catalogue
number
400/440V
690V
12.5
230
1/20
23932
CJ19-32 DPK
32
12.5
400
1/20
23910
CJ19-40 DPK
40
12.5
15
230
1/16
23900
CJ19-40 DPK
40
12.5
15
400
1/16
23940
CJ19-65 DPK
65
25
30
230
1/16
23961
CJ19-65 DPK
65
25
30
400
1/16
23965
CJ19-95 DPK
95
30
36
230
1/16
23909
CJ19-95 DPK
95
30
36
400
1/16
23995
CJ19-115 DPK
115
35
40
230
1/4
23991
CJ19-150 DPK
150
40
50
230
1/4
23992
CJ19-170 DPK
170
50
60
230
1/4
23993
Low voltage contactors CJ19-43

product:
Standard EN60947-1; EN 60947-4-1
CONTACTORS
Low voltage reverse contactors
product:
Standard EN60947-1; EN 60947-4-1
LT 4-Dxx series contactors is suitable for across- the

line starting and reversing of-3 phase squirrel cage
and slip ring motors. It consist of two magnetic contactors LT1D. The contactor is provided whit a built-in
interlock safety mechanism. The contactor is used for
reverse control of induction motors with shortly rotor.
The contactors from the series are offered for consumers up to 95A.
Functions:
switching on of electrical motors in one direction
of rotation and reversing of the rotation direction at
outside command
reliable switching on or separation of power
contacts
secured part of the contactors against consumer
contact
impossibility for simultaneous switching on of the
two contactors from the group due to mechanical
locking
CONTACTORS
Technical data:
Operation class: AC 3
230V AC; 50/60 Hz
690V AC
Low voltage reverse contactors
70
Reverse contactors LT4-Dxx
YEAR
WARRANTY

Limits of the controlling coil voltage: from 0.8 to
1.15 Uc
Number of plugs: 3 NO power contacts +1NO
operative (for contactors over 40A there is also
additional 1NC contact)
Connecting:
terminal
rigid conductors
Note: The contactors are offered without factory
cabling
000 000
000 000
Number of cycles (switching on) per hour: up to
600
Mounting:
on DIN-rail or
5

B
LT 4 - D1810
100
70
83
LT 4 - D2510
130
80
98
LT 4 - D3210
130
80
105
LT 4 - D4011
167
126
116
LT 4 - D6511
167
126
116
LT 4 - D9511
182
127
127
Type
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty
Type
Rated
current
()
230V
400V
415V
440V
690V
Packing/
Box (pcs)
Catalogue
number
LT 4 D1810
18
7.5
7.5
7.5
10
1 / 20
23301
LT 4 D2510
25
5.5
11
11
11
15
1 / 20
23302
LT 4 D3210
32
7.5
15
15
15
18.5
1 / 20
23303
LT 4 D4011
40
11
18.5
18.5
18.5
30
1/8
23304
LT 4 D6511
65
18.5
30
30
30
37
1/8
23305
LT 4 D9511
95
25
45
45
45
45
1/6
23306
Rated capacity of the consumer (kW)
CONTACTORS
Auxiliary contact blocks
product:
Standard EN 60947-4-1
LT01-KNxx
W1
W2
32
40
35
26
45
L1
L2
48
6,5
37
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty
Auxiliary contacts
At necessity the element provide auxiliary number
of contacts. They are specially designed for mounting on the movable part of the magnetic core of the
contactors LT 1K/D series.

Connecting:
terminal
rigid conductors
Functions:
extending the number of the operative contactors
up to 4 in different
Combinations
switches on simultaneously with the other
contact system of the contactor
Operation class: AC 3
Mounting:
on the movable cover of the contactor through
pinching
5
Type
Number of contacts
Rated current
Section of the
conductor (mm2)
Catalogue number
LT01-DN02
2NC
6A
0,5-1
23002
LT01-DN11
NO+NC
6A
0,5-1
23011
LT01-DN20
2NO
6A
0,5-1
23020
LT01-DN22
2NO+2NC
6A
0,5-1
23022
LT01-DN40
4NO
6A
0,5-1
23040
LT01-DN04
4NC
6A
0,5-1
23004
LT01-KN11
NO+NC
6A
0,5-1
23001
LT01-KN22
2NO+2NC
6A
0,5-1
23003
71
Dimensions (mm)
H2
YEAR
WARRANTY
CONTACTORS
LT01-DNxx
Auxiliary contacts
CONTACTORS
Auxiliary contacts LT03-DN11

Providing on necessity additional number of plug
points and are mounted sideward to the movable
part of the magnetic cores of contactors of the series
LT1 D. Variants with two additional plug points NO
and NC are offered.
Functions:
expanding the number of the operational plug
points
switching on simultaneously with the rest of the
contact system
of the contactor
YEAR
WARRANTY
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty
Environment operational regime: 3
Double connector: screw connector
Connection:
flexible conductors with or without cable end
solid conductors
Mounting method:
mounting position sideward to the contactor
Plastic: resistant to UV and non-burning (selfextinguishing material)
Type
Rated current
Section of the conductor

(mm2)
Catalogue number
L03-DN11
6A
0,5-1
23311
Dimensions (mm)
W1
W2
73
48
22
12,5
72
CONTACTORS
Time delay contact block LT02-Dxx
YEAR
WARRANTY
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty
LT02-Dxx is designed to set time intervals from 0.1 to 180s in different control schemes. It is used most
frequently in combination with contactors from LT1-Dxx series to form star/delta starters for electrical motor
control, as it provides the necessary time for motor winding.
72
Dimensions (mm)
W
L1
h1
h2
33
48
22
14
59
W2
45
Type
Number of contacts
Time delay
Catalogue number
L02-DT0
NO+NC
0.1~3s
23901
L02-DT2
NO+NC
0.1~30s
23902
L02-DT4
NO+NC
10~180s
23903
CONTACTORS
Module contactors
Technical data:
Operation class: AC 7a
230V AC; 50/60 Hz
H1
Dimensions (mm)
YEAR
WARRANTY
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty
Rated operating voltage of the power circuit: up

to 690V AC
Connecting:
terminal
rigid conductors
Mounting:
on DIN-rail or
5
Type
In
Coil voltage (V)
Contacts
K20
20A
230V
2NO
1/12/120
23008
K20
20A
230V
NO+NC
1/12/120
23007
K20
20A
230V
2NC
1/12/120
23009
K20
25A
230V
NO+NC
1/12/100
23012
K20
25
230V
2NO
1/12/100
23013
H1
D1
D2
K20
25A
230V
2NC
1/10/100
23014
81
31
66
18
K20
40A
230V
NO+NC
1/6/60
23015
K20
40A
230V
2NO
1/6/60
23016
K20
40A
230V
2NC
1/6/60
23017
Dimensions (mm)
C
D1
D2
H3
H4
66
48
45
20
35
85
K40
25A
230V
2NO+2NC
1/6/60
23410
K40
25A
230V
3NO+1NC
1/6/60
23411
K40
25A
230V
4NO
1/6/60
23412
K40
25A
230V
4NC
1/6/60
23413
K40
40A
230V
2NO+2NC
1/4/40
23422
K40
40A
230V
3NO+1NC
1/4/40
23423
K40
40A
230V
4NO
1/4/40
23409
K40
40A
230V
4NC
1/4/40
23424
K40
63A
230V
2NO+2NC
1/4/40
23425
K40
63A
230V
3NO+1NC
1/4/40
23426
K40
63A
230V
4NO
1/4/40
23427
K40
63A
230V
4NC
1/4/40
23428
CONTACTORS
Modular contactors K series are used for commutation of mono-phase and three-phase low power
electrical consumers. They provide connection
between the consumers in small overall dimensions,
silent work, mounting only at DIN-rails.
Functions:
switching on of consumers
reliable switching on or separation of power
contacts
Module contactors K series
73
Module contactors

product:
Standard EN 61095
DEVICES FOR CONTROLAND

PROTECTION OF ELECTRICAL
MOTORS
DEVICES
FOR CONTROLAND PROTECTION

OF ELECTRICAL MOTORS
Thermal relays | 76
Thermomagnetic automatic breaker | 78
Auxiliary devices for thermomagnetic automatic breaker | 80
Starters | 81
Frequency inverters | 86
Soft starter | 87
DEVICES FOR CONTROL AND PROTECTION OF EL. MOTORS

Thermal overload relays

product:
Standard EN 60947-1
EN 60947-4-1
(LVD) no 2006/95/EC and Electromagnetic Compatibility Directives (EMC) no.
2004/108/EC.
76

The thermal relays LT 2- K/Exx series are three pole
relays designed for protection of induction motors
from overload or overheat. They are mounted to contactors LT 1 K/Dxx series and an operating circuit for
motor control is passed through their NC contacts.
They have bimetallic releases /1 per phase/ through
them the motors current flows and indirectly mated.
The bimetallic releases bend subject to the influence
of mating and this results in tripping of the relay.
The contacts change switch position. The choice
of a suitable protection prevents motors operation
at unusual temperature conditions and guarantees
maximum constant operation, increases the effectiveness and prolongs the term of exploitation.
Functions:
switching off alternating current consumers at current overload
making of control systems for consumers
used as a protective operating element in control
panels of induction motors
Technical data:
Rated operating voltage: up to 690V AC; 50/60 Hz
Rated operating current range: up to 690V AC
insulation voltage: >690V
temperature compensation: -25 +55
tripping category: class 10A
Type
YEAR
WARRANTY
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty
Connecting:
flexible or rigid conductors with or without
cable terminal for joining to the consumer
to the contactor through the relay terminals
the connecting terminals with the consumer
can be adjusted according to the type of the
contactor
Indication for protection activating
Possibility for choice of the protection restoring
(through the blue button)
Possibility for range adjustment of the protection
activating
Possibility for operation at higher frequency
Mounting:
mounting to the contactor: to the terminals of the
contactor as it is additionally clamped to its frame
through a pin
5
Note: To protect the consumer from short circuit,
before the combination contactor- thermal relay, a
suitably measured breaker or safety device should be
mounted.
Dimensions (mm)
a
LT 2 - Kxx
81
50
98
47
92
44
17
LT 2 - E13xx
86
55
10.7
108
47
92
44
17
LT 2 - E23xx
86
55
109
47
92
44
17
LT 2 - E33xx
115
76
9.5
124
54
109
70
30
For contactor
LT1-K06 type
Motor capacity (kW)

220V
380V
660V
230V
400V
690V
Rated
current
(A)
Protection
adjustment
range
Packing/Box
(pcs)
Catalogue
number
LT2-K0303
LT2-K0306
LT2-K0307
LT2-K0308
LT2-K0310
LT2-K0312
LT2-K0314
LT2-K0316
0.37
0.75
1.10
1.10
2.20
3.00
0.30
1.20
1.80
2.60
3.70
5.50
8.00
11.5
0.25 - 0.30
0.80 - 1.20
1.20 - 1.80
1.80 - 2.60
2.60 - 3.70
3.70 - 5.50
5.50 - 8.00
8.00 - 11.5
1 / 100
1 / 100
1 / 100
1 / 100
1 / 100
1 / 100
1 / 100
1 / 100
13403
13406
13407
13408
13410
13411
13412
13413
0.37
0.75
1.10
1.50
2.20
4.00
5.00
1.10
1.50
2.20
3.00
4.00
5.50
7.50
220V
230V
380V
400V
660V
690V
Rated
current
(A)
Protection
adjustment
range
Packing/
Box (pcs)
Catalogue
number
LT2-E1301
LT2-E1302
LT2-E1303
LT2-E1304
LT2-E1305
LT2-E1306
LT2-E1307
LT2-E1308
LT2-E1310
LT2-E1312
LT2-E1314
LT2-E1316
LT2-E1321
LT2-E1322
LT2-E1353
0.37
0.75
1.10
2.00
2.20
3.70
4.00
5.50
9.00
0.37
0.75
1.50
2.20
3.70
4.00
5.50
7.50
9.00
11.0
0.37
0.55
1.10
1.50
3.00
4.00
5.50
7.50
11.0
15.0
18.5
18.5
0.16
0.25
0.40
0.63
1.00
1.60
2.50
4.00
6.00
8.00
10.0
13.0
18.0
25.0
33.0
0.10 - 0.16
0.16 - 0.25
0.25 - 0.40
0.40 - 0.63
0.63 - 1.00
1.0 - 1.60
1.6 - 2.50
2.5 - 4.00
4.0 - 6.00
5.5 - 8.00
7.0 - 10.0
9.0 - 13.0
12.0 - 18.0
17.0 - 25.0
23.0 - 32.0
1 / 100
1 / 100
1 / 100
1 / 100
1 / 100
1 / 100
1 / 100
1 / 100
1 / 100
1 / 100
1 / 100
1 / 100
1 / 100
1 / 100
1 / 100
13001
13002
13003
13004
13005
13006
13007
13008
13010
13012
13014
13016
13021
13022
13053
Motor capacity (kW)

220V
230V
380V
400V
660V
690V
Rated
current
(A)
Protection
adjustment
range
Packing/
Box (pcs)
Catalogue
number
LT2-E2353
LT2-E2355
11
15
11
15
18.5
22.0
32
36
23.0 - 32.0
28.0 - 36.0
1 / 100
1 / 100
13253
13255
For contactor
LT1-D40 to
LT1-D95 type
220V
230V
380V
400V
660V
690V
Rated
current
(A)
Protection
adjustment
range
Packing/
Box (pcs)
Catalogue
number
LT2-E3355
LT2-E3357
LT2-E3359
LT2-E3363
LT2-E3365
18.5
22
30
45
55
18.5
22
30
45
55
30
30
37
55
75
40
50
65
80
93
30.0 - 40.0
37.0 - 50.0
48.0 - 65.0
63.0 - 80.0
80.0 - 93.0
1 / 50
1 / 50
1 / 50
1 / 50
1 / 50
13355
13357
13359
13363
13365
For contactor
LT1-F115 to
LT1-F150
220V
230V
380V
400V
660V
690V
Rated
current
(A)
Protection
adjustment
range
Packing/
Box (pcs)
Catalogue
number
LT2-F4367
40
75
100
150
90-150
1/30
13367
For contactor
LT1-F225 to
LT1-F400
220V
230V
380V
400V
660V
690V
Rated
current
(A)
Protection
adjustment
range
Packing/
Box (pcs)
Catalogue
number
LT2-F4368
LT2-F4369
LT2-F4370
63
100
147
110
160
250
129
220
335
220
330
500
132-220
200-330
300-500
1/30
1/18
1/18
13368
13369
13370
For contactor
LT1-D32 type
For contactor
LT1-F630
LT2-F4371
Motor capacity (kW)
Motor capacity (kW)
Motor capacity (kW)
Motor capacity (kW)

220V
230V
380V
400V
660V
690V
Rated
current
(A)
Protection
adjustment
range
Packing/
Box (pcs)
Catalogue
number
200
335
450
630
380-630
1/18
13371
77
Motor capacity (kW)
For contactor
LT1-D9 to
LT1-D25 type

Thermomagnetic automatic breaker
Thermomagnetic automatic breaker TM2/TM3

The thermomagnetic automatic breakers TM 2-Exx
series are devices designed for control and protection
of induction motors from overload, overheat or short
circuit. The overload motor protection is carried out
by the built in the breaker thermal elements, and the
short circuit protection is carried out by the magnetic
elements. These magnetic elements allow the adjustment of the current leakage which is 13 times the
maximum current of the thermal protection. The
overload protection elements include automatic
compensation for the ambient temperature changes.
In combination with under voltage release the
thermomagnetic breaker TM 2-Exx also provides
protection of the motors from fall out of a phase from
the power supply. The choice of a suitable protection
prevents motors operation at unusual temperature
conditions and guarantees maximum constant
operation, increases the effectiveness and prolongs
the term of exploitation.
Dimensions
78
Functions:
switching off alternating current consumers at current overload
switching off the electrical circuit to the consumer
at inlet short circuit
protects the motor at lack/lowering of the phase
voltage (if there is under voltage release)
used as a protective operating element in control
panels of induction motors
possibility for change/choice of the protection
current (according to the operating current of the
motor)
automatic compensation of the ambient temperature
UVR
Auxiliary
contact
Dimensions (mm)
H
l1
l2
D
9,2
89
16
50
10
w1
w2
h1
h2
44,5
18
22
45
YEAR
WARRANTY
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty
Technical data:
Rated operating voltage: up to 690V AC; 50/60 Hz
Rated operating current range: from 0.1 to 80A
according to the type in table 1
Connecting:
cable terminal for joining to the consumer
to the contactor through the relay terminals
the connecting terminals with the consumer
can be adjusted according to the type of the
contactor
Indication for protection activating
Switching on of the breaker manually with button
I and switching off with button O manually or
automatically at failure or after activating of the
protection
activating
Possibility for independent operation or as an element of an automation system
tripping category: class 10A
Mounting:
mounting to DIN-rail
5
instantaneous
shortcircuit
release (A)
Current setting
range (A)
Thermal current
Packing/Box
Ithe TM2-E
(pcs)
(A)
Catalogue
number
Type
220V
230V
400V
410V
440V
500V
690V
TM2-E01
1.5
0.1 - 0.16
0.16
1 / 50
48001
TM2-E02
0.06
0.06
2.4
0.16 - 0.25
0.25
1 / 50
48002
TM2-E03
0.06
0.09
0.09
5.0
0.25 - 0.40
0.40
1 / 50
48003
TM2-E04
0.12
0.18
0.37
8.0
0.40 - 0.63
0.63
1 / 50
48004
TM2-E05
0.09
0.25
0.25
0.37
0.55
13.0
0.63 - 1.00
1 / 50
48005
TM2-E06
0.18
0.37
0.37
0.37
0.75
22.5
1 - 1.60
1.6
1 / 50
48006
TM2-E07
0.37
0.75
0.75
1.10
1.50
33.5
1.6 - 2.50
2.5
1 / 50
48007
TM2-E08
0.55
1.10
1.50
1.50
2.20
51.0
2.5 - 4.00
1 / 50
48008
TM2-E10
1.10
2.20
2.20
3.00
4.00
78.0
4 - 6.30
6.3
1 / 50
48010
TM2-E14
1.50
3.00
4.00
4.00
5.50
138
6 - 10.0
1 / 50
48014
TM2-E16
2.20
5.50
5.50
7.50
9.00
170
9 - 14.0
13
1 / 50
48016
TM2-E20
4.00
7.50
7.50
9.00
15.0
223
13 - 18.0
17
1 / 50
48020
TM2-E21
5.50
9.00
11.0
11.0
18.5
327
17 - 23.0
21
1 / 50
48021
TM2-E22
5.50
11.0
11.0
15.0
22.0
327
20 - 25.0
23
1 / 50
48022
TM2-E32
7.50
15.0
15.0
18.5
22.0
416
24 - 32.0
24
1 / 50
48032
TM3-E40
11.0
18.5
22.0
25.0
33.0
480
25 - 40.0
32
1 / 15
48040
TM3-E63
15.0
30.0
33.0
40.0
55.0
550
40 - 63.0
50
1 / 15
48063
TM3-E80
22.0
40.0
45.0
55.0
63.0
665.5
56 - 80.0
64
1 / 15
48080
79
Rated capacity of three-phase motor in AC-3 category

Auxiliary devices for thermomagnetic automatic breaker TM2/TM3

product:
Standard EN 60947-1
EN 60 947-2; EN 60947-4-1
The products are in accordance with
the directives of EC Low voltage
directives (LVD) no 2006/95/EC and
Electromagnetic Compatibility Directives (EMC) no. 2004/108/EC.
Auxiliary devices for TM2/TM3
80

product:
Standard EN 60529
Voltage release (VR) for TM 2
YEAR
WARRANTY
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty
For increasing the effectiveness of the thermomagnetic breakers TM 2-Exx operation, they can be supplied
with auxiliary devices, designed for widening the practice range and improving the technical characteristics of
the breakers.
The release is designed to switch off the thermomagnetic breaker when the controlling voltage falls under
breaking level 0.55 to 0.7 UN and does not allow switching on of the breaker unless the voltage is over 0.85 Un.
Functions:
switching off the breaker at power supply voltage fall under 0.55 0.7 Un
does not allow switching on of the breaker when the power supply voltage is under 0.85 Un
prevents unwarranted secondary start of the breaker at falling off and restoring of the power supply voltage
protects the motor at lack/lowering of the phase voltage
used as a protective operating element in control panels of induction motors
Mounting:
laterally to a breaker
At the side of the breaker through special openings
Type
Voltage (V)
Catalogue number
2 U225
3 U385
230
400
48099
48098
Watertight box for TM 2-E
YEAR
WARRANTY
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty
Specially designed plastic box with silicon screen for increasing the IP code from dust and moisture to IP 65.
Designed for thermal-magnetic circuit breakers of up to 32A
Mounting:
mounted to horizontal surfaces (walls) with bolts
the breaker TM2 Exx is fixed inside of it on rail
Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and
non-flammable (self-extinguishing material)
Type
Catalogue number
8083
Auxiliary contact block TM2 AE11- front mounting
YEAR
WARRANTY
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty
It is designed to switch on operational systems or signalization. Designed with one NO and one NC contact.
It changes the position of its contacts according to the position of the breaker (switched on/off ) to which it is
mounted.
Mounting:
laterally to a breaker TM2-Exx
Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and nonflammable (self-extinguishing material)
21
22
Type
Catalogue number
2 E11
48912
13
14

Starters
Auxiliary contact block TM2 AE11- side mounting
YEAR
WARRANTY
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty
Catalogue number
2 N11
3 N11
48911
48913
Starters for direct start

The electromagnetic starters LT 5 Dxx series are
devices designed for remote control, direct control
and protection of induction motors or other electrical
consumers. They are a combination of contactors LT
1 Dxx series and thermal protection LT 2 Exx factory
cabled. The starters are offered on the market in metal
or plastic boxes with the corresponding IP code from
dust and moisture. At mounting there should be
provided protection of the device from short circuit
through breakers or disconnectors. If necessary, at clients order the factory mounted thermal protection in
the pneumatic starter can be substituted. The choice
Functions:
switching on/off alternating current consumers
does not allow secondary unwarranted switching on of the starter at transitory lowering of the
voltage
protects the motor from overload in the range of
the corresponding thermal protection
Technical data:
Rated voltage of the controlling voltage: 230/400V
AC; 50/60 Hz
Note: In case you need different controlling coils
YEAR
WARRANTY
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty
voltage of the starters you can turn to our regional

representatives.
Rated operating voltage: 690V
Rated operating current range: from 7 to 93 A AC
Little power consumption and small dimensions
Connecting:
cable terminal for joining to the consumer and
section according to the motor power
two by two inlets/outlets supplied with orifices
for the cables
activating
IP code: IP 44
Mounting:
mounting to a flat surface (wall) with bolts/
screws
Metal corpus: corrosion-proof coating
81
Starters

product:
Standard EN 60947-1
EN 60947-4-1
The products are in accordance with
the directives of EC Low voltage
directives (LVD) no 2006/95/EC and
Electromagnetic Compatibility Directives (EMC) no. 2004/108/EC.
Type
It is designed to switch on operational systems or signalization. Designed with one NO and one NC contact. It changes the position of its contacts according to the position of the breaker (switched on/off) to which it is mounted.
Mounting:
laterally to a breaker TM2-Exx
Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and non-flammable
(self-extinguishing material)

Starters
Type
Rated
current
(A)
Thermal
relay adjustment range
220V
230V
380V
400V
415V
440V
LT5 D093
2.2
4.0
4.0
7 .. 10A
LT5 D123
3.0
5.5
5.5
12
9 .. 13A
4.0
7.5
9.0
18
12 .. 18A
Rated
current
(A)
Thermal
120
140
LT5 D185
Coil
voltage
(V)
Packing/
Box (pcs)
Catalogue
number
230
1 / 16
43091
400
1 / 16
43092
230
1 / 16
43121
4.0
1 / 16
43122
230
1 / 16
43181
400
1 / 16
43182
Coil
voltage
(V)
Packing/
Box (pcs)
Catalogue
number
230
1 / 16
43251
400
1 / 16
43252
230
1 / 16
43321
400
1 / 16
43322
Coil
voltage
(V)
Packing/
Box (pcs)
Catalogue
number
230
1/6
43401
400
1/6
43402
230
1/6
43651
Note: Upon request the thermal relay will be replaced

2 x PE13
166
2 x PE13
2 x 5.5
88
150
Type
Rated capacity of motors 50/60Hz

AC-3 category
220V
230V
380V
400V
415V
440V
LT5 D255
5.5
11
11
25
17 .. 25A
LT5 D325
7.5
15
15
32
23 .. 32A
Rated
current
(A)
Thermal

135
142
185
2 x PE16
16
2 x 5.5
101

AC-3 category
PE13
165
82
Starters
Type

AC-3 category
220V
230V
380V
400V
415V
440V
LT5 D405
11.0
18.5
22
40
30 .. 40A
LT5 D655
18.5
30.0
37
65
48 .. 65A
LT5 D955
25.0
45.0
45
150
161

312
2 x PE29
4 x 7.7
105
181
PE13
195
95
80 .. 93A
400
1/6
43652
230
1/6
43951
400
1/6
43952

Starters
The electromagnetic starters LT 3 Dxx series are devices designed for remote control, direct control and
protection of induction motors coiled and operating
according to a starter scheme star/delta. They are a
combination of three contactors LT 1 Dxx series, time
relay and a set of buttons start and stop factory
cabled. They provide the easy motor unwinding
giving possibility for setting the time for unwinding
in star as the time for switching between star and
delta is fixed to 0.5 seconds.
The starters are offered on the market in two types:
closed type metal boxes providing the corresponding IP code from dust and moisture (IP 54) as
at mounting there should be provided protection
of the device from short circuit through breakers or
disconnectors
open type for mounting in distribution boxes as
at mounting there should be provided protection
of the device from short circuit through breakers or
disconnectors
The starters are offered on the market without
mounted thermal protection which is purchased separately according to the motor capacity. The choice
If necessary, at clients order the power supply operating voltage of the pneumatic starter can be changed.
Functions:
switching on/off alternating current three phase
motors operating according to a scheme star delta
voltage
YEAR
WARRANTY
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty
indication of the operating condition through a

valve indicator
possibility for mounting of additional contacts (for
the open type)
Technical data:
Rated voltage of the controlling voltage: 400V AC;
50/60 Hz
representatives.
Rated operating current range: from 7 to 93A AC
insulation voltage: >690V
Connecting:
three by three inlets/outlets supplied with
orifices for the cables
IP code: IP54
Mounting:
screws
The metal body is covered with corrosion-proof
paint
Star/deltastarter
83
Starters

product:
Standard EN 60947-1
EN 60947-4-1
2004/108/EC.

Starters
Type designation
(without a box)

Starters
width
depth
L3-D25
135
170
160
L3-D32
135
170
160
L3-D40
150
285
190
L3-D65
150
285
190
L3-D95
150
310
190
Type designation
(without a box)
84
height
Rated capacity (kW)

220V
230V
380V
400V
415V
440V
Rated
current
(A)
Coil
voltage
(V AC)
Packing/
Box (pcs)
Catalogue
number
L3-D25
11
15
15
15
25
400
1/6
43253
L3-D32
15
18.5
18.5
18.5
32
400
1/6
43323
L3-D40
18.5
22
22
22
40
400
1/4
43403
L3-D65
30
55
55
55
65
400
1/4
43653
L3-D95
37
75
75
75
95
400
1/4
43953
Note:
It is necessary that thermal protection with suitable range is mounted to protect the controlled motor.

The shown values of magnetic starters are for normal regimes for motor control, for hard operation regimes
are chosen starters which correspond to the current rating of the motor.
Type designation
(with box)
height
width
depth
LT 3 -B-D25A
370
240
160
LT 3 -B-D32A
370
240
160
LT 3 -B-D40A
470
265
160
LT 3 -B-D65A
470
265
160
LT 3 -B-D95A
470
265
160
Type designation
(with box)
LT 3 - B - D25
Rated capacity (kW)

220V
230V
380V
400V
415V
440V
11
15
15
15
Rated
current
(A)
Coil
voltage
(V AC)
Packing/
Box (pcs)
Catalogue
number
25
400
1/4
43254
LT 3 - B - D32
15
18.5
18.5
18.5
32
400
1/4
43255
LT 3 - B - D40
18.5
22
22
22
40
400
1/2
43256
LT 3 - B - D65
30
55
55
55
65
400
1/4
43257
LT 3 - B - D95
37
75
75
75
95
400
1/2
43258
Note:
It is necessary that thermal protection with suitable range is mounted to protect the controlled motor.

The shown values of magnetic starters are for normal regimes for motor control, for hard operation regimes
are chosen starters which correspond to the current rating of the motor.

Starters
Reverse starter
Functions:
switching on alternating current three phase motors in one winding direction, switching off and
change of the winding direction at giving a signal
voltage
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty

Technical data:
Rated voltage of the controlling voltage: 400V AC;
50/60 Hz
representatives.
Rated operating current range: from 7 to 93 A AC
Connecting:
three by three inlets/outlets supplied with
orifices for the cables
IP code: IP 44
Mounting:
screws
The metal body is covered with corrosion-proof
paint
85
scheme Reverse
Type designation
(with a box)
LT 4 - B - D25
The electromagnetic starters LT4 Dxx series are devices used for direct start, reverse start and protection
of induction motors with short connected rotor. They
are a combination of two contactors LT1 Dxx series
supplied with two buttons start and one stop factory cabled. They provide the unwinding of the motor
in one of the directions with possibility for pushing
the button stop and giving command from the other
start for changing the motor winding direction. The
two contactors are mechanically blocked and do not
allow simultaneous start in both winding directions.
The starters are offered closed type in metal boxes
providing the corresponding IP code from dust and
moisture (IP54) as at mounting there should be
provided protection of the device from short circuit
through breakers or disconnectors. The starters are offered with mounted thermal protection which can be
substituted according to the motor power. The choice
If necessary, at order the power supply operating voltage of the pneumatic starter can be changed.
YEAR
WARRANTY
Rated capacity (kW)
220V
230V
380V
400V
415V
440V
height
width
11.0
15.0
15.0
15.0
240
240
depth
Rated
current
(A)
Coil
voltage (V AC)
Packing/Box
(pcs)
Catalogue
number
160
25
400
1/8
43001
LT 4 - B - D32
15.0
18.5
18.5
18.5
240
240
160
32
400
1/4
43002
LT 4 - B - D40
18.5
22.0
22.0
22.0
270
265
160
40
400
1/2
43003
LT 4 - B - D65
30.0
55.0
55.0
55.0
270
265
160
65
400
1/4
43004
LT 4 - B - D95
37.0
75.0
75.0
75.0
270
265
160
95
400
1/4
43005
LT 4 - B - D25
11.0
15.0
15.0
15.0
240
240
160
25
230
1/4
43006
LT 4 - B - D32
15.0
18.5
18.5
18.5
240
240
160
32
230
1/4
43007
LT 4 - B - D40
18.5
22.0
22.0
22.0
270
265
160
40
230
1/4
43008
LT 4 - B - D65
30.0
55.0
55.0
55.0
270
265
160
65
230
1/4
43009
LT 4 - B - D95
37.0
75.0
75.0
75.0
270
265
160
95
230
1/4
43010
Starters

product:
Standard EN 60947-1
EN 60947-4-1
2004/108/EC.

Frequency inverters
Type of sign
EL1000- G -0150 T3
lid type code: C=metal clips; B=plastic lid
power supply code: T3=three-phase; S2= single phase
motor power
inverter type: G=constant momentum
inverter model

product:
Standard EN60898-1
EN 60947-2
2004/108/EC.
Frequency inverters
86
ELM 1000 frequency inverters

Frequency inverters are designed to control threephase induction motors with short-circuited rotor.
They provide for the implementation of some
control laws, thus becoming an indispensable part
of the control systems for conveyors and packaging
machines, pumps, air conditioning systems, etc. The
ELM 1000 inverter provides the so-called no-sensor
control, V/f control and impulse control while the output load can reach up to 150% within 60 seconds. It
features easy definition of curves and easy parameters
setting of inverter through the use of control panel
buttons. The inverter can auto calibrate according
to the motor power, i.e. if the inverter is connected
to a motor with power different from that set by the
inverter manufacturer, it automatically adjusts its programmable parameters to suit the motor parameters.
Functions:
rotation speed increase automatic and manual
sliding compensation: from 0 to 20%
no-sensor control of the motor
adjustment of the V/F control curve linear or
quadratic
energy saving through automatic optimization of
the V/F curve
PID control law implementation option
omission of resonance frequencies
JOG function
counter function
automatic restart option in case of power supply
failure
fifteen speed degrees control option
control choice from the control panel; external or
COM terminal
frequency control from the control panel, external
potentiometer by current or by voltage
auto-calibration in accordance with the switched
motor
incoming signals on clockwise or counter-clockwise rotation, multi-step control, restart, etc.
outgoing discrete control signal 24V
outgoing analogue control signal 0 10V
DC brake in static mode
dynamic breaking with external breaking resistor
Type
EL1000-G0007S2B
EL1000-G0015S2B
ELM1000-G0022S2B
EL1000-G0007T3B
EL1000-G0015T3B
EL1000-G0022T3B
EL1000-G0037T3B
EL1000-G0040T3B
EL1000-G0055T3B
EL1000-G0075T3B
EL1000-G0110T3C
EL1000-G0150T3C
YEAR
WARRANTY
used in inert electric motor load

output voltage adjustment option
activation of output safety functions option
electronic motor protection
Technical features:
Rated working voltage: 230/400V ; 50 Hz
Permissible working voltage deviation: 10%
Unbalance of phases: < 3%
Frequency fluctuation: < 5%
Output frequency: 0 400 Hz
Output voltage: from 0 to Ubx max
Overload capacity:
constant: up to 110%
momentary: up to 150%
Precision of output frequency adjustment: 0.1%
Type of connection:
the connection of the inverter to the power
supply should always be done through a circuit
breaker of the MCB or MCCB type
connection of consumer to power terminals:
through conductors suitable for the power
connection of control circuits: flexible conductor up to 1.5 mm2
Note: It is not recommendable to mount contactors or other commutation devices between the
frequency inverter and the motor, except as described
in the product passport.
Mounting:
mounting to a flat surface by means of bolts
mounting position vertical gradient maximum 5
Note: When more than one inverter is mounted in a
board, it is recommendable to mount them side by
side and when this is not possible, the appropriate
cooling conditions should be provided.
Plastic: UV-rays resistant and fire resistant (selfextinguishing material)
Ambient temperature: -10 to 65 C
Altitude : up to 2000 m
Function enhancement option: through the inclusion of additional modules

H
150
170
170
170
170
170
250
250
300
300
340
380
105
125
125
125
125
125
162
162
200
200
225
230
139
160
160
160
160
160
233
233
282
282
322
362
94
114
114
114
114
114
145
145
182
182
160
186
120
140
140
140
140
140
150
150
160
160
220
225
4
5
5
5
5
5
6
6
6
6
6
6
Maximum
Input voltage
output power
(V)
(kW)
Type
EL1000-G0007S2B
EL1000-G0015S2B
ELM1000-G0022S2B
EL1000-G0007T3B
EL1000-G0015T3B
EL1000-G0022T3B
EL1000-G0037T3B
EL1000-G0040T3B
EL1000-G0055T3B
EL1000-G0075T3B
EL1000-G0110T3C
EL1000-G0150T3C
0.75
1.5
2.2
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
4.0
5.5
7.5
11
15
Packing/Box
(pcs)
Catalogue
number
4.5
7
9
2
4
6.5
8
9
12
17
23
32
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/1
1/1
1/1
1/1
1/1
1/1
423107M
423115M
423122M
423307M
423315M
423322M
423337M
423340M
423355M
423375M
423391M
423392M
Soft starter ELM 2500

Soft starters are designed to control the start of threephase induction motors with short-circuited rotor. A
number of motor control issues are avoided through
them, and namely: prolonged start moments, autoignition of motor, there is no need of stardelta switching, auto-transformer switching, resistant switching,
etc. The ELM 2500 soft starter pertains to the AC53b
type of starters as per the standard requirements and
it provides rotation of motor and once the operation mode is set, a shunt contactor of the LT 1 D/F
series is switched to control motor operation as the
soft starter is not designed to control motors in a set
mode. Under a stop command in accordance with
the selected control scheme, the soft starter can or
can not be included in shutting the motor down.
Functions:
System functions
over-voltage protection motor will switch off
when power supply exceeds the preset limits
overload protection protects the motor from
overloading
phase loss protection
temperature overload protection
Control functions
Type
EL M25015
EL M25022
EL M25037
EL M25045
EL M25055
EL M25075
Type
EL M25015
EL M25022
EL M25037
EL M25045
EL M25055
EL M25075
YEAR
WARRANTY
output faults
motor faults diagnostics
keyboard or outward control
delayed start option
faults memory
Technical features:
Rated working voltage: 230/400V ; 50 Hz
Permissible working voltage deviation: 10%
Unbalance of phases: < 3%
Frequency fluctuation: < 5%
Obligatory bypass contactor installation
Mounting :
mounting to a flat surface through bolts
mounting position vertical gradient maximum 5
Note: When more than one soft starter is mounted
in a board, it is recommendable to mount them side
by side and when this is not possible, the appropriate
cooling conditions should be provided.
Plastic: UV-rays resistant and fire resistant (selfextinguishing material)
Altitude : up to 2000 m
87
250
250
250
250
250
510
153
153
153
153
153
260
162
162
162
162
162
194
219
219
219
219
219
389
140
140
140
140
140
232
6
6
6
6
6
8
Power of mo- Rated current

tor (kW)
(A)
15
22
37
45
55
75
30
45
76
90
110
150
Type of
Section of
Packing/Box
bypass power supply
(pcs)
contactor conductors
LT 1-D 50
LT 1-D 50
LT 1-D 80
LT 1-D 95
LT 1-F 115
LT 1-F 150
10
10
16
25
25
35
1/1
1/1
1/1
1/1
1/1
1/1
Catalogue
number
42225015
42225022
42225037
42225045
42225055
42225075
Soft starter

product:
Standard EN60947-4-2
EN 60947-1
2004/108/EC.
230
230
230
400
400
400
400
400
400
400
400
400
Maximum
current
output ()
Soft starter
CAPACITY COEFFICIENT
COMPENSATION
CAPACITY
COEFFICIENT COMPENSATION
Complex compensating devices | 90

Capacitor batteries for reactive energy compensation | 91
Cos regulator | 91
CAPACITY COEFFICIENT COMPENSATION

Complex compensating devices
90
The use of electrical energy in industry is invariably

connected with its transformation. The development
of semiconductor elements and the broader coming
of semi-conductor transformers, frequency control,
welding machines and electrical arc furnaces in
industrial projects have a negative impact over the
electrical power quality in the electro distributing
systems. Induction machines need reactive energy to
create electromagnetic field. The reactive component of current is taken from the electro distributing
systems but it leads to additional losses in the power
supply system and makes shorter the exploitation
term of electrical devices. This leads to curving of the
sinusoid form of current and voltage and interferences with harmonic character. Compensating the
reactive power means to fill up the system in such
a way that the needed reactive power to be created
from the compensating device instead of being
taken from the electro transportation system. This
leads to killing the voltage fall and cable losses and
increasing the outlet power of the power transporters
and cutting down the bills for overconsumption of
reactive energy paid by consumers to the electricity supply company. In practice compensating the
reactive energy and high harmonics through LC filters
combined in compensating installations has the
broadest spreading.
There are several types of compensation according to their location:
individual compensation when to every single
motor or consumer is mounted a compensating
system. It is applied to powerful motors and transformers with fixed capacity.
installation compensation when the consumers
from the whole section (workshop) are grouped
and compensation is accomplished for the whole
section.
overall compensation accomplished at full compensation in the inlet of the installation.
According to the type of the compensating
devices compensation can be:
passive when the system supplies constant reactive power. In this case the system does not react
to changes in the size and nature of the harmonic
components and also to the per cent increase of
the reactive energy in time.
active broader spread. The system controls the
form of the consumed current and generates different capacity depending on the load changes.
YEAR
WARRANTY
When designing the electro distributing system of

industrial projects the following tasks are taken into
consideration:
defining the factor of non-sinusoid of the consumers and the voltage harmonic components
defining the additional loading of the capacitor
batteries from the harmonic components and
calculating the filtering elements if needed
The calculation of the compensating device capacity
is done by reading the reactive energy of the system
and the working time of the system. Compensating
devices represent a device of one or several metal
boxes with common rail system, automatic regulator
for cos control RPSF-xx series, different number of
capacitor batteries (according to the capacity of the
device) with different capacity HY 111 series, contactors for capacitor batteries control CJ 19-43 series,
protective elements, etc.
The broadest spreading of compensation has acquired the compensation of harmonics and reactive
energy with capacitors for high voltage. Capacitors HY
111 series are voltage remeasured and are able to endure overload from harmonic components up to 7%
from the basic harmonics. They are used in systems
with high harmonics foul up to 25%.
The high harmonics composition is defined after
measuring the influence rate of each separate harmonics compared to the first one. In Bulgaria mostly
spread are 5, 7, 9, 11 and 13 harmonics. The capacitors
are remeasured for voltage 415V and are normally
mounted right in the compensation systems.
When the high harmonics are over 25% the system is
taken to be foul and in this case except using capacitors, filters for leveling the harmonics are to be used
as well. These filters are calculated on the basis of the
corresponding voltage harmonics and differ for the
different harmonics. They are calculated using complex mathematical programme which reads the foul
rate, the significance per cent of the voltage harmonic
component, etc.

H1
H3
30
35
16
Capacitor batteries HY 111 series are specially designed

three phase dry capacitors for compensation of reactive
energy and correction of the capacity factor. It represents an aluminum cylindrical body in which a metal
polypropylene folio is mounted which does not require
special impregnation. The permittivity characteristics are
acquired through filling with a special mixture on a vegetable base (resins). The capacitor battery is constructed
in such a way that at failure (overload from voltage, current or temperature) breaks the connection to the upper
cover where are the connections to the power supply.
This is done by a specially constructed valve for overpressure mounted right above the capacitor element.
The breaking of the inner couplings provides protection to the staff and environment from damage due to
capacitor element failure. There is a three phase capacitor
in the cylindrical body with built in resistor for rarefying
the capacitors.
YEAR
WARRANTY
The capacitor battery can be used both for passive and

active compensation.
Technical data:
Rated operating voltage: 450V; 50Hz
Surge voltage wear resistance: 6kV per minute
Capacity: from 5,0 to 100,0 kVAr at 450V
Tolerance: 5%
Operating temperature: -40C - +65C
Capacity losses: 0.5W/kVAr
Built in discharging resistance
Admissible current overload: twice as much the
peak current
Discharge time: <50V per minute
Altitude: 2000m
Mounting:
With bolt M12 orM16 to a flat horizontal base
Type of the
battery
Dimensions
H / (mm)
Operating
voltage
(V)
Battery capacity
(kVAr)
Capacity (F)
Packing/Box
(pcs)
Catalogue
number
HY 11A5
HY 11A7
210/76
210/76
450
450
5.0
7.5
3X26.2
3X39
6
6
49005
49007
HY 111A10
240/76
450
10.0
3X52.4
49010
HY 111A15
240/86
450
15.0
3X78.9
49015
HY 111A20
240/116
450
20.0
3X105
49020
HY 111A30
280/160
450
30.0
3X157
49030
HY 111A50
345/180
450
50.0
3X262
49050
HY 111A100
300/300
450
100.0
3X524
49100
HY 111A12*
230 / 85
690
12.5
3X27.9
49031
HY 11A25*
280 / 115
690
25
3X55.7
49032
Note: *Suitable for wind generators
Controller for automatic regulation of the

capacity factor (cos regulator)
The automatic regulators of the capacity factor RPCFxx series are devices for monitoring of low voltage
systems and control of switching on of capacitor
batteries for the capacity factor compensation. There
is possibility for adjustment of the system parameters
and control. Manufactured by the latest CMOS technology, they are distinguished with high degree of
data security, easy programming and secure control
of the outlets. There is possibility for indication and
setting the parameters of the power supply system
as: capacity coefficient, display of the system parameters such as voltage, current and capacity, losses,
protection against overload, overload indication or
lack of voltage, etc.
The change of parameters is performed through a
combination of buttons on the front panel. There
is light diode to indicate which parameter is being
displayed on the screen and which outlets are in
operation. The display is four digital. There is possibility for choice of the working conditions: manual or
automatic.
Type
Number of steps
YEAR
WARRANTY
Technical data:
Rated operating voltage: 230/400V
Operating frequency: 45 65Hz
Surge voltage wear resistance: 6kV per minute
Measurement range: from 0 to 9999kVAr
Measurement accurateness:
voltage: 1.0%
current: 1.0%
capacity coefficient: 1.0%
reactive energy: 2.0%
Operating temperature: -10+65C
Humidity: 30 60%
Display: 4 digital
Responsiveness: 20mA
Outlet: 7A
Number of outlets: 12 and 16
Mounting:
n the front panel of the box through cutting an
opening
Dimensions H
(mm)
Packing/Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
HY-RPCF12
12
122x122
49120
HY-RPCF16
16
144x144
49160
Dimensions (mm)
Capacitor batteries for reactive energy compensation
91

product:
Standard EN 60831-1
EN 60831-2
TIMERS, RELAYS AND

DISPLAYING DEVICES
TIMERS, RELAYS
AND DISPLAYING DEVICES
Programmable timers | 94
Digital counters | 99
Industrial relays | 101
Current measurement transformers | 103
Voltage transformers | 105
Displaying measurement devices | 107
TIMERS, RELAYS AND DISPLAYING DEVICES

Programmable timers
Programmable digital one-channel timer TE 15A
YEAR
WARRANTY
The timer is manufactured under the CMOS technology with a quartz minicontroller which makes it reliable
for operation. The timer is adjusted for DIN-rail mounting. It can memorize up to eight ON/OFF programs (ON/
OFF cycles). Each program setting is done through the push buttons. Programming starts with selection of the
days of the week (you can choose among a whole week cycle, work days cycle, weekend cycle, or a specific
day of the week); then the cycle start time and end time are set. If you have selected work days cycle, then the
program will start and stop at the set times each work day of the week. This is one ON/OFF program. Where
necessary, other programs can be memorized up to the limit of eight possible programs. If you continue setting new programs the first memorized program will be deleted. The minimal interval for cycle programming
is 1 minute.
Type
Packing/Box
(pcs)
Catalogue
number
15
1 / 100
50036
Dimensions (mm)
W
85
36
64
Programmable digital one-channel timer TE 15B
YEAR
WARRANTY
for operation. The timer is adjusted for DIN-rail mounting.It can memorize up to six ON/OFF programs (ON/
OFF cycles). Each program setting is done through the push buttons. Programming starts with selection of the
days of the week (you can choose among a whole week cycle, work days cycle, weekend cycle, or a specific
day of the week); then the cycle start time and end time are set. If you have selected work days cycle, then the
program will start and stop at the set times each work day of the week. This is one ON/OFF program. Where
necessary, other programs can be memorized up to the limit of eight possible programs. If you continue setting new programs the first memorized program will be deleted. The minimal interval for cycle programming
is 1 minute. There is possibility for automatic correction of the time according to the seasonal sun variations.
94
Programmable timers
Technical data:
Display: LCD
Power supply voltage: 230V; 50Hz
Operations: 8 switching ON/OFF
Time deviation: <2s (at 25C)
Battery for programme storing: up to 15 days
Power consumption: <5VA
Switched on indicator
Electrical wear resistance: 105 cycles
Operating temperature: -10C +65C
Humidity: 35 85%RH
Number of contacts: 1NO + 1NC
Commutating capacity:
active load: up to 6A
inductive load: up to 2.5
Weight: 120g
Mounting:
DIN-rail
Type
Packing/Box
(pcs)
Catalogue
number
15 B
1 / 100
50101
Dimensions (mm)
H
85
36
64
Technical data:
Display: LCD
Automatic adjustment of the current time (time correction winter/summer)
Operations: 6 switching ON/OFF
Battery for programme storing: up to 15 days
Operating temperature: -10 +65C
Humidity: 35 85%RH
inductive load: up to 2.5
Weight: 120g
Mounting:
DIN-rail

Programmable timers
Programmable digital one-channel timer TE 20
YEAR
WARRANTY
for operation. The timer is adjusted for DIN-rail mounting. It is possible to adjust forty-eight ON/OFF cycles.
Each program setting is done through selection of the cycle start and end time with the push buttons. When
a program is on, the time cycle is indicated as a dimmed out section on the dial. For example, if you start a
2-hour program the 2-hour portion between On and Off times on the dial becomes dark. The minimal interval
for cycle programming is 15 minutes. The battery allows programme storing at lack of power supply.
Catalogue
number
TE 20
1 / 92
50100
Dimensions (mm)
H
H1
H2
L1
L2
85
20
45
54.5
34
66
Tariff switching clock (timer) TE 18
YEAR
WARRANTY
The timer is adjusted for DIN-rail mounting. It is used for switching on tariff lighting in housing buildings and
switching off after the adjusted time. Easy to adjust time intervals, mounting and conducting. Reliable to use.
Type
Packing/Box
(pcs)
Catalogue
number
TE 18
1 / 200
35005
Dimensions (mm)
H
L1
L2
82
18
40
65
45
Technical data:
Adjustment range: 0.5 to 20 min
Power consumption: <2.5VA
Humidity: 45 95%RH
Number of contacts: 1NO
inductive load: up to 10 A
Weight: 75g
Mounting:
DIN-rail
Packing/Box
(pcs)
95
Programmable timers
Type
Technical data:
Battery for programme storing and operation: up to 150 hours
Humidity: 35 85%RH
Li-Ion battery: 150h
Weight: 120g
Mounting:
DIN-rail

Programmable timers
Time relay star/delta TE 19
YEAR
WARRANTY
The time relay is manufactured under the most modern methods of qualitative and reliable materials. The
timer is adjusted for DIN-rail mounting. It is used to provide reliable and safe time hold at star/delta starters
and it is used for setting fixed time intervals. Programming is done through selection of the time unit (seconds
or minutes) and rate (x 0.1 or x1) by the slide switches, and then selection of a value from the timer knob (from
0 to 10). Whenever timer circuit receives a signal, it executes the set cycle and then stops until a new signal is
available. It gives possibility for time adjustment for motor unwinding in star up to 600s and time change to
delta according to the consumers need.
Type
Packing/Box
(pcs)
Catalogue
number
TE19
1 / 200
50102
Dimensions (mm)
Programmable timers
96
L1
L2
H1
H2
85
24
34
66
45
60
Technical data:
Adjustment range for operation in star: 1 to 600
seconds
Repetition accuracy: 5% from the whole scale
Adjustment accuracy: 5% from the whole scale
Zeroing time: <0.5s
Electrical wear resistance: 100 000 cycles
Mechanical wear resistance: 1 000 000 cycles
Humidity: 45 85%RH
Commutating capacity: up to 5A
Indication:
at operation in star: red indication
at operation in delta: green indication
Weight: 150g
Mounting:
DIN-rail
Timer TE8A 1a, TE8A 2a
YEAR
WARRANTY
The timer is manufactured under the most modern technology CMOS with a quartz minicontroller which
makes it precise, qualitative and reliable. It has a built in battery which allows operation of the timers without
charging up to 150 hours. The timer is adjusted for DIN-rail mounting. Timer programming is done through
selection of the operational day(s) of the week, followed by selection of the start time and end time. You may
choose out of ten modes (one for each day of the week, one for the work days, one for the weekends and one
for the whole week). When setting the time, you should start first with the hours and then continue with the
minutes.
8A - 1a - Up to eight programs can be memorized. The on/off time resolution is 1 minute.
8A - 2a - It has two operating channels, each of which can adjust four programmes for a day or a week with
minimal interval of 1 minute for switching on and off.
Indication on LCD display with high resolution and showing the time in hours, minutes and seconds.
Type
Packing/Box
(pcs)
Catalogue
number
8 - 1
1 / 75
50113
8 - 2
1 / 75
50114
Dimensions (mm)
H
H1
H2
100
50
68
50
L1
L2
36
60
74
90
Technical data:
Operating temperature: -10C +65C
Temperature of storage: up to 70C
Humidity: 45 85%RH
Commutating capacity: up to 16A
Two outlet relays
Li-Ion battery: 150h
Weight: 150g
Mounting:
DIN-rail

Programmable timers
Impulse relay
YEAR
WARRANTY
Impulse relays allow circuit remote control. They can be operated manually, remotely, from several control
points, or by impulses. Impulse relays are most frequently used for the control of lighting circuits in various
public places with multiple control points.
Technical data:
Control voltage: 230V
Rated current of the power circuit: 16
Electrical endurance: 200000 cycles
Maximum switching frequency: 5 operations/minute
Impulse duration: 50ms
Type
Packing/Box
(pcs)
Catalogue
number
EPN510
8 / 160
50300
Connection:
tunnel terminals
L1
L2
24
36
45
34
66
Timer TE6B
YEAR
WARRANTY
makes it precise, qualitative and reliable. The timer is modulated to be mounted on the front panel of boards.
The direction of operation is adjusted direct or reverse. There is possibility to adjust the time range from 0.01
second to 99 hours 59 minutes, possibility for correction of the set values during operation. Indication on LCD
display with high resolution and showing the time in hours, minutes and seconds.
Type
Packing/Box
(pcs)
Catalogue
number
TE6B
1 / 100
50104
Dimensions (mm)
D
8.5
45
80
Technical data:
Possibility for choice of operating range:
from 0.01 second to 99.99 seconds
from 1 second to 99.59 minutes
from 1 minute to 99.59 hours
Error: <0.01% 0.05s
Minimal duration of the input pulse: 20ms
Humidity: 45 85%RH
Commutating capacity at active load: 3A
Weight: 300g
Mounting:
on the front panel of the board
97
Programmable timers
H
85
Dimensions (mm)

Programmable timers
Timer TE48S-S
YEAR
WARRANTY
makes it precise, qualitative and reliable. The timer is modulated to be mounted on the front panel of boards.
The direction of operation is adjusted direct or reverse. It represents two separate operating channels, each
of which can operate independently with time range adjustment from 1 second to 99 minutes. Possibility for
correction of the set values during operation. First, select the time unit (seconds or minutes) and then set the
time. Depending on the timer coupling, it can be used as a cyclic timer relay, i.e. it initially counts the first time
set, then counts the second time set, then starts counting over the first time again, etc. until a stop signal is
received. In another mode, the timer can count the set time and stop until a new signal is received to count
the next cycle. Indication on LCD display with high resolution and showing the time in hours, minutes and
seconds.
Type
Packing/Box
(pcs)
Catalogue
number
TE48S-S
84
50105
Dimensions (mm)
D
L1
L2
95
44.8
74
15
58
48
Timer 19M
YEAR
WARRANTY
Timer is developed using modern technologies from quality and reliable materials and is adapted for mounting on DIN rail. It is used for providing time intervals in eight time programs, which are assigned by combinations of the keys. There is an option for it to operate in time ranges (assigned by the keys K4, K5,K6): seconds,
minutes or hours depending on the necessity of the user. Power contact up to 3A.
98
Programmable timers
Technical data:
Admissible variation of the input voltage: 85-110%U
Possibility for choice of operating range:
from 1 to 99 seconds
from 1 minute to 99 minutes
Error: <0.01% 0.05s
Minimal duration of the input pulse: 20ms
Humidity: 45 85%RH
Commutating capacity at load: 3A
Weight: 300g
Mounting:
on the front panel of the board
Type
Packing/Box
(pcs)
Catalogue
number
19M
1 / 200
50102M
Dimensions (mm)
H
H1
H2
L1
L2
85
24
45
60
34
66
Input voltage: 230V; 50Hz
Range of setting: from 0.6 sec to 100 hours
Accuracy of setting: 5% from the whole scale
Time for nullifying: <0.5 seconds
Consumed capacity: < 5VA
cycles
000 cycles
Operation temperature: -10 +65
Humidity: 45 - 85%RH
Computing option: up to 5
Indication:
on power supply: red indication
on operational output relay: green indication
Weight: 150 gr.
Time functions: according to the programming
guide
Mounting method:
DIN rail

Digital counters
Universal digital counter CE2J
YEAR
WARRANTY
Type
Packing/Box
(pcs)
Catalogue
number
CE2J
1 / 45
50111
Dimensions (mm)
H
68
68
65
8.5
90
Technical data:
Display: LCD
Counting range: 0 - 99999
Counting speed: 30/3k cps
Zeroing: outside impulse
Battery for programme storing: up to 10 years
Humidity: 35 85%RH
Commutating capacity: relay outlet with active load: up to 3A
Weight: 250g
Mounting:
on the front panel
opening with dimensions: 45x45
Combined digital counter/timer CE10J
YEAR
WARRANTY
The device is for front mounting in the board. It can be used as a counter or timer choosing a definite combination from keys. It is manufactured under the modern technology CMOS which allows high speed of counting, precision at operation as a timer and high reliability. It has a built in battery which allows data storing for
more than 10 years. It is supplied with a digital display providing excellent visibility at different lighting. It is
used for impulse sequence counting with accumulation or deduction. There is possibility for relay outlet operation at reaching beforehand set value, and also a possibility for changing the position of the decimal point.

product:
Standard EN 61010-1
Type
Packing/Box
(pcs)
Catalogue
number
CE10J
1 / 45
50120
Dimensions (mm)
H
68
68
65
90
Technical data:
Display: LCD
Counting range: 0 999
Timer range: 0.01 99h99min
Counting speed: 30/500 cps
Zeroing: outside impulse
Battery for programme storing: up to 10 years
Humidity: 35 85%RH
Commutating capacity: relay outlet with active load: up to 3A
Weight: 120g
Mounting:
on the front panel
opening with dimensions: 45x45
99
Digital counters

product:
Standard EN 61010-1
The device is manufactured under the modern technology CMOS which allows high speed of counting and
high counting reliability. It has a built in battery which allows data storing for more than 10 years. It is supplied
with a digital display with black lighting digits,
providing excellent visibility at different lighting.
The counter is to be mounted on the front panel
of the boards. It is used for impulse sequence
counting with accumulation or deduction.
There is possibility for relay outlet operation at
reaching beforehand set value, and also a possibility for changing the position of the decimal
point.

Digital counters
Total digital counter CE15J
YEAR
WARRANTY
The device is to be mounted on DIN-rail. It is used as an impulse counter with no outside power supply. For
that purpose there is a Li battery built in the device which provides data storing and operation of the device
for 5 years. It has eight digital lighting display providing excellent visibility at different lighting. It is used for
impulse sequence counting with accumulation.
the product: EN 61010-1
Type
Packing/Box
(pcs)
Catalogue
number
CE15J
1 / 100
50112
Technical data:
Display: LCD
Power supply voltage: built in battery
Inlet signal: 100-230V AC/DC
Counting accuracy: <0.002%
Data storing battery: up to 5 years
Humidity: 35 85%RH
Dimensions (mm)
Weight: 120g
H
W
D
L
Mounting:
86
36
45
64
DIN-rail
Total digital counter CE15L
YEAR
WARRANTY
The device is to be mounted on DIN-rail. It is used as a time impulse counter with no outside power supply. For
that purpose there is a Li battery built in the device which provides data storing and operation of the device
for 5 years. It has eight digital lighting display providing excellent visibility at different lighting. It is used for
time impulse sequence counting with accumulation. It displays the operated time.
Type
Packing/Box
(pcs)
Catalogue
number
CE15L
1 / 100
50115
Technical data:
Display: LCD
Power supply voltage: built in battery
Inlet signal: 100-230V AC/DC
Counting accuracy: <0.002%
Battery for data storing: up to 5 years
Dimensions (mm)
Humidity: 35 85%RH
Weight: 120g
H
W
D
L
Mounting:
86
36
45
64
DIN-rail
Phase sequence indicator EK - RSTB
YEAR
WARRANTY
The device is to be mounted on DIN-rail. It is used for control and indication of the presence, sequence and
quality of the phases. The device indicates the following fault:
lack of one or several phases;
change in the sequence of the phases;
lowering of the power supplying voltage: under 10%;
increasing of the power supplying voltage: over 10%;
phase asymmetry of the power supplying voltage: 10%
In the presence of one of the conditions above a relay starts operating in the device which breaks the controlling circuit.
The time between fault indication and outlet relay switching on can be adjusted in order to prevent unwilling
stops at very short breaks. When the voltage is back to normal limits, the device receives energy (indication
lights) according to the hysteresic values. At phase sequence fault the device operates immediately.
100
Digital counters
Type
Packing/Box
(pcs)
Catalogue
number
EK - RSTB
1 / 200
50103
Dimensions (mm)
H
D1
D2
L1
L2
85
24
45
60
34
66
Technical data:
Possibility for operation range adjustment: 0.1 10
seconds
Possibility for working range adjustment: from 300 to
480 V
Electrical wear resistance: 1 000 000 cycles
Mechanical wear resistance: 10 000 000 cycles
Indication:
green LED indication for a change in the condition
red LED - failure
Humidity: 35 85%RH
Weight: 120g
Mounting:
DIN-rail

Industrial relays
Industrial Relays and Bases
YEAR
WARRANTY
Devices intended for construction of automation and signalling boards. They are mainly used for command
transfer towards the executive mechanisms. Currents of comparatively heavy values enabling the direct control
of industrial executive mechanisms are commuted in comparatively small sizes. The contact surfaces are made
from silver-coated electrolytic copper. The entire contact system is closed within a lid of colourless fire-proof
plastic with a test-button installed to it. The base provides a safe electric connection of the conductors of the
electric installation and the relays and is used to install the relay to the DIN busbar.
Voltage of the
coil (V)
Socket type
ELM - 14FC
ELM - 14FC
ELM - 14FC
12 VDC
24 VDC
48 VDC
ELM-RT624-B
ELM-RT624-B
ELM-RT624-B
Relay type
Voltage of the
coil (V)
Socket type
ELM - 60.2
ELM - 60.2
ELM - 60.2
ELM - 60.2
ELM-60.2
ELM - 60.13
ELM - 60.13
ELM - 60.13
ELM - 60.13
ELM - 60.13
ELM-60.13
12 VDC
24 VDC
48 VDC
230 VAC
24VAC
12 VDC
24 VDC
48 VDC
110 VAC
230 VAC
24VAC
ELM - 90.22
ELM - 90.22
ELM - 90.22
ELM - 90.22
ELM-90.22
ELM - 90.23
ELM - 90.23
ELM - 90.23
ELM - 90.23
ELM - 90.23
ELM90.23
Relay type
Voltage of the
coil (V)
Socket type
ELM - 55.02
ELM - 55.02
ELM - 55.02
ELM - 55.02
ELM55.02
ELM - 55.04
ELM - 55.04
ELM - 55.04
ELM - 55.04
ELM - 55.04
ELM-55.04
12 VDC
24 VDC
48 VDC
230 VAC
24VAC
12 VDC
24 VDC
48 VDC
110 VAC
230 VAC
24VAC
ELM - RT702-B
ELM - RT702-B
ELM - RT702-B
ELM - RT702-B
ELM - RT702-B
ELM-RT704-B
ELM-RT704-B
ELM-RT704-B
ELM-RT704-B
ELM-RT704-B
ELM-RT704-B
Socket type
ELM - RT624-B
ELM - RT702-B
ELM - RT704-B
ELM - 90.22
ELM - 90.23
Resistance of the Number of

coil ( )
contacts
260
1080
4260
NO+NC
NO+NC
NO+NC

coil ( )
contacts
96
384
1540
7400
96
384
1540
1700
7400
2NO+2NC
2NO+2NC
2NO+2NC
2NO+2NC
2NO+2NC
3NO+3NC
3NO+3NC
3NO+3NC
3NO+3NC
3NO+3NC
3NO-3NC

coil ( )
contacts
42
168
675
14000
42
168
675
3500
14000
2NO+2NC
2NO+2NC
2NO+2NC
2NO+2NC
2NO+2NC
4NO+4NC
4NO+4NC
4NO+4NC
4NO+4NC
4NO+4NC
4NO+4NC
Packing/Box
(pcs)
Catalogue
number
100 / 1000
100 / 1000
100 / 1000
57141
57142
57143
Packing/Box
(pcs)
Catalogue
number
20 / 300
20 / 300
20 / 300
20 / 300
20 / 300
20 / 300
20 / 300
20 / 300
20 / 300
20 / 300
20/300
57601
57602
57603
57605
57606
57611
57612
57613
57614
57615
57616
Packing/Box
(pcs)
Catalogue
number
50 / 500
50 / 500
50 / 500
50 / 500
50/500
50 / 500
50 / 500
50 / 500
50 / 500
50 / 500
50/500
57521
57522
57523
57525
57526
57541
57542
57543
57544
57545
57546
Dimensions (mm)
Number of terminals
(pcs.)
Packing/Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
76 x 15
76 x 27
76 x 27
68 x 38
68 x 38
5
11
14
8
11
20 / 600
10 / 240
10 / 240
10 / 400
10 / 400
57901
57902
57912
57904
57905
Relay type
101
Industrial relays
the product: EN 60947-5-1;
EN 61810
Technical Characteristics:
Supply voltage: from 12 to 230V , 50 z and from 12 to 110V DC
Acceptable deviation of the supply voltage: 85 -110% Un
Rated current of the sockets: 10
Electrical endurance: 1 000 000 cycles
Isolation resistance: 500 m /min (500V)
Impulse tension resistance: 2000V, 50z
Dielectric strength: 1000V /1 min
Turn-out time: 25ms
Working temperature: -5 + 65
Humidity: 35 - 85% RH
Method of installation:
on a DIN rail by means of a socket

Industrial relays
Industrial Solid State Relays (SSR)
YEAR
WARRANTY
Industrial SSR are intended for mounting in power and control cabinets as an output switch devices with reliable ON/
OFF performance. The SSR are based on the CMOS technology. The non-contact electronic switch is optically separated
from the input signal by a photoelectric coupler. This allows use of switch currents of up to 50A despite of the devices
small overall size. Another important feature of the relay is that output load can be regulated depending on the input
signal value. The relay is mainly used to transmit control signals to actuating mechanisms since it can work at comparatively high currents making it possible to directly control actuators. SSR have transparent plastic covers to additionally
improve their safety level. The SSR use is connected with considerable heat emissions, so measures must be taken to
dispense the excessive thermal energy in the atmosphere. This is achieved through application of specially deigned
radiators. The correct definition of radiator parameters is of critical importance. It is made by calculating the heat generation capacity with the formula: Heat generation = active load current x 3.0 W/A. The heat removal surface is estimated
with the help of the following graphic:
the product: EN 60947-5-1;
EN 61810
Industrial relays
102
Technical Specifications:
Load/output voltage: 30/400V 50 Hz or the solid state voltage
regulators
Rated output current: from 10 to 60
Insulating voltage: 1000 M /min (500V)
Impulse voltage stability: 2000V, 50Hz
Dielectric Strength: < 2500VAC / 1 min
Leakage current: <2mA
Turn-on time: <10ms
Operating temperature: -5 + 65
Relative Humidity: 35 - 85%RH
Type
Relay Type
ZG3NC - 2 - 10B
ZG3NC - 2 - 20B
ZG3NC - 2 - 25B
ZG3NC - 2 - 40B
ZG3NC - 2 - 60B
ZG3NC - 3 -10B
ZG3NC - 3 - 20B
ZG3NC - 3 - 25B
ZG3NC - 3 - 40B
ZG3NC - 3 - 60B
SSR
SSR
SSR
SSR
SSR
SSR
SSR
SSR
SSR
SSR
Control Volt- Output Volt- Number of Output Cur- Packing/Box Catalogue

age (V)
age (V)
phases rent ( )
(pcs)
number
3-32VDC
3-32VDC
3-32VDC
3-32VDC
3-32VDC
3-32VDC
3-32VDC
3-32VDC
3-32VDC
3-32VDC
Relay Type
ZG1NC - 2 - 10D
ZG1NC - 2 - 20D
ZG1NC - 2 - 25D
ZG1NC - 2 - 40D
ZG1NC - 3 -10D
ZG1NC - 3 - 20D
ZG1NC - 3 - 25D
ZG1NC - 3 - 40D
SS voltage regulator
Relay Type
ZG33 - 3 - 10
ZG33 - 3 - 20
ZG33 - 3 - 25
ZG 33 - 3 - 40
SSR
SSR
SSR
SSR
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
10
20
25
40
60
10
20
25
40
60
10 / 100
10 / 100
10 / 100
10 / 100
10 / 100
10 / 100
10 / 100
10 / 100
10 / 100
10 / 100
57710
57720
57725
57740
57760
57713
57723
57735
57743
57763
Control Output Volt- Number of Output Cur- Packing/Box Catalogue

Voltage (V) age (V)
phases rent ( )
(pcs)
number
Type
Type
230VC
230VC
230VC
230VC
230VC
400VC
400VC
400VC
400VC
400VC
1-10VDC
1-10VDC
1-10VDC
1-10VDC
1-10VDC
1-10VDC
1-10VDC
1-10VDC
0-230VC
0-230VC
0-230VC
0-230VC
0-400VC
0-400VC
0-400VC
0-400VC
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
10
20
25
40
10
20
25
40
10 / 100
10 / 100
10 / 100
10 / 100
10 / 100
10 / 100
10 / 100
10 / 100
57810
57820
57825
57840
57813
57823
57835
57843
Control Volt- Output Volt- Number of Output Cur- Packing/Box Catalogue

age (V)
age (V)
phases rent ( )
(pcs)
number
3-32VDC
3-32VDC
3-32VDC
3-32VDC
400VC
400VC
400VC
400VC
3
3
3
3
10
20
25
40
1 / 30
1 / 30
1 / 30
1 / 30
57831
57832
57833
57834
Note: The relay output must be supplied with a varistor to ensure its over-voltage protection, whenever RRS is used to
control inductive loads.
Type of Radiator
Overall Dimensions
(L/W/H)
Approximate Load (A)
Packing/Box (pcs)
Catalogue
number
QW-A 50
QW-B 72
QW-B 100
QW-C 115
QW-E 50
60 x 50 x 50
72x100x50
100x100x50
115x100x50
150x88x35
15
20
25
40
75
1 / 50
1 / 50
1 / 50
1 / 50
1 / 40
57906
57907
57908
57909
57910

Current measurement transformers
Current measurement transformers MES - xx/x5 type
YEAR
WARRANTY
The measurement transformers find application at current measuring, current regulation, systems for current
characteristics watching, systems for reactive energy compensation, signaling, etc. They are with x/5 gear ratio
as X is the inlet range of the transformer.
B
52

C
D
E
52
41
77
F
31
G
31
MES - 75/40
88
52
52
41
77
41
41
MES - 86/60
117
57
57
184
77
61
61
Type
Range
Precision class
Capacity VA
Weight kg
Packing/Box
(pcs)
Catalogue
number
MES - 75/30
50/5
0.5
1.5
0.60
1 / 40
45050
MES - 75/30
75/5
0.5
1.5
0.60
1 / 40
45075
MES - 75/30
100/5
0.5
1.5
0.60
1 / 40
45103
MES - 75/30
150/5
0.5
2.5
0.60
1 / 40
45153
Type
Range
Precision class
Capacity VA
Weight kg
Packing/Box
(pcs)
Catalogue
number
MES - 75/40
200/5
0.5
0.60
1 / 40
45204
MES - 75/40
250/5
0.5
0.60
1 / 40
45254
MES - 75/40
300/5
0.5
10
0.60
1 / 40
45304
MES - 75/40
400/5
0.5
10
0.60
1 / 40
45404
MES - 75/40
500/5
0.5
10
0.60
1 / 40
45504
MES - 75/40
600/5
0.5
15
0.60
1 / 40
45604
Type
Range
Precision class
Capacity VA
Weight kg
Packing/Box
(pcs)
Catalogue
number
MES - 86/60
400/5
0.5
15
0.60
1 / 40
45406
MES - 86/60
500/5
0.5
15
0.60
1 / 40
45506
MES - 86/60
600/5
0.5
15
0.60
1 / 40
45606
MES - 86/60
800/5
0.5
15
0.60
1 / 40
45806
MES - 86/60
1000/5
0.5
15
0.60
1 / 32
45906
MES - 86/60
1200/5
0.5
15
0.60
1 / 32
45916
MES - 75/30
A
88
Type
103
the product: Standard EN 61010-1;
EN 60044-1; EN 60044-6
Technical data:
Maximum operating voltage: 720V; 50Hz
Admissible deviation of the operating current: 1.2 x In
Inlet current: 50 1200A
Outlet current: 5A
Impulse voltage wear resistance: 4000V; 50Hz (1min)
Humidity: 35 85%RH
Precision class: 0.5
Mounting:
Current transformers can be DIN rail mounted;
vertically or horizontally to the power supplying rails according to the opening of the transformer
Current transformers can be mounted on flat surfaces by use of fixing clamps.

Current transformers, type
YEAR
WARRANTY
Current measuring transformers of duct type. Specially designed to be installed in measuring circuits without
removing cables in current measuring circuit. CP Transformers save installation time and decrease installation
costs
the product: Standard EN 60044-1
Technical Specification:
small size table:
secondary coil rated current 5
rated voltage 720V
frequency 50Hz
rated load: up to 30VA
safety coefficient: fs5
accuracy class :0.5; 1
secondary coil connection: cable shoe terminal
Type
23
104
A
20

C
D
E
51
89
111
B
30
F
34
G
47
58
50
80
78
114
145
32
32
88
80
80
108
144
145
32
32
Type
Range
Precision class
Capacity VA
Weight kg
Packing/Box
(pcs)
Catalogue
number
23
200/5
1.5
0,74
1 / 45
452320
23
250/5
1,5
0,74
1 / 45
452325
23
300/5
0,5
1,5
0,74
1 / 45
452330
Type
Range
Precision class
Capacity VA
Weight kg
Packing/Box
(pcs)
Catalogue
number
58
250/5
0,5
1,5
0,87
1 / 36
455825
58
300/5
0,5
1,5
0,87
1 / 36
455830
58
400/5
0,5
1,5
0,87
1 / 36
455840
58
500/5
0,5
2,5
0,87
1 / 36
455850
58
600/5
0,5
2,5
0,87
1 / 36
455860
Type
Range
Precision class
Capacity VA
Weight kg
Packing/Box
(pcs)
Catalogue
number
88
400/5
0,5
1,5
1 / 20
458840
88
500/5
0,5
1,5
1 / 20
458850
88
600/5
0,5
1,5
1 / 20
458860
88
750/5
0,5
2,5
1 / 20
458875
88
800/5
0,5
2,5
1 / 20
458880
88
1000/5
0,5
1 / 20
458890

Voltage transformers
EVT5 - control voltage transformer
Dimensions
Type
Initial
voltage
(V)
Secondary
voltage
(V)
Power
VA
EVT5 - 100VA
EVT5 - 100VA
EVT5 - 100VA
EVT5 - 100VA
EVT5 - 250VA
EVT5 - 250VA
EVT5 - 250VA
EVT5 - 250VA
EVT5 - 250VA
EVT5 - 250VA
EVT5 - 500VA
EVT5 - 500VA
EVT5 - 500VA
EVT5 - 500VA
EVT5 - 500VA
EVT5 - 500VA
EVT5 - 500VA
EVT5 - 500VA
EVT5 -1000VA
EVT5 -1000VA
EVT5 - 1000VA
EVT5 - 1000VA
EVT5 - 1000VA
EVT5 - 1000VA
EVT5 - 1600VA
EVT5 - 1600VA
EVT5 - 1600VA
EVT5 - 1600VA
EVT5 - 1600VA
EVT5 - 1600VA
230
400
230
400
230
230
400
400
230
400
230
230
400
400
230
400
230
400
230
230
400
400
230
400
230
230
400
400
230
400
48-36
48-36
24-12
24-12
48-24-12
48-36
48-24-12
48-36
24-12
24-12
48-24-12
48-36
48-24-12
48-36
24-12
24-12
110-48-24
110-48-24
48-24-12
48-36
48-24-12
48-36
24-12
24-12
48-24-12
48-36
48-24-12
48-36
24-12
24-12
100
100
100
100
250
250
250
250
250
250
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1600
1600
1600
1600
1600
1600
84
84
84
84
130
130
130
130
130
130
150
150
150
150
150
150
150
150
170
170
170
170
170
170
190
190
190
190
190
190
90
90
90
90
100
100
100
100
100
100
113
113
113
113
125
125
125
125
125
125
125
125
125
125
125
125
125
125
125
125
63
63
63
63
120
120
120
120
120
120
133
133
133
133
133
133
133
133
150
150
150
150
150
150
150
150
150
150
150
150
65
65
65
65
53
53
53
53
53
53
53
53
53
53
53
53
53
53
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
95
95
95
95
130
130
130
130
130
130
140
140
140
140
140
140
140
140
155
155
155
155
155
155
170
170
170
170
170
170
4
4
4
4
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
Packing
Catalogue
/ Box
number
(pcs.)
16
16
16
16
16
16
12
12
12
12
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
6
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
45248
45448
45243
45443
45242
45242N
45442
45442N
45244
45444
45245
45245N
45445
45445N
45246
45446
45215
45415
45241
45241N
45441
45441N
45247
45447
452416
452416N
454416
454416N
452417
454417
Functions:
Reduction of main voltage within standard range
Galvanic separation of the power supply circuit from the operation circuit
Technical features:
Input voltage: 400 or 230 V
Frequency : 50/60Hz
Short circuit resistance: unstable
Temperature class: (130C)
Construction: open (for installation in other products)
Magnetic circuit: cold rolled electric furnace steel
Coils: pure electrotechnical copper
IP code: IP20
Connection:
flexible or hard conductors of relevant section to terminals
Mounting:
Mounting in distribution boards or products
fastening: by means of screws/bolts to the surface
position: vertical
ambient temperature: -20 +65
105
Voltage transformers
the product:
Standard EN 60051-1
YEAR
WARRANTY

Bell and bell transformer
Bell
YEAR
WARRANTY
Used for sound signalization in housing and industrial buildings.

Sound level: 70 dB
Consumption:
3.6VA for power supply 8 -12V
5VA for power supply 230V
Mounting on DIN-rail
Bell and bell transformer
106
Type
Un (V)
Packing / Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
Bell
8-12
1 / 12 / 240
5012
Bell
230
1 / 12 / 240
5220
Bell transformer
YEAR
WARRANTY
Modified for power supply of bells and other signal devices with alternating voltage 8V, 12V, 24V and capacity
up to 8VA
The voltage of the primary winding voltage is 230V
Mounting on DIN-rail
Type
Packing / Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
Bell transformer
1 / 80
5001

Displaying measurement devices
Digital Temperature Controller Type CD - 701
YEAR
WARRANTY
The device is intended for industrial control and monitoring of temperature. It allows monitoring and adjustment of temperatures of up to 1999 depending on the used sensor thermocouple or thermoresistor. The
device allowsprogramming of the used type of sensor ( (CA) ; J ( IC) PT 100, etc.) and the controller working
range. It also allows selection of the control algorithm, error adjustment, indication hysteresis curve adjustment and alarm settings. The controller is intended for mounting on control panels. It is user friendly and can
be set through the push buttons on the device front panel. The program can be password protected. When
operational, the display shows the set temperature and the current temperature.
Packing/Box
(pcs)
Catalogue
number
CD - 701
50124
Thermocouple and thermo resistance
YEAR
WARRANTY
The thermo-measuring elements are designed for measuring the temperature in the point of contact between
the surface (warmed or cooled) and the thermo-element. They are a comparatively cheap and the most
wide-spread method for temperature measurement. The thermocouples are produced by accumulating
two conductors from a special measuring alloy in one common head. Each of these elements has a specific
electromotive voltage at a specific temperature. The temperature measuring is based on the difference in
the electromotive powers between the hot and the cool end of the thermocouple, while this difference in
the form of voltage of several milivolts is supplied at the input of the thermoregulator, which displays the
measured temperature. Each thermocouple is produced and calibrated for measuring of specific temperature
ranges depending on the alloys of which it is made. When thermocouples measuring great distances from the
thermoregulators are used (more than 15 points), it is obligatory to use compensatory cable corresponding to
the type of the thermocouple. The thermo-resistant elements action is based on the capacity of specific alloys,
very often Pt100 to change their resistance when the temperature is changed. For each temperature value is
specified a value of resistance. This value is supplied at the input of the thermoregulator, which displays the
measured temperature.
Each thermoregulator operates with a specific type of thermo-element.
Type of
thermoelement
Symbol
Temperature
range
Type of catching
WRNT - 01
0 400C
nut
30 x 35
1m
1 / 300
50K40G
WRNT - 31
0 400C
Bayonet
30 x 35
0.5m
1 / 200
50K40B
WRNT - 13
0 400C
explosion-proof
2m
1 / 200
50K40EX
WRKT - 01
0 400C
nut
30 x 35
1m
1 / 300
50J40G
WRKT - 13
0 400C
explosion-proof
2m
1 / 300
50J40EX
Sizes of the Size of the Packing/

head
free end Box (pcs)
Catalogue
number
Type
107
the product: Standard EN 61010-1
Rated voltage: 230V, 50 Hz
Permissible voltage deviation: 85 - 110% Un
Input signal: from thermocouple, thermoresistor or unified signal (4-20mA; 0-10VDC)
Output: Relay
Emergency Output: Relay
Electrical life: 1 000 000 cycles.
Indication:
Green LED indicates the measured (current) temperature
Red LED indicates the set temperature
Insulation resistance: 20 M /min (500V)
Impulse voltage stability: 2000V, 50Hz
Operating temperature: -5 +65
Relative Humidity: 35 - 85%RH
Mounting:
on the front panel

Digital voltmeter/amperemeter EKDP 15 A/V
YEAR
WARRANTY
Digital device adjusted for DIN-rail mounting and offered in two types:
amperemeter
voltmeter
It is supplied with LCD display where the measurement quantity is displayed with numbers with 31/2 size. It
has high accuracy of analogue-digital transfer, measurement precision and electromagnetic interference stability. There is possibility for adjustment of the measurement range through built in micro switches. Adjusted
to measure constant current (AD,DV) and alternating current (AA,VA) quantities.

product:
Standard EN 61010-1
108
Type
Packing/Box
(pcs)
Catalogue
number
EKDP-15AA
1 / 100
50117A
EKDP-15AD
1 / 100
50117D
EKDP-15VA
1 / 100
50116A
EKDP-15VD
1 / 100
50116D
Dimensions (mm)
H
88
36
64
45
Technical data:
Power supply voltage: 100 - 240V; 50Hz
Inlet signal:
operating as voltmeter: 2 700V (the range is adjusted from inside)
operating as amperemeter: 5 2000A
(the range is adjusted from inside)
Note: At current range over 5A a current measurement transformer should be used
Consumption: <5A
Impulse voltage wear resistance: 4000V; 50Hz
(1min)
Humidity: 35 85%RH
Precision: 0.5% from the whole scale
Display: LCD
Weight: 150gr
Mounting:
DIN-rail
Digital voltmeter/amperemeter and frequency

meter EKDP7

product:
Standard EN 61010-1
Type
Packing/Box
(pcs)
Catalogue
number
EKDP7-AV
1 / 84
50106
EKDP7-AA
1 / 84
50107
EKDP7-DV
1 / 84
50108
EKDP7-DA
1 / 84
50109
EKDP7-HZ
1 / 84
50110
Dimensions (mm)
H
H1
72
72
68
42
YEAR
WARRANTY
Digital device adjusted for mounting on the front panel of electrical boards and offered in the following types:
amperemeter:
EKDP7 AA amperemeter for alternating current
EKDP7 DA amperemeter for direct current
voltmeter:
EKDP7 AV voltmeter for alternating current
EKDP7 DV voltmeter for direct current
EKDP7 Hz frequency meter
It is supplied with LCD display where the measurement quantity is displayed with numbers with 31/2 size. It
has high accuracy of analogue-digital transfer, measurement precision and electromagnetic interference stability. There is possibility for adjustment of the measurement range through built in micro switches. Adjusted
to measure direct current and alternating current quantities.
Technical data:
Power supply voltage: 100 - 240V; 50Hz
Inlet signal:
operating as voltmeter: 2 700V (the range is adjusted from inside)
operating as amperemeter: 5 2000A (the range is adjusted from inside
Note: For high current range a current
measurement transformer should be used for
alternating current device and a measurement
shunt for direct current.
Consumption: <5A
Impulse voltage wear resistance: 4000V; 50Hz
(1min)
Humidity: 35 85%RH
Precision: 0.5% from the whole scale
Display: LCD
Weight: 130gr
Mounting:
on the front panel

Analogue (pointer) panel meters SD72 type for
build-in
YEAR
WARRANTY
Analogue devices adjusted for mounting on the front panel of electrical boards. Designed for frequency measurement, capacity, alternating or direct voltage and current of the power supply grid, with overall dimensions
72x72mm. They are manufactured on the basis of bridge measurement schemes. There is possibility for display
change for the higher scopes of measuring.

product:
Standard EN 60051-1
Range
Note
Packing/Box Catalogue
(pcs)
number
amperemeter
MEMSI
1.5
0-40
1 / 100
50118
amperemeter
MEMSI
1.5
0-100
current transfer
100/5
1 / 100
654010
amperemeter
MEMSI
1.5
0-200
current transfer
200/5
1 / 100
654020
amperemeter
MEMSI
1.5
0-400
current transfer
400/5
1 / 50
654040
amperemeter
MEMSI
1.5
0-600
current transfer
600/5
1 / 50
654060
amperemeter
MEMSI
1.5
0-1000
current transfer
1000/5
1 / 50
654100
amperemeter
MEMSI
1.5
0-1500
current transfer
1500/5
1 / 50
654150
voltmeter *
MEMSI
1.5
0-500V
1 / 50
50125
frequency
meter**
0.5
45-65Hz
1 / 50
50126
cos meter
MEMSI
1.5
3P 400V
1 / 50
50127
amperemeter DC
MEMC
1.5
0-5A
1 / 50
50128
amperemeter DC
MEMC
1.5
0-50A
outer resistor
60mV
1 / 50
50129
voltmeter DC
MEMC
1.5
0-50V
1 / 50
50130
voltmeter DC
MEMC
1.5
0-100V
1 / 20
50131
wattmeter
MEMSI
1.5
0-3000W
1P240V
1 / 25
50132
wattmeter
MEMSI
1.5
0-3000W 3P
3 line
1 / 25
50133
wattmeter
MEMSI
1.5
0-3000W 3P
4 line
1 / 25
50134
Note: MEMSI - magnetic-electrical movable steel instrument; MEMC magnetic-electrical movable coil
* Possibility for supplying with voltage transformer X/100V for range expanding
** Possibility for voltage 110V, 230V , 400V
Type of the
Precision
measurment
class
system
109
Type

product: Standard IEC 62052-11; IEC
62053-21; IEC 62056-21
DIN Rail Mounted kWh Meters
YEAR
WARRANTY
Electronic single and three phase kWh meters intended for DIN rail mounting and active energy measurement. Meters are suitable for home and commercial applications. They perform direct measurement of the
real consumption of electric power and the results are shown on the LCD display. The system doesnt need any
additional adjustment or calibration.
The range includes single and multi-tariff models.
Direct power consumption measurement: up to 20 (80) ; 50/60Hz
Automatic temperature compensation
LED phase voltage outage indicator.
Indication for wrong cable connection
Indication for wrong measurement
Accuracy class: 1
Number of tariffs: see the table below
Meter constant: See the table below
Type
DDS - 1Y - 45
Measuring Number
range of Tariffs
5 (45)
Meter
constant
(imp/kWh)
Voltage
(V)
1000
230
Meter
constant
(imp/kWh)
Voltage
(V)
1600
230
Overall
dimensions (mm) Packing/Box Catalogue
height / width /
(pcs)
number
depth
63 / 18 / 118
1 / 120
50214
110
Type
DD4F-S01-1Y-60
Measuring Number
range of Tariffs
5(60)
Overall
height / width /
(pcs)
number
depth
116.5 / 76 / 65
1 / 48
50220

DDS - 1Y - 100
Type
DDS - 3Y 80
10 (100)
Measuring Number
range of Tariffs
20 (80)
Meter
constant
(imp/kWh)
Voltage
(V)
1600
230
Meter
constant
(imp/kWh)
Voltage
(V)
800
3x230/400
Overall
height / width /
(pcs)
number
depth
65 / 76 / 100
1 / 45
50260
Overall
height / width /
(pcs)
number
depth
65 / 76 / 100
1 / 45
50380
Type
Measuring Number
range of Tariffs
Type
Measuring Number
range of Tariffs
DTGS-S01-3Y100 10(100)
Meter
constant
(imp/kWh)
800
Voltage
(V)
Overall
height / width /
(pcs)
number
depth
3X230/400 122 / 100 / 65
1 / 30
50400
111
ELEMENTS FOR AUTOMATION,

MONITORING AND CONTROL
ELEMENTS
Limit switches | 114

Proximity sensor | 120
Capacitive sensor | 121
Photoelectrical sensor | 122
Power supplies | 123
Rotary switches | 124
Buttons and LED indicators | 128
Devices for telpher control | 133
Warning lights and towers | 134
ELEMENTS FOR AUTOMATION, MONITORING AND CONTROL

Limit switches
All-purpose limit switch series CSA-xxx
YEAR
WARRANTY
The all-purpose limit switches are devices used in automatic systems as a control element. They are used for setting
of gearing limits. They are mounted on transport lines, conveyors and other linear progressive motion machines.
They feature a vibration-resistant metal shell.
Rated voltage: 230V
Rated current: up to 10A
IP code: IP66
Cable input: cable glandPG11
Section of power supply conductor: up to 2mm2
Fastening strength of terminals: 6-8kgf/cm
Product conformity documentation:

Standard: EN 60947-1; EN 60947-5-1
Dielectric strength: 1000V AC
Insulating resistance: 100m
with active load
Mechanical endirance (number of cycles): 1 000 000
Gearing speed: 5mm/s to 0.5 m/s
Type of the
head
CSA - 001
metal
cylinder
Power of Power of Switch- General

starting release
ing
move(g)
(g)
position ment
Rated
current
Packing/ Catalogue
Box (pcs) number
800
400
2.0mm 5.8mm
10-active
10 / 90 46001
4-inductive
cylinder
CSA - 003 with metal
roll
800
400
2.0mm 5.8mm
10-active
10 / 90 46003
4-inductive
horizontal
CSA - 012 lever with
metal roll
800
400
2.0mm 5.8mm
10-active
10 / 90 46012
4-inductive
adjustable
CSA - 031 lever with
metal roll
400
100
22.5
95
10-active
10 / 80 46031
4-inductive
lever with
metal roll
400
100
22.5
95
10-active
10 / 80 46021
4-inductive
150
50
22.5
50mm
10-active
10 / 80 46081
4-inductive
Limit switches
114
Type
CSA - 021
CSA - 081 spring lever

Limit switches
All-purpose limit switch series TZ-6xxx
YEAR
WARRANTY
The all-purpose limit switches are installed on transport lines, conveyors and other linear progressive motion machines. The miniature limit switch is mounted in an aluminum shell, resistant to vibrations, lubricants and water.
Type of the
head
TZ-6001
metal
cylinder

starting release
ing
move(g)
(g)
position ment
Rated
current
Packing/ Catalogue
Box (pcs) number
115g 0.5mm 5.5mm
15-active
1 / 50
5A-inductive
466001
oil-resistant
metal
800g
cylinder
240g
2mm
15-active
1 / 50
5A-inductive
466101
oil-resistant
cylinder
500g
TZ -6102
with metal
roll
100g
1mm 3.5mm
15-active
1 / 50
5A-inductive
466102
oil-resistant
horizontal
640g
TZ -6104
lever with
metal roll
230g
5mm
6mm
15-active
1 / 50
5A-inductive
466104
oil-resistant
vertical lever
640g
TZ -6143
with metal
roll
230g
5mm
6mm
15-active
1 / 50
5A-inductive
466143
TZ -6106 spring lever 150g
20
TZ -6101
350g
5mm
1 / 50
466106
Type
Mechanical endurance (number of cycles): 10 000 000

Gearing speed: 0.1mm/s to 0.5 m/s
Rated voltage: 230V
IP code: IP65
Cable input: cable gland PG11
Section of power supply conductor: up to 1.5mm2
115
Limit switches

Standard: EN 60947-1; EN 60947-5-1
Contact resistance: 15m
with active load

Limit switches
Universal Limit Switch Series CM-1xxx
YEAR
WARRANTY
Limit switches of the CM series are used mainly as replacement of the limit switches of the TZ series or for setting
the movement limits of some types of equipment. The switches are supplied with screw cable terminals. They can
work at resistance loads as high as 15A, and are of single circuit type. Limit switches have high accuracy and can
operate at wide variety of speeds.
Mechanical Life (No. of cycles): 5 000 000
Operating frequency: 20 electrical operations/
minute
Operating speed: 0.1mm/s to 1.0m/s
Rated voltage: 230V
IP code: IP65
Items are compliant with the following standards:

EN 60947-1; EN 60947-5-1
Dielectric Strength: 1000V AC
Insulation Resistance: 100m min. (at 500VDC)
Contact Resistance: 5m
Electrical Life (No. of cycles): 500 000 with noninductive load
Type
Type of the
head
CM -1307
Metal
cylinder

starting release
ing
move(g)
(g)
position ment
Rated
current
Packing/ Catalogue
Box (pcs) number
350g
114g 0.4mm 5.5mm
15-active
1 / 480 468105
5A-inductive
Cylinder and
CM -1309 transverse 350g
metal roll
114g 0.4mm 5.5mm
15-active
1 / 480 468106
5A-inductive
Cylinder
-1308 longitudinal 350g
metal roll
114g 0.4mm 5.5mm
15-active
1 / 480 468109
5A-inductive
116
Metal
cylinder
350g
114g 0.4mm 1.6mm
15-active
1 / 480 468110
5A-inductive
CM -1703
Extended
metal roll
160g
22g
7.1mm 1.02mm
15-active
1 / 480 468113
5A-inductive
10g
3g
20mm 5.6mm
15-active
1 / 480 468117
5A-inductive
Limit switches
-1305
CM -1705 Spring lever

Limit switches
All-purpose limit switch series TZ-8xxx
YEAR
WARRANTY
The all-purpose limit switches are devices used for setting gearing limits. They are mounted on transport lines, conveyors and other linear progressive motion machines. They have small dimensions and a vibration-resistant metal
shell with plastic lid, resistant to oil and water.
Gearing speed: 5mm/s to 0.5 m/s
Rated voltage: 230V
IP code: IP40
Cable input: cable gland PG11
Section of power supply conductor: up to 2mm
starting release
ing
move(g)
(g)
position ment
Type
Type of the
head
TZ -8104
lever with
metal roll
750g
100g
20
50
5-active
10 / 100 468104
3-inductive
adjustable
TZ -8108 lever with
metal roll
750g
100g
20
50
5-active
10 / 100 468108
3-inductive
cylinder
TZ -8112 with metal
roll
900g
150g 1.5mm 4.0mm
900g
5-active
150g 1.5mm 4.0mm
10 / 100 468111
3-inductive
750g
100g
20
50
5-active
10 / 100 468107
3-inductive
30mm
5-active
10 / 100 468167
3-inductive
Rated
current
Packing/ Catalogue
Box (pcs) number
5-active
10 / 100 468112
3-inductive

Standard: EN 60947-1; EN 60947-5-1
Insulating resistance: 100M
with active load
TZ -8111
TZ -8107 metal rod
TZ -8167 spring lever 150g
Limit switches
117
metal
cylinder

Limit switches
All-purpose limit switch series CWL-xxx
YEAR
WARRANTY
The all-purpose limit switches are devices used for setting gearing limits. They are mounted on transport lines,
conveyors and other linear progressive motion machines. They have aluminium shell of high mechanic strength
and resistance to oil, water and pressure.
Gearing speed: 1mm/s to 2 m/s
Rated voltage: 230V
IP code: IP66
Cable input: cable gland
Metal shell
Vibration-resistant

Standard: EN 60947-1; EN 60947-5-1
Contact resistance: 15m
with active load
Limit switches
118
Type
Type of the
head
CWLD
metal
cylinder

starting release
ing
move(g)
(g)
position ment
Rated
current
Packing/ Catalogue
Box (pcs) number
2720g
910g 2.0mm 6.4mm
10-active
1 / 50
3-inductive
46LD
cylinder
CWLD2 with metal 2720g
roll
910g 2.0mm 5.6mm
10-active
1 / 50
3-inductive
46LD2
CWLCA2-2
lever with
1360g
metal roll
227g
20
50
10-active
1 / 50 46LCA2-2
3-inductive
adjustable
CWLlever with 2720g
CA12-2-Q
metal roll
910g
20
50
10-active
46LCA121 / 50
3-inductive
2-Q
1200g
55
9010
10-active
46LCA321 / 50
3-inductive
41
oil-resistant
150g
spring lever
CWLCA32-41
CWLNJ
CWLCL
fork
metal rod
142g
28g
28mm 9010
20
50
10-active
1 / 50
3-inductive
46LNJ
10-active
1 / 50
3-inductive
46LCL

Limit switches
Universal Limit Switch Series CZ93-xx
YEAR
WARRANTY
Limit switches of the CZ 93 series are Safety Key Interlock Switches. They are used in object control systems with
high safety requirements. The limit switch body is mounted to the fixed system component, while the safety
key is mounted to the movable system component. System operation cannot start, unless a full interlocking is
achieved. Safety key interlock switches can operate at up to 10A non-inductive resistance load, 3A lamp load
and 5A inductive load. They have high operating accuracy at wide variety of speeds. These limit switches are
available in two versions depending on the operating contacts number: 2NC and NO+NC
Items are compliant with the following standards:
EN 60947-1; EN 60947-5-1
Dielectric Strength: 2500V AC
Insulation Resistance: 100m min. (at 500VDC)
Electrical Life (No. of cycles): 50 000 with non-
Type of the contact system

starting release
ing
move(g)
(g)
position ment
Rated
current
Packing/ Catalogue
Box (pcs) number
Type
Key type
CZ93BPG01
CZ93-K1
147N
29.4N 6 mm 28mm
10-active
10 / 100 46CZ08
3-inductive
CZ93CPG01
CZ93-K1
147N
29.4N 6 mm 28mm
10-active
10 / 100 46CZ09
3-inductive
CZ93BPG02
CZ93-K2
147N
29.4N 6 mm 28mm
10-active
10 / 100 46CZ10
3-inductive
inductive load
Mechanical Life (No. of cycles): 2 000 000
Operating frequency: 30 electrical operations/
minute
Operating speed: 0.1mm/s to 0.5m/s
Rated voltage: 230V
IP code: IP65
CZ93-K2
147N
10-active
10 / 100 46CZ11
29.4N 6 mm 28mm
3-inductive
CZ93BPG03
CZ93-K3
147N
29.4N 6 mm 28mm
10-active
10 / 100 46CZ12
3-inductive
CZ93CPG03
CZ93-K3
147N
29.4N 6 mm 28mm
10-active
10 / 100 46CZ13
3-inductive
Type
Key Actuating
Packing / Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
CZ 93 - K 1
Horizontal
1 / 100
46CZ931
CZ 93 - K 2
Vertical
1 / 100
46CZ932
CZ 93 - K 3
Adjustable
1 / 100
46CZ933
Limit switches
119
CZ93CPG02

Proximity sensor
All-purpose proximity switch series LM xx
YEAR
WARRANTY
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty
Proximity induction sensors are all-purpose switches used in machine systems and equipment for no contact
surveillance of metal elements motion. They can also be used in other machine systems applications as no contact
control sensors for level of liquids, control sensors for the speed and position of rotating chains, etc. They are
developed on the base of PNP and NPN transition. They have small dimensions and feature a metal cylindrical shell
resistant to vibrations and a plastic lid which is oil and water resistant.
EL-LM8
EL-LM12
120
Proximity sensor
EL-LM18
EL-LM22
Insulating resistance: 50 M
Gearing distance: from 2 mm to 7 mm
Precision of repetition: 0.01
Ambient temperature: -25 to +65
Gearing speed: 5mm/s
Rated voltage: 6~36VDC; 90~230VAC
IP code: IP 67
Type
Start
distance
(mm)
EL-LM8-3002NA
15~30 VDC
NPN
NO
130 mA 2 / 200 46LM 8-32NA
EL-LM8-3002NB
15~30 VDC
NPN
NC
130 mA 2 / 200 46LM 8-32NB
EL-LM8-3002PA
15~30 VDC
PNP
NO
130 mA 2 / 200
EL-LM8-3002PB
15~30 VDC
PNP
NC
130 mA 2 / 200 46LM 8-32PB
EL-LM8-2002A
90~230VAC
SCR
NO
150 mA 2 / 200
EL-LM12-3004NA
15~30 VDC
NPN
NO
200 mA 2 / 200 46LM 12-34NA
EL-LM12-3004NB
15~30 VDC
NPN
NC
200 mA 2 / 200 46LM 12-34NB
EL-LM12-3004PA
15~30 VDC
PNP
NO
200 mA 2 / 200 46LM 12-34PA
EL-LM12-3004PB
15~30 VDC
PNP
NC
200 mA 2 / 200 46LM 12-34PB
EL-LM12-2004A
90~230VAC
SCR
NO
300 mA 2 / 200 46LM 12-24A
EL-LM18-3008NA
15~30 VDC
NPN
NO
200 mA 1 / 100 46LM 18-38NA
EL-LM18-3008NB
15~30 VDC
NPN
NC
200 mA 1 / 100 46LM 18-38NB
EL-LM18-3008PA
15~30 VDC
PNP
NO
200 mA 1 / 100 46LM 18-38PA
EL-LM18-3008PB
15~30 VDC
PNP
NC
200 mA 1 / 100 46LM 18-38PB
EL-LM18-2008A
90~230VAC
SCR
NO
300 mA 1 / 100 46LM 18-28A
EL-LM22-3010NA
10
15~30 VDC
NPN
NO
200 mA 1 / 100 46LM 22-30NA
EL-LM22-3010NB
10
15~30 VDC
NPN
NC
200 mA 1 / 100 46LM 22-30NB
EL-LM22-3010PA
10
15~30 VDC
PNP
NO
200 mA 1 / 100 46LM 22-30PA
EL-LM22-3010PB
10
15~30 VDC
PNP
NC
200 mA 1 / 100 46LM 22-30PB
EL-LM22-2010A
10
90~230VAC
SCR
NO
300 mA 1 / 100 46LM 22-20A
EL-LM12-4002A
230VAC
inductive
NO
100 mA 2 / 200 46LM 12-44A
EL-LM12-4004A
230VAC
inductive
NO
300 mA 2 / 200 46LM 12-46A
EL-LM18-4006A
230VAC
inductive
NO
100 mA 1 / 100 46LM 18-44A
EL-LM18-4008A
230VAC
inductive
NO
300 mA 1 / 100 46LM 18-48A
Power supply Type of Type of Output Packing /

voltage
transition contact load Box (pcs)
Catalogue
number
46LM 8-32PA
46LM 8-22A

Capacitive sensor
Capacitive sensors series CM xx
YEAR
WARRANTY
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty
Capacitive sensors are used in machine systems and equipment for no-contact motion surveillance. They consist
of two coaxial electrodes, a condenser and RC generator. This type of sensors reacts to both metal and non-metal
objects, as the gearing distance for non-metal objects depends on their dielectric constants. They allow gearing
distance adjustment for non-magnetic conductive materials. They are developed on the base of PNP and NPN
transition. They have small dimensions and feature a metal cylindrical shell resistant to vibrations and a plastic lid
which is oil and water resistant.
Start
Power sup- Type of Type of Output Packing /
distance
ply voltage transition contact load Box (pcs)
(mm)
Catalogue
number
EL-CM12-3004NA
0~4
15~30 VDC
NPN
NO
200 mA 1 / 100 46CM 12-32NA
EL-CM12-3004NB
0~4
15~30 VDC
NPN
NC
200 mA 1 / 100 46CM 12-32NB
EL-CM12-3004PA
0~4
15~30 VDC
PNP
NO
200 mA 1 / 100 46CM 12-32PA
EL-CM12-3004PB
0~4
15~30 VDC
PNP
NC
200 mA 1 / 100 46CM 12-32PB
EL-CM18-3008NA
0~8
15~30 VDC
NPN
NO
200 mA 1 / 100 46CM 18-38NA
EL-CM18-3008NB
0~8
15~30 VDC
NPN
NC
200 mA 1 / 100 46CM 18-38NB
EL-CM18-3008PA
0~8
15~30 VDC
PNP
NO
200 mA 1 / 100 46CM 18-38PA
EL-CM18-3008PB
0~8
15~30 VDC
PNP
NC
200 mA 1 / 100 46CM 18-38PB
EL-CM18-2008A
0~8
90~230VAC
SCR
NO
300 mA 1 / 100
EL-CM24-3012NA
15~30 VDC
NPN
NO
200 mA 1 / 100 46CM 24-12NA
EL-CM24-3012NB
15~30 VDC
NPN
NC
200 mA 1 / 100 46CM 24-12NB
EL-CM24-3012PA
15~30 VDC
PNP
NO
200 mA 1 / 100 46CM 24-12PA
EL-CM24-3012PB
15~30 VDC
PNP
NC
200 mA 1 / 100 46CM 24-12PB
EL-CM24-2012A
90~230VAC
SCR
NO
300 mA 1 / 100
EL-SM12-3110NA
10
15~30 VDC
NPN
NO
200 mA 2 / 200 46SM 12-31NA
EL-SM12-3110NB
10
15~30 VDC
NPN
NC
200 mA 2 / 200 46SM 12-31NB
EL-SM18-3110PA
10
15~30 VDC
PNP
NO
200 mA 1 / 100 46SM 18-31PA
EL-SM18-3110PB
10
15~30 VDC
PNP
NC
200 mA 1 / 100 46SM 18-31PB
EL-XM18-305PMI
15~30 VDC inductive
NO
100 mA 1 / 100
46XM 18-35A
EL-XM18-305PMU
15~30 VDC inductive
NC
100 mA 1 / 100
46XM 18-35B
EL-XM24-308PMI
15~30 VDC inductive
NO
300 mA 1 / 100
46XM 24-38A
EL-XM24-308PMU
15~30 VDC inductive
NC
300 mA 1 / 100
46XM 24-38B
EL-CM18
EL-CM24
EL-SM12
46CM 18-28A
46CM 24-12A
Note: Sensor of Hall
Note: MI - current type; MU - voltage type

EL-XM18
Type
121
Capacitive sensor
EL-CM12
IP code: IP 54

Photoelectrical sensor
EL-G12
YEAR
WARRANTY
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty
Photoelectrical sensors of the Gxx series are all-purpose switches used in machine systems and equipment for no
contact surveillance of motion of elements. They are based on the photoelectric principle of operation inside the
sensor there is a photo signal emitter and receiver of the returned signal. There are three types of sensors: diffuse
sensors, reflector sensors and emitter-receiver sensors. These types of sensors differ in the way of returning the
signal. They allow for gearing distance adjustment. They are developed on the base of PNP and NPN transition.
They have small dimensions and feature a metal cylindrical shell resistant to vibrations and a plastic lid which is oil
and water resistant.
Technical features:
IP code: IP 67
EL-G18
Type
EL-G30
EL-G35
122
EL-G50
Type of
contact
Type of
sensor
Packing /
Box (pcs)
Catalogue
number
EL-G12-3A07NA 70 mm 15~30 VDC
NPN
12; l=50
Diffuse
1 / 100 46G12A071
EL-G12-3A07PA 70 mm 15~30 VDC
PNP
12; l=50
Diffuse
1 / 100 46G12A072
EL-G12-3B1NA
1m
15~30 VDC
NPN
12; l=50
Reflector
1 / 100 46G123B11
EL-G12-3B1PA
1m
15~30 VDC
PNP
12; l=50
Reflector
1 / 100 46G123B12
EL-G12-3C3NA
3m
15~30 VDC
NPN
12; l=50
Truth beam
1 / 100 46G123C11
EL-G12-3C3PA
3m
15~30 VDC
PNP
12; l=50
Truth beam
1 / 100 46G123C12
EL-G18-3A10NA 100 mm 15~30 VDC
NPN
18; l=70
Diffuse
1 / 100 46G18A101
EL-G18-3A10PA 100 mm 15~30 VDC
PNP
18; l=70
Diffuse
1 / 100 46G18A102
EL-G18-3B2NA
2m
15~30 VDC
NPN
18; l=70
Reflector
1 / 100 46G183B11
EL-G18-3B2PA
2m
15~30 VDC
PNP
18; l=70
Reflector
1 / 100 46G183B12
EL-G18-3C5NA
5m
15~30 VDC
NPN
18; l=70
Truth beam
1 / 100 46G185C11
EL-G18-3C5PA
5m
15~30 VDC
PNP
18; l=70
Truth beam
1 / 100 46G185C12
EL-G30-3A70NA 500 mm 15~30 VDC
NPN
22; l=70
Diffuse
1 / 100 46G30A101
EL-G30-3A70PA 500 mm 15~30 VDC
PNP
22; l=70
Diffuse
1 / 100 46G30A102
EL-G30-3B3NA
3m
15~30 VDC
NPN
22; l=70
Reflector
1 / 100 46G303B11
EL-G30-3B3PA
3m
15~30 VDC
PNP
22; l=70
Reflector
1 / 100 46G303B12
EL-G30-3C101NA 10 m 15~30 VDC
NPN
22; l=70
Truth beam
1 / 52
46G305C11
EL-G30-3C101PA 10 m 15~30 VDC
PNP
22; l=70
Truth beam
1 / 52
46G305C12
EL-G35-3A50NA 500 mm 15~30 VDC
NPN
NO
Diffuse
1 / 100 46G35A101
EL-G35-3A50PA 500 mm 15~30 VDC
PNP
NO
Diffuse
1 / 100 46G35A102
EL-G35-3B3NA
3m
15~30 VDC
NPN
NO
Reflector
1 / 100 46G353B11
EL-G35-3B3PA
3m
15~30 VDC
PNP
NO
Reflector
1 / 100 46G353B12
EL-G35-3C5NA
5m
15~30 VDC
NPN
NO
Truth beam
1 / 50
46G355C11
EL-G35-3C5PA
5m
15~30 VDC
PNP
NO
Truth beam
1 / 50
46G355C12
EL-G50-3A30NA 500 mm 15~30 VDC
NPN
NO
Diffuse
1 / 100 46G50A101
EL-G50-3A30PA 500 mm 15~30 VDC
PNP
NO
Diffuse
1 / 100 46G50A102
EL-G50-3B4NA
4m
15~30 VDC
NPN
NO
Reflector
1 / 100 46G503B11
EL-G50-3B4PA
4m
15~30 VDC
PNP
NO
Reflector
1 / 100 46G503B12
EL-G50-3C5NA
5m
15~30 VDC
NPN
NO
Truth beam
1 / 50
46G505C11
5m
15~30 VDC
PNP
Truth beam
1 / 50
46G505C12
EL-G50-3C5PA
EL-BZJ-211
EL-BZJ
Start Power supply Type of

distance voltage transition
10 mm 15~30 VDC Reflector
NO
NO
Colour detector 1 / 50
46BZJ211
EL-BZJ-311
9mm 15~30 VDC Reflector
NO
46BZJ311
EL-BZJ-411
9mm 15~30 VDC Reflector
NO
46BZJ411

Power supplies
Power supplies
Output Voltage Output

Power
Packing /
Tolerance
Dimensions W/H/L (mm)
(V)
Load (A)
(W)
Box (pcs)
DR - 45 -5
2%
25
78 / 93 / 56
1 / 50
46DR455
DR - 45 - 12
12
3.5
1%
42
78 / 93 / 56
1 / 50
46DR4512
DR - 45 - 15
15
2.8
1%
42
78 / 93 / 56
1 / 45
46DR4515
DR - 45 - 24
24
1%
48
78 / 93 / 56
1 / 16
46DR4524
Type
DR - 75 -12
Output Voltage Output

Power
Packing /
Tolerance
Dimensions W/H/L (mm)
(V)
Load (A)
(W)
Box (pcs)
12
6.3
2%
DR - 75 - 24
24
3.2
1%
DRP - 240 - 24
24
10
1%
1 / 18
46DR7512
75
55.5 / 125.3 / 100
1 / 18
46DR7524
240
125.5 / 125.3 / 100
1 / 12
46DR2424
Float switches of the type QW-xx-xx are sealed

units for direct pump control. They are intended for
continuous liquid level maintenance in pools, tanks
or ponds exercised through direct control of the
pumping in or out process in the respective reservoir.
They are pre-wired and depending on the chosen
configuration can control either the pumping in,
or pumping out of the reservoir. They allow direct
control of single phase pumps with mounted power
of 1 kW. Float switches are waterproof.
The automatic level control units of the DHC1Y-xx
series are intended for mounting on pumping control
Type
Number of
Output
probes (No. of
Load (A)
levels)
YEAR
WARRANTY
panels. They do not use any additional sensors, but

conductive probes to contact the liquid. The unit
sends low (harmless) voltage signals to the probes
and once a contact between a probe and liquid is established, the unit changes its contactors state. Units
are available in three variants with different number
of control contacts suitable for different applications. Each contact can transfer current of up to 5A,
which is enough to ensure control over the powerful
pumps contactors or to directly control pumps with
mounted power of 1 kW. The automatic level control
units can be installed on a DIN rail.
Accuracy
Operating
Voltage (V)
Note
Packing /
Box (pcs)
Catalogue
number
1%
230
100
46DW001
DHC1Y - S
DHC1Y - SD
1%
230
100
46DW002
DHC1Y - T
1%
230
2 pumps control
100
46DW003
Accuracy
Operating
Voltage (V)
Note
Packing /
Box (pcs)
Catalogue
number
Type
QW - M 15 - 3
Catalogue
number
55.5 / 125.3 / 100
75
Float switches
QW - 70AB
Catalogue
number
Number of
Output
probes (No. of
Load (A)
levels)
QW - M 15 - 3
1%
230
1 / 30
46DW004
QW - 70AB
1%
230
1 / 20
46DW005
Type
Input voltage: 80 ~ 230V AC
Over-voltage: 115 ~ 135% of the rated output
voltage
Overload: 120 ~ 120% of the rated output power
Terminals: Input 2 screw terminals; Output: 4
screw terminals;
IP code: IP44
Power indicator
Installation: DIN rail
Cooling: Free air cooling convection
123
Power supplies
The DRP-xx-xx series of power supplies are voltage

reduction and rectification units ideally suited to provide stable power supply of systems and equipment
for contact-free movement monitoring elements
(such as inductive, capacity and photo sensors, logic
elements and systems, etc.). They have small overall
dimensions and can be installed on a DIN rail. The
power units have metal or plastic cases resistant to
vibrations and plastic oil- and waterproof covers. They
are able to provide stable output voltage at comparatively fluctuating input voltage. Devices have built-in
overload and short circuit protection, allowing short
time overload of up to 130%. Power supplies are
available with various output voltages (5, 12, 15 and
24 V DC) and different output power rates.
YEAR
WARRANTY

Rotary switches
Rotary switches LW26 series

The rotary switches LW26 series are produced for
switching on/off electrical circuits with commutated
current from 20 to 160A. They are designed on the
bases of the rotor-eccentric switching on which is
realized through turning of the handle to 60 or 90
degrees. The normal operation is used for commutation of two, three or four conductor systems.
There are special rotary switches that switch on
under given connection schemes and are used to
control motors, electric welding machines and other
consumers.
Documentation corresponding to the product:

Standard: EN 60947-1; EN 60947-3-1
Rotary switches
124
Technical data:
Power supply voltage: 230/400V; 50Hz
Impulse voltage wear resistance: 6000V
Mechanical wear resistance: 3x105 commutation
Dimensions
LW26-20
YEAR
WARRANTY
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty
cycles
Humidity: 35 85% RH
Commuting capacity: up to 160A according to
the tables
IP code:
IP42 for the ordinary breakers mounted in a
panel
IP65 for the breakers offered in a box
Cable connection: screw joining
Tightening moment of the bolt: 1.33N
Maximum section of the power supply conductors: according to the dimensions table
Weight: according to the number of the contacts
Mounting:
directly to the control panel
thickness of the surface to which it is mounted:
max 5mm
Front panel
Joining
conductor
(mm2)
d1
d2
M1 panel
1x2.5
48
48
43
22 + 9.6n
36
36
8.5
4.5
48
60
43
22 + 9.6n
36
36
8.5
4.5
M1 panel with
inscription field
Mounting dimensions (mm)
LW26-25
M1 panel
1x4.0
48
48
45.2
23+12.8n
36
36
8.5
4.5
LW26-32
M2 panel
1x6.0
64
64
58
29.2 + 12.8n
48
48
10
4.5
LW26-63
M2 panel
1x16
64
64
66
29.2 + 21.5n
48
48
10
4.5
LW26-125
M3 panel
1x35
88
88
84
35 + 26.5n
68
68
13
LW26-160
M3 panel
1x50
88
88
88
35 + 32.5n
68
68
13
* n - number of modules
In (A)
Levels
Packing /
Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
LW26 - 10Q
10
1 / 100
492101
LW26 - 16Q
LW26 - 20Q
LW26 - 25Q
LW26 - 32Q
LW26 - 63Q
LW26 - 125Q
LW26 - 160Q
16
20
25
32
63
125
160
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1 / 100
1 / 100
1 / 100
1 / 72
1 / 30
1 / 24
1 / 27
492161
492201
492251
492321
492631
492951
492961
Type
Scheme
Q10
three-poles switching on;
motor starting and stopping;
voltage turning on/off to the
consumers

Rotary switches
Scheme
In (A)
LW26GS - 20/04
20
1 / 100
492207
25
32
2
2
1 / 100
1 / 72
492257
492327
LW26GS - 63/04
Q11
three-poles switching over; motor
starting and stopping; voltage
turning on/off to the consumers;
possibility for access control
63
1 / 30
492637
Type
Scheme
In (A)
Levels
Packing /
Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
20
1 / 100
492202
LW26 - 20N
Catalogue number
25
1 / 100
492252
32
1 / 64
492322
63
1 / 48
492632
LW26 - 125N
125
1 / 24
492952
LW26 - 160N
160
1 / 18
492962
LW26 - 25N
LW26 - 32N
LW26 - 63N
N11
3-position 2 start positions and 1
stop;for motor reversing
Type
Scheme
In (A)
Levels
Packing /
Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
LW26 - 25S
S19
3-position 2 start positions and 1
stop; for two speed motor control;
switching over
between charging*
25
1 / 100
492253
63
1 / 30
492633
125
1 / 24
492953
160
1 / 18
492963
LW26 - 63S
LW26 - 125S
LW26 - 160S
LW26GS - 25/04
LW26GS - 32/04
Levels
Packing /
Box (pcs)
Type
Note: It is necessary that additional bridges be placed at switching over between charging
Type
Scheme
In (A)
Levels
Packing /
Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
LW26 - 25 SD
S21
3-position switching on star/delta
25
1 / 100
492025
63
1 / 30
492063
LW26 - 63 SD
Rotary switches
125
Rotary switches
Type
Scheme
In (A)
Levels
Packing /
Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
LW26 - 32H 5881/3
32
1 / 64
492324
LW26 - 63H 5881/3
H5881/3 85
for welding transformer windings switching over
63
1 / 48
492634
Type
Scheme
In (A)
Levels
Packing /
Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
LW26 - 20 YH5/3
YH5/3 - 66 for voltage switching over
20
1 / 72
492205
Type
Scheme
In (A)
Levels
Packing /
Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
LW26 - 20 LH3/3
LH3/3 - 58 for amperemeter

switching on to current transformers
20
1 / 100
492206
Rotary switches
126
Packing / Box
Catalogue number
(pcs)
Type
Scheme
IP code:
LW26 - 20-25-Q
Box for LW26-20/25
IP 42
1 / 76
492037
LW26 - 32-Q
Box for LW26-32
IP 42
1 / 30
492038
LW26 - 20-25-DIN
Adaptor for DIN-rail

for LW26-20/25
15 / 1500
492039

Rotary switches
Scheme
In (A) Levels
LW26 4.I7168/7 4.I7168/7 20
Type
LW26
4.H6518/5
Type
Scheme
Scheme
1 / 100 492028
In (A) Levels
4.H6518/5 25
Packing / Catalogue
Box (pcs) number
Packing / Catalogue
Box (pcs) number
Type
1 / 100 492029
In (A) Levels
Packing / Catalogue
Box (pcs) number
LW30-20
LW30-20
20
1 / 32
492030
LW30-32
LW30-32
32
1 / 32
492031
LW30-40
LW30-40
40
1 / 32
492033
LW30-63
LW30-63
63
1 / 32
492034
* Possibility for access control
Type
Scheme
IP code:
In (A)
Levels
LW30-32
LW30-32
IP54
32
* Possibility for access control
Packing / Catalogue
Box (pcs) number
1 / 30
492032
Rotary switches
127

Buttons and LED indicators

Standard: EN 60947-1; EN 60947-5-1
128
Technical data:
Insulation voltage: 660V; 50/60Hz
Rated curType of
rent () at
contacts
400V
Description
EL 2- BA 21
EL 2- BA 31
EL 2- BA 51
EL 2- BA 61
NO
Button round
with spring reverse
EL 2- BA 42
Type
Description
EL 2- B 31
Button round
with spring
reverse
EL 2- B 42
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty
Impulse voltage wear resistance: 6000V;

Rated current: 6A (230V AC); 0.3A (230V DC)
Short circuit protection: safety device 10A gG
outside in the circuit
Mechanical wear resistance: 1x106 commutation
cycles
Power of mechanical compression:
at closing: 20N
at opening: 8N
Operating temperature: -20 - +65C
Humidity: 35 85%RH
Tightening moment of the joining conductors:
0.15Nm
Section of the conductor: 1x0.5; 1x0.75; 1x1; 1x1.5;
1x2.5mm2
Mounting:
to a flat metal or plastic surface with thickness:
max 4mm
opening with size: 22.5mm
These are devices used in control and indication

systems, command boards and panels in industrial
automation systems. They are manufactured to
commutate controlling circuits and to control the
switching on or off executive mechanisms such as
relays, contactors, etc. The signal lamps and indicators find broad application in all industrial fields. The
devices endure short time current overload up to
10A, and normally they can commutate thermal current up to 6A in their contact system. The connection
to the contact terminals is through screw terminals
to which operational conductors with section up to
2.5mm2 can be joined.
Type
YEAR
WARRANTY
Colour
Packing / Box
(pcs)
Catalogue
number
black
20 / 300
401021
NO
green
20 / 300
401031
NO
yellow
20 / 300
401051
NO
blue
20 / 300
401061
NC
red
20 / 300
401042
Rated curType of
rent () at Colour
contacts
400V
Note
Packing /
Box (pcs)
Catalogue
number
NO
green
IP=65 Provided from

20 / 300
silicon lid
401032
NC
red
IP=65 Provided from

20 / 300
silicon lid
401043

Rated curVoltage
rent () at
(V)
400V
Colour
Packing /
Box (pcs)
Catalogue
number
EL 2- BW3471
24V
red
20 / 200
401474
EL 2- BW3371
24V
green
20 / 200
401374
EL 2- BW3571
24V
yellow
20 / 200
401574
EL 2- BW3671
24V
blue
20 / 200
401674
EL 2- BW3471
110V
red
20 / 200
401473
EL 2- BW3371
110V
green
20 / 200
401373
110V
yellow
20 / 200
401573
EL 2- BW3571
Button round with spring

reverse and LED indicator
EL 2- BW3671
110V
blue
20 / 200
401673
EL 2- BW3471
230V
red
20 / 200
401471
EL 2- BW3371
230V
green
20 / 200
401371
EL 2- BW3571
230V
yellow
20 / 200
401571
EL 2- BW3671
230V
blue
20 / 200
401671
Type
EL 2- BD 21
EL 2- BD 33
Type
EL 2- B 42
Type
EL 2- BS 545
Description
Switch with arrest
Description
Rated curType of
rent () at Colour
contacts
400V
Packing /
Box (pcs)
Catalogue
number
1NO
black
two-position
20 / 200
401421
2N
black
three-position
20 / 200
401433
Note
Packing /
Box (pcs)
Catalogue
number
spring reverse
15 / 150
401642
Note
Packing /
Box (pcs)
Catalogue
number
release with spin15 / 150

ning
401545
Rated curType of
rent () at Colour
contacts
400V
Button with head

1N
mushroom type
Description
Note
red
Rated curType of
rent () at Colour
contacts
400V
Button with head 1N +

mushroom type 1NO
red
Description
129
Type
130
Packing / Catalogue
Box (pcs) number
Description
EL 2- BW8475
Button
double
1NO+1N
24 AC
Green and red button

20 / 200
+ LED indicator
401844
EL 2-BW8475
Button
double
1NO+1NC
230 AC
Green and red

20/200
button+LED indicator
401845
Note
Type
Description
Type of
contacts
Rated current () at
400V
EL 2- BG 21
Change-over switch
with switch
1NO
Packing /
Box (pcs)
Catalogue
number
two-position with
20 / 200
switch
401121
Note
Voltage (V)
Colour
Packing / Box
(pcs)
Catalogue
number
AD56-22-W-230
230V AC
white
10 / 500
401123
AD56-22-W-110
110V AC
white
10 / 500
401111
Type
Description
AD56-22-W-24
24V AC/DC
white
10 / 500
401124
AD56-22--110
110V AC
amber
10 / 500
401211
AD56-22--24
24V AC/DC
amber
10 / 500
401224
AD56-22--230
230V AC
amber
10 / 500
401223
AD56-22-G-230
230V AC
green
10 / 500
401323
AD56-22-G-110
110V AC
green
10 / 500
401311
24V AC/DC
green
10 / 500
401324
AD56-22-G-24
LED
indicators
230V AC
blue
10 / 500
401523
AD56-22-B-110
110V AC
blue
10 / 500
401511
AD56-22-B-24
24V AC/DC
blue
10 / 500
401524
AD56-22-Y-230
230V AC
yellow
10 / 500
401723
AD56-22-B-230
Rated Voltage
Type of
current () (V)
contacts
at 400V
Type
AD56-22-Y-110
110V AC
yellow
10 / 500
401711
AD56-22-Y-24
24V AC/DC
yellow
10 / 500
401724
AD56-22-R-230
230V AC
red
10 / 500
401423
AD56-22-R-110
110V AC
red
10 / 500
401411
AD56-22-R-24
24V AC/DC
red
10 / 500
401424
Type
Description
Type of contacts
Colour
Packing / Box (pcs) Catalogue number
EL02 - B101
1 NO
green
100 / 1000
401001
EL02 - B102
1 NC
red
100 / 1000
401002

Description
EL1-B134 switching on 0-1
IP code:
IP44
Overall dimensions
(mm)
L
H
W
68
68
50
Overall dimensions
(mm)
L
H
W
Type
of the
contact
Colour
1 NO
black
Type
of the
contact
Colour
Packing / Box Catalogue

(pcs)
number
1 / 100
401134

(pcs)
number
Type
Description
IP code:
EL1-B102
1 button with
spring return
IP44
68
68
50
1 NO
green
1 / 100
401102
EL1-BP102
1 button with
spring return
IP65
68
68
50
1 NO
green
1 / 100
401132
Type
Description
IP code:
Type
of the
contact
Colour
EL1-B213
2 buttons with
spring return
IP44
104
68
50
1 NC 1 - red
1 NO 1 - green
1 / 100
401213
EL1-BP213
2 buttons with
spring return
IP65
104
68
50
1 NC 1 - red
1 NO 1 - green
1 / 100
401233
Type
Description
IP code:
EL1-B339
3 buttons with
spring return
IP44
134
68
50
1 NO 1 - green
1 NC 1 - red
1 NO 1 - green
1 / 50
401339
EL1-BP339
3 buttons with
spring return
IP65
134
68
50
1 NO 1 - green
1 NC 1 - red
1 NO 1 - green
1 / 50
401349
Type
Description
IP code:
Emergency button with head

EL1-B174
mushroom
type 40.Release
through turning
IP44
Overall dimensions
(mm)
L
H
W
Overall dimensions
(mm)
L
H
W
Overall dimensions
(mm)
L
H
W
68
68
50
Type
of the
contact
Colour
Type
of the
contact
Colour
1 NC
red

(pcs)
number
Type
YEAR
WARRANTY

(pcs)
number

(pcs)
number
1 / 100
401174
131
Buttons and switches with box

132
the product:
Standard EN 60947-1
EN 60 947-5-1 t
These are devices used in control and indication systems adjusted for mounting in command boards and
panels directly on DIN-rail. They are manufactured
to commutate controlling circuits and to control the
switching on or off executive mechanisms such as
relays, contactors, etc. The signal lamps and indicators find broad application in all industrial fields. The
devices endure short time current overload up to
20A, and normally they can commutate current up
to 10A with their contact system. The connection
to the contact terminals is through screw terminals
to which operational conductors with section up to
2.5mm2 can be joined. There are also designed buttons combined with lamps.
Technical data:
Insulation voltage: 660V; 50/60Hz
Impulse voltage wear resistance: 6000V;
Rated current: up to 10A (230V AC)
YEAR
WARRANTY
*for industrial
usage, 3 years
warranty
Short circuit protection: safety device 10A gG

outside in the circuit
Rated consumed current (for indicators and buttons combined with indicators): <20mA
wear resistance (indicators): >2000h
Mechanical wear resistance (buttons): 1x106 commutation cycles
Power of mechanical compression:
at closing: 20N
at opening: 8N
Operating temperature: -20 - +65C
Humidity: 35 85%RH
Tightening moment of the joining conductors:
0.15Nm
Section of the conductor: 1x0.5; 1x0.75; 1x1; 1x1.5;
1x2.5mm2
Mounting:
to a DIN-rail
Rated current
Type of the contact
(A) at 400V
Colour
Packing / Box
Catalogue number
(pcs)
Type
Description
ELB - BL - DIN
button
<10
2NO+ 1 NC
black
12 / 240
401505
ELB - BL - DIN
button
<10
1NO+ 2 NC
black
12 / 240
401506
ELB - G - DIN
button
<10
2NO+ 1 NC
green
12 / 240
401507
ELB - G -DIN
button
<10
1NO+ 2 NC
green
12 / 240
401508
ELB - Y - DIN
button
<10
2NO+ 1 NC
yellow
12 / 240
401509
ELB - Y - DIN
button
<10
1NO+ 2 NC
yellow
12 / 240
401510
ELB - R - DIN
button
<10
2NO+ 1 NC
red
12 / 240
401512
ELB - R - DIN
button
<10
1NO+ 2 NC
red
12 / 240
401513
Type
Description
Voltage (V)
Rated current
(A) at 400V
Colour
Packing / Box
Catalogue number
(pcs)
ELD - G - DIN
lamp
230V
<20
green
12 / 240
401500
ELD - R - DIN
lamp
230V
<20
red
12 / 240
401501
ELD - Y - DIN
lamp
230V
<20
yellow
12 / 240
401502
ELD - B - DIN
lamp
230V
<20
blue
12 / 240
401503
ELD -W - DIN
lamp
230V
<20
white
12 / 240
401504
Type
Description
Voltage
(V)
Rated current
(A) at 400V
Type of the
contact
Colour
Packing / Box
(pcs)
Catalogue
number
ELBD - G - DIN button + lamp
230V
<20
2NO+ 1 NC
green
12 / 240
401514
ELBD -G - DIN button + lamp
230V
<20
1NO+ 2 NC
green
12 / 240
401515
ELBD - R - DIN button + lamp
230V
<20
2NO+ 1 NC
red
12 / 240
401516
ELBD - R - DIN button + lamp
230V
<20
1NO+ 2 NC
red
12 / 240
401517
ELBD - Y - DIN button + lamp
230V
<20
2NO+ 1 NC
yellow
12 / 240
401518
ELBD - Y - DIN button + lamp
230V
<20
1NO+ 2 NC
yellow
12 / 240
401519

Devices for telpher control
Devices for telpher control MBP type

They represent different combinations of START and
STOP buttons mounted in plastic boxes in different
sizes. They are connected to the operating circuits of
cranes or telphers and serve as a remote control of
their movement. They are connected directly to the
operating cable of the telpher and send commands
directly to the executive mechanisms. They are designed to provide protection from dust and moisture
IP65.
Technical data:
Supplying voltage: 230V; 50/60Hz
Electrical wear resistance: 1x105 cycles

Humidity: 35 85% RH
Number of contacts: according to the number of
the buttons
Commuting capacity: up to 6A
IP code: IP65
Weight: according to the number of the contacts
Mounting:
directly to the control cable of the telpher (crane)
Contact block and scheme

Emergency
For the directions
Type
Number of
buttons
Packing /
Box (pcs)
Catalogue
number
MBP-A281
NO+NC
1 / 20
46281
MBP-A291 two speed
NO+NC
1 / 20
46291
MBP-A2813
2+1
emergency button
NO+NC
1 / 20
46283
MBP-A2813
2+1
emergency button
with switch
NO+NC
1 / 20
46283K
MBP-A2913 two speed
2+1
emergency button
NO+NC
1 / 20
46294
-2913 two speed
2+1
emergency button
with switch
NO+NC
1/20
46294K
MBP-A481
NO+NC
1 / 20
46481
MBP-A491 two speed
NO+NC
1 / 20
46491
MBP-A4813
4+1
emergency button
NO+NC
1 / 20
46483
MBP-A4813
4+1
emergency button
with switch
NO+NC
1 / 20
46483K
MBP-A4913 two speed
4+1
emergency button
NO+NC
1 / 20
46493
-4913 two speed
4+1
emergency button
with switch
NO+NC
1/20
46493K
MBP-A681
NO+NC
1 / 20
46681
MBP-A691 two speed
NO+NC
1 / 20
46691
MBP-A6813
6+1
emergency button
NO+NC
1 / 20
46683
MBP-A6813K
6+1
emergency button
with switch
NO+NC
1 / 20
46683K
MBP-A6913 two speed
6+1
emergency button
NO+NC
1 / 20
46693
-6913 two speed
6+1
emergency button
with switch
NO+NC
1/20
46693K
MBP-A881
NO+NC
1 / 20
46881
MBP-A891 two speed
NO+NC
1 / 20
46891
MBP-A8813
8+1
emergency button
NO+NC
1 / 20
46883
MBP-A8813K
8+1
emergency button
with switch
NO+NC
1 / 20
46883K
MBP-A8913 two speed
8+1
emergency button
NO+NC
1 / 20
46893
-8913 two speed
8+1
emergency button
with switch
NO+NC
1/20
46893K
stop button type

button type one-speed (x81) or two-speed (x91)
number of buttons
133
Devices for telpher control
YEAR
WARRANTY

Warning lights and towers
The revolving warning lights and towers are devices

intended for use as status indicators in the humanmachine control systems. They are suitable for
installation on control cabinets and panels or directly
on machines. They are manufactured in different
colour combinations to attract attention of operators working in a given production sector. Warning
lights and towers are widely used in almost any
industrial branch. They can be mounted on movable
components or such, creating potential danger and
can warn all workers for a critical situation with their
blinking light and siren. These devices are electrically
connected through cables, protruding out of the
lamp casing.
134
YEAR
WARRANTY
Rated voltage: 12 VAC/230VAC; 50/60 Hz;
Isolation voltage: 660V; 50/60 Hz;
Impulse voltage stability: 6000V
Rated power: see the tables below
Short circuit protection: 1A gG external fuse
Operating Temperature: - 20OC + 65OC
Humidity: 35 85% RH
Plastic cover: UV resistant polycarbonate not considered as being harmful to human health
Installation:
Warning lights are fixed to the respective machine
body with the studs protruding from the light
plastic casing.
Voltage
Rated
(VAC) Power (W)
Colour
Packing /
Box (pcs)
Catalogue
number
10
Red
1 / 30
401525R
12
10
Green
1 / 30
401525G
Warning light
12
10
Yellow
1 / 30
401525Y
LTE1101J - R
Warning light + siren
12
11
Red
1 / 30
401526R
LTE1101J - G
12
11
Green
1 / 30
401526G
LTE1101J - Y
12
11
Yellow
1 / 30
401526Y
LTE1101 - R
Warning light
230
Red
1 / 30
402525R
LTE1101 - G
Warning light
230
Green
1 / 30
402525G
LTE1101 - Y
Warning light
230
Yellow
1 / 30
402525Y
LTE1101J - R
230
Red
1 / 30
402526R
LTE1101J - G
230
Green
1 / 30
402526G
LTE1101J - Y
230
Yellow
1 / 30
402526Y
LTE1161 - R
Warning light
12
35
Red
1/8
401527R
LTE1161 - G
Warning light
12
35
Green
1/8
401527G
LTE1161 - Y
Warning light
12
35
Yellow
1/8
401527Y
LTE1161 - R
Warning light
230
28
Red
1/8
402527R
LTE1161 - G
Warning light
230
28
Green
1/8
402527G
LTE1161 - Y
Warning light
230
28
Yellow
1/8
402527Y
LTA205 - 1
Tower / flashing
12
1 / 20
401528
LTA205 - 2
Tower / flashing
12
1 / 20
401529
LTA205 - 3
Tower / flashing
12
12
1 / 20
401530
LTA205 - 3J
Tower / flashing +
siren
12
12
1 / 20
401531
LTA205 - 5
Tower / flashing
12
18
1 / 20
401532
LTA205 - 1
Tower / flashing
230
1 / 20
402528
LTA205 - 2
Tower / flashing
230
1 / 20
402529
LTA205 - 3
Tower / flashing
230
10
1 / 20
402530
LTA205 - 3J
Tower / flashing +
siren
230
11
1 / 20
402531
LTA205 - 5
Tower / flashing
230
14
1 - Red
2 - Red/Green
3 - Red/Yellow/
Green
3 - Red/Yellow/
Green
5 - Red/Yellow/
Green/
Blue/Transparent
1 - Red
2 - Red/Green
3 - Red/Yellow/
Green
3 - Red/Yellow/
Green
5 - Red/Yellow/
Green/
Blue/Transparent
1 / 20
402532
Type
Description
LTE1101 - R
Warning light
12
LTE1101 - G
Warning light
LTE1101 - Y
Description
Voltage
(V)
Rated
Power
(W)
Sound level (dB)
Packing /
Box (pcs)
Catalogue
number
MS-290A
metal siren
230
60
100
1 / 24
401533
MS-290B
plastic siren
230
60
100
1 / 24
401541
Type
Description
Voltage
(V)
Rated
Power
(W)
Sound level (dB)
Packing /
Box (pcs)
Catalogue
number
MS-390
siren
230
160
120
1 / 10
401534
Type
Description
Voltage
(V)
Rated
Power
(W)
Sound level (dB)
Packing /
Box (pcs)
Catalogue
number
CB-4
alarm bell
12
85
1 / 50
401535
CB-4
alarm bell
24
85
1 / 50
401536
CB-4
alarm bell
110
85
1 / 50
401537
CB-4
alarm bell
230
85
1 / 50
401538
Type
Description
Voltage
(V)
Rated
Power
(W)
Sound level (dB)
Packing /
Box (pcs)
Catalogue
number
FA-01
fire alarm
230
1 / 100
401540
135
Type
INDUSTRIAL PLUGS
AND SOCKETS
INDUSTRIAL
PLUGS AND SOCKETS
Industrial plugs | 138

Industrial sockets | 139
INDUSTRIAL PLUG AND SOCKETS

Industrial plugs
product:
Standard EN 60309-1; EN 60309-2
Industrial plugs and sockets HT/HTN type
YEAR
WARRANTY
Made of special high quality plastic with alloys against aging at sun light exposing and for increasing the mechanical strength. They are designed in accordance with standard EN 60309 and provide reliable connection
and high protection level against electrical current. They provide IP protection not less than IP 44/67. They are
designed for surface or flush mounting, movable or fixed type.
Technical data:
Rated voltage: 500V
Rated short circuit current: according to the mounted protection in the boards
Impulse voltage wear resistance: 8kV
IP code: IP 44/67
Plugs and sockets: 6h
Model
In (A)
Poles
Un (V)
Dimensions (mm)
A /B /C
IP code:
Packing/Box
Catalogue
number
HT-013
16
1P+N+E
230
121 / 84 / 53
44
2 / 10 / 100
37013
HT-023
32
1P+N+E
230
138 / 92 / 63
44
2 / 10 / 60
37023
Model
In (A)
Poles
Un (V)
Dimensions (mm)
A /B /C
IP code:
Packing/Box
Catalogue
number
HT-014
16
3P+E
400
121 / 84 / 51
44
2 / 10 / 100
37014
HT-024
32
3P+E
400
138 / 92 / 63
44
2 / 10 / 60
37024
HT-034
63
3P+E
400
230 / 109 / 36
44
2 / 10
37034
HT-044
125
3P+E
400
295 / 124 / 50
44
2 / 10
37044
Model
In (A)
Poles
Un (V)
Dimensions (mm)
A /B /C
IP code:
Packing/Box
Catalogue
number
HT-015
16
3P+N+E
400
129 / 92 / 62
44
2 / 10 / 60
37015
HT-025
32
3P+N+E
400
149 / 97 / 70
44
2 / 10 / 60
37025
HT-035
63
3P+N+E
400
230 / 109 / 36
44
2 / 10
37035
HT-045
125
3P+N+E
400
295 / 124 / 50
44
2 / 10
37045
Industrial plugs
138

Industrial sockets
YEAR
WARRANTY
Model
In (A)
Poles
Un (V)
Dimensions (mm)
A/C
IP code:
Packing/Box
Catalogue
number
HT-213
16
1P+N+E
230
130 / 96
44
2 / 10 / 100
37213
HT-223
32
1P+N+E
230
149 / 90
44
2 / 10 / 60
37223
Model
In (A)
Poles
Un (V)
Dimensions (mm)
A/C
IP code:
Packing/Box
Catalogue
number
HT-214
16
3P+E
400
131 / 96
44
2 / 10 / 100
37214
HT-224
32
3P+E
400
149 / 90
44
2 / 10 / 60
37224
HT-234
63
3P+E
400
230/109
44
2 / 10
37234
HT-244
125
3P+E
400
290/124
44
2 / 10
37244
Movable industrial sockets for surface mounting

HT type ip44
Model
In (A)
Poles
Un (V)
Dimensions (mm)
A/C
IP code:
Packing/Box
Catalogue
number
HT-215
16
3P+N+E
400
139 / 90
44
2 / 10 / 60
37215
HT-225
32
3P+N+E
400
154 / 100
44
2 / 10 / 60
37225
HT-235
63
3P+N+E
400
230/100
44
2 / 10
37235
HT-245
125
3P+N+E
400
290/124
44
2 / 10
37245
Industrial sockets
139

Industrial plugs
Fixed industrial plugs HT type ip44
YEAR
WARRANTY
Model
In (A)
Poles
Un (V)
Dimensions (mm)
A/C
IP code:
Packing/Box
Catalogue
number
HT-513
16
1P+N+E
230
121/79
44
2 / 10 / 60
37513
HT-523
32
1P+N+E
230
131/83
44
2 / 10 / 60
37523
Model
In (A)
Poles
Un (V)
Dimensions (mm)
A/C
IP code:
Packing/Box
Catalogue
number
HT 514
16
3P+E
400
121/76
44
2 / 10 / 60
37514
HT 524
32
3P+E
400
131/83
44
2 / 10 / 60
37524
Model
In (A)
Poles
Un (V)
Dimensions (mm)
A/C
IP code:
Packing/Box
Catalogue
number
HT 515
16
3P+N+E
400
123/79
44
2 / 10 / 60
37515
HT 525
32
3P+N+E
400
132/84
44
2 / 10 / 60
37525
Industrial plugs
140

Industrial sockets
YEAR
WARRANTY
Model
In (A)
Poles
Un (V)
Dimensions (mm)
A/C
IP code:
Packing/Box
Catalogue
number
HT-113
16
1P+N+E
230
126 / 86
44
2 / 10 / 60
37113
HT-123
32
1P+N+E
230
141 / 97
44
2 / 10 / 60
37123
Model
In (A)
Poles
Un (V)
Dimensions (mm)
A/C
IP code:
Packing/Box
Catalogue
number
HT-114
16
3P+E
400
132 / 91
44
2 / 10 / 60
37114
HT-124
32
3P+E
400
141 / 96
44
2 / 10 / 60
37124
HT-134
63
3P+E
400
193 / 122
44
2 / 10
37134
HT-144
125
3P+E
400
220 / 140
44
2 / 10
37144
Fixed industrial sockets HT type ip44
Model
In (A)
Poles
Un (V)
Dimensions (mm)
A/C
IP code:
Packing/Box
Catalogue
number
HT-115
16
3P+N+E
400
129 / 96
44
2 / 10 / 60
37115
HT-125
32
3P+N+E
400
141 / 98
44
2 / 10 / 60
37125
HT-135
63
3P+N+E
400
193 / 122
44
2 / 10
37135
HT-145
125
3P+N+E
400
220 / 140
44
2 / 10
37145
Industrial sockets
141

Industrial plugs
Industrial plugs HTN type IP67
YEAR
WARRANTY
Model
In (A)
Poles
Un (V)
Dimensions (mm)
A /B /C
IP code:
Packing/Box
Catalogue
number
HTN 0131
16
1P+N+E
230
120/71/12
67
1 / 60
37131
HTN 0231
32
1P+N+E
230
150/93/17
67
1 / 40
37231
Model
In (A)
Poles
Un (V)
Dimensions (mm)
A /B /C
IP code:
Packing/Box
Catalogue
number
HTN 0141
16
3P+E
400
125/79/12
67
2 / 60
37141
HTN 0241
32
3P+E
400
150/93/17
67
2 / 40
37241
HTN 0341
63
3P+E
400
230/109/36
67
10
37341
HTN 0441
125
3P+E
400
230/109/36
67
10
37441
Model
In (A)
Poles
Un (V)
Dimensions (mm)
A /B /C
IP code:
Packing/Box
Catalogue
number
HTN 0151
16
3P+N+E
400
133/87/12
67
2 / 60
37151
HTN 0251
32
3P+N+E
400
155/99.5/17
67
2 / 40
37251
HTN 0351
63
3P+N+E
400
230/109/36
67
10
37351
HTN 0451
125
3P+N+E
400
295/124/50
67
10
37451
Industrial plugs
142

Industrial sockets
YEAR
WARRANTY
Model
In (A)
Poles
Un (V)
Dimensions (mm)
A/C
IP code:
Packing/Box
Catalogue
number
HTN 2131
16
1P+N+E
230
131/90
67
2 / 60
37831
HTN 2231
32
1P+N+E
230
149/90
67
2 / 40
37931
Model
In (A)
Poles
Un (V)
Dimensions (mm)
A/C
IP code:
Packing/Box
Catalogue
number
HTN 2141
16
3P+E
400
131/76
67
2 / 60
37841
HTN 2241
32
3P+E
400
149/90
67
2 / 40
37941
HTN 2341
63
3P+E
400
271/115
67
10
37942
HTN 2441
125
3P+E
400
295/137
67
37943
Movable Industrial socket HTN type ip67
Model
In (A)
Poles
Un (V)
Dimensions (mm)
A/C
IP code:
Packing/Box
Catalogue
number
HTN 2151
16
3P+N+E
400
139/90
67
2 / 60
37851
HTN 2251
32
3P+N+E
400
154/100
67
2 / 40
37951
HTN 2351
63
3P+N+E
400
240/112
67
10
37952
HTN 2451
125
3P+N+E
400
300/126
67
37953
Industrial sockets
143

Industrial sockets
Fixed Industrial socket HTN type ip67
YEAR
WARRANTY
Model
In (A)
Poles
Un (V)
Dimensions (mm)
A /B /C
IP code:
Packing/Box
Catalogue
number
HTN 1131
16
1P+N+E
230
101/150/93.5
67
2 / 40
37731
HTN 1231
32
1P+N+E
230
114/162/93.5
67
2 / 40
37631
Model
In (A)
Poles
Un (V)
Dimensions (mm)
A /B /C
IP code:
Packing/Box
Catalogue
number
HTN 1141
16
3P+E
400
104/150/93.5
67
2 / 40
37741
HTN 1241
32
3P+E
400
116/162/93.5
67
2 / 40
37641
HTN 1341
63
3P+E
400
171/170/230
67
1 / 10
37842
HTN 1441
125
3P+E
400
171/170/230
67
1/6
37844
Model
In (A)
Poles
Un (V)
Dimensions (mm)
A /B /C
IP code:
Packing/Box
Catalogue
number
HTN 1151
16
3P+N+E
400
107/150/93.5
67
2 / 40
37751
HTN 1251
32
3P+N+E
400
116/162/93.5
67
2 / 40
37651
HTN 1351
63
3P+N+E
400
171/170/230
67
10
37852
HTN 1451
125
3P+N+E
400
171/170/230
67
37854
Industrial sockets
144

Industrial sockets
Model
In (A)
Poles
Un (V)
Dimensions (mm)
A/C
IP code:
Packing/Box
Catalogue
number
HT-413
16
1P+N+E
230
70/85
44
2 / 10 / 60
37413
HT-423
32
1P+N+E
230
80/97
44
2 / 10 / 60
37423
Model
In (A)
Poles
Un (V)
Dimensions (mm)
A/C
IP code:
Packing/Box
Catalogue
number
HT-414
16
3P+E
400
70/85
44
2 / 10 / 60
37414
HT-424
32
3P+E
400
80/97
44
2 / 10 / 60
37424
Model
In (A)
Poles
Un (V)
Dimensions (mm)
A/C
IP code:
Packing/Box
Catalogue
number
HT-415
16
3P+N+E
400
70/85
44
2 / 10 / 60
37415
HT-425
32
3P+N+E
400
80/97
44
2 / 10 / 60
37425
Model
In (A)
Poles
Un (V)
Dimensions (mm)
A/C
IP code:
Packing/Box
Catalogue
number
HT-105SR
16
German type
230
70/70
44
500
37105
Model
In (A)
Poles
Un (V)
Dimensions (mm)
A/C
IP code:
Packing/Box
Catalogue
number
213L-2P-W
16
1P+N+E
230
450
44
48
37003
German type socket for DIN rail mounting

It provides plug presence in electric boards and
easy cabling.
* Supply voltage: 230V
* Computing option: up to 16
* Operation temperature: from -10 up to +65

* Humidity: up to 85%RH
Mounting method:
* DIN rail
Type
Packing / Box
(pcs)
Catalogue
number
German type socket for DIN rail
5 / 100
37004
YEAR
WARRANTY
145
Industrial sockets
Industrial sockets for flush mounting HT type ip44
DISTRIBUTION BOXES
DISTRIBUTION
BOXES
Plastic distribution boxes | 148

Metal distribution boxes | 151
Metal distribution boxes for flush and surface mounting | 151
Plastic distribution boards | 154
Plastic distribution boards and accessories | 156
DISTRIBUTION BOXES
Plastic distribution boards
the product:
Standard EN 62 208;
EN 60439-1; EN 60 439-3
Plastic distribution boxes for surface and flush

mounting IP40
YEAR
WARRANTY
The distribution boxes are designed for mounting in newly built buildings or buildings in reconstruction. They
are a module box with mounted protective devices of the given flats electrical current circuit circles. They
are supplied with transparent door for each row opening upwards to 90. They are made of white self-extinguishing plastic, resistant to heat and high temperature with IP code: IP 40. The mounted device in the box is
protected from direct contact to the current leading parts. They are offered with DIN-rail for device mounting
and terminal strips for the neutral and earthing conductor joining. Mounted directly on the walls with screws.
Technical data:
Maximum insulation voltage: 690V; 50Hz
fire resistance rate: UL 94
IP code: IP 40
Class of current limiting: 2
Boxes for surface mounting
DISTRIBUTION BOXES
148
Dimensions (mm)
Module capacity
(number of
devices)
110
205
150
205
190
205
Number of rows
Packing / Box
Catalogue number
75
1 / 20
60040
75
1 / 20
60060
75
1 / 20
60080
Packing / Box
Catalogue number
Boxes for flush mounting

Dimensions (mm)
Module capacity
(number of
devices)
110
205
75
1 / 20
60041
150
205
75
1 / 20
60061
190
205
75
1 / 20
60081
Number of rows
DISTRIBUTION BOXES
Plastic distribution boxes for surface and flush
mounting IP40
YEAR
WARRANTY
are a module box with mounted protective devices of the given flats electrical current circuit circles. They
are supplied with transparent door for each row opening upwards to 90. They are made of white self-extinguishing plastic, resistant to heat and high temperature with IP code: IP 40. The mounted device in the box is
protected from direct contact to the current leading parts. They are offered with DIN-rail for device mounting
and terminal strips for the neutral and earthing conductor joining. Mounted directly on the walls with screws.
Technical data:
Door colour: Transparent blue
Mounting type: Surface;Flush
Modules (): 12; 18; 24; 28; 36
IP code: IP40
Row: Single row for 12 and 18 modules
Double rows for 24; 28 and 36 modules
Material: ABS for body and PC for door
Fire resistance: 650C/30s
Ambient temperature(C): -5 +65C, max. 95% humidity
Colour: White RAL 9003
Storage temperature(C): -40 +75C
Number of rows
Module capacity
(number of devices)
12
Dimensions (mm)
Packing / Box
Catalogue
number
60122
300
204
102
1/10
18
410
204
102
1/10
60182
24
300
294
109
1/5
60242
28
310
354
109
1/5
60282
36
410
294
109
1/5
60362
Packing / Box
Catalogue
number
Boxes for flush mounting

Number of rows
Module capacity
(number of devices)
Dimensions (mm)
L
12
317
220
102
1/10
60123
18
426
220
102
1/10
60183
24
317
310
109
1/5
60243
28
294
338
109
1/5
60283
36
426
310
109
1/5
60363
DISTRIBUTION BOXES
Boxes for surface mounting
149
the product:
Standard EN 62 208;
EN 60439-1; EN 60 439-3
DISTRIBUTION BOXES
Moisture-proof distribution boxes for surface
mounting - IP 55; IP65
YEAR
WARRANTY
are a module box with mounted protective devices of the given flats electrical installation current circles. They
are supplied with transparent door for each row opening upwards to 90. They are made of white non-self-extinguishing plastic, resistant to heat and high temperature. The special design of the lids and gaskets provides
IP code: IP55; IP65. The mounted device in the box is protected from indirect contact to the current leading
parts. They are offered with DIN-rail for device mounting and terminal strips for the neutral and earthing
conductor joining. For direct wall moutining with screws.
the product:
Standard EN 62 208;
EN 60439-1; EN 60 439-3
Technical data:
Flame retardance: UL94 V-O
IP code: IP55; IP65
Door colour: Transparent
Mounting type: Surface
DISTRIBUTION BOXES
Moisture-proof distribution boxes for surface mounting - IP 55
150
Dimensions (mm)
Type
Number
of rows
Module capacity
(number of
devices)
IP
WP4
WP6
WP8
55
216
214
93
1 / 20
60102
WP12
12
55
270
214
93
1 / 12
60103
Packing /
Box
Catalogue
number
55
127
214
93
1 / 20
60100
55
162
214
93
1 / 20
60101
WP18
18
55
378
233
93
1/8
60104
WP24
24
55
340
288
93
1/8
60105
Moisture-proof distribution boxes for surface mounting - IP 65

Dimensions (mm)
Type
Number
of rows
Module capacity
(number of
devices)
IP
WPDB 04
WPDB 08
WPDB 12
WPDB 18
WPDB 24
Packing /
Box
Catalogue
number
65
210
140
100
1/30
60004
65
210
215
100
1/20
60008
12
65
260
300
140
1/10
60012
18
65
285
410
140
1/5
60018
24
65
300
415
140
1/5
60024
DISTRIBUTION BOXES
Metal distribution boards
Metal distribution boxes for flush and surface mounting
YEAR
WARRANTY
Number
of poles
Module capacity
(number of
devices)
Packing /
Box
Catalogue
number
MDB 1/4
251
190
90
1/10
600104
MDB 1/8
251
262
90
1/10
600108
MDB 1/12
12
251
334
90
1/10
600112
MDB 1/16
16
251
406
90
1/10
600116
Type
Number
of poles
Module capacity
(number of
devices)
Packing /
Box
Catalogue
number
MDB 3/4
454
406
114
1/2
600304
MDB 3/6
508
406
114
1/2
600306
MDB 3/8
562
406
114
1/2
600308
MDB 3/10
10
616
406
114
1/2
600310
MDB 3/12
12
670
406
114
1/2
600312
Dimensions (mm)
Stainless steel metal boards
YEAR
WARRANTY
Supplied with a special lock, metal plate for fixing of electrical devices, lid for the input-output conductors,
grounded dowel pin, gaskets, etc. Option to change the opening direction. Made of single stainless steel
sheet. The mouting plate is treated with anti-corrosion and decorative powder coating. They are used in case
of special requirements regarding the exposure of corrosion.
Technical data:
Rated voltage: up to 1000V
Maximum current: up to 800A
Material: stainless steel
IP code: IP 65
Mounting:
vertically on flat surface
Type
151
Thickness of metal
Metal box dimensions (mm)
Catalogue
sheet
Packing / Box
number
(mm)
L (height) W (width) H (depth)
SXF 25/25/15
1.0
250
250
150
54025
SXF 30/25/15
1.0
300
250
150
54030
SXF 40/30/20
1.0
400
300
200
54040
SXF 50/40/20
1.2
500
400
200
54050
SXF 60/40/20
1.2
600
400
200
54060
SXF 70/50/20
1.2
700
500
200
54070
SXF 80/60/25
1.5
800
600
250
54080
SXF 100/80/30
1.5
1000
800
300
54100
SXF 120/80/30
1.5
1200
800
300
54120
the product:
Standard EN 62 208;
EN 60439-1; EN 60 439-3
Dimensions (mm)
Type
DISTRIBUTION BOXES
Technical data:
Flame retardance: V-0
IP code: IP40
Colour: Gray
Mounting type: Surface and flush
DISTRIBUTION BOXES
the product:
Standard EN 62208;
EN 60439-1; EN 60 439-3
YEAR
WARRANTY
Supplied with a special lock, metal plate for fixing of electrical devices, lid for the input-output conductors,
grounded dowel pin, gaskets, etc. Option to change the opening direction. Made of single steel sheet, treated
with decorative powder coating.
DISTRIBUTION BOXES
Technical data:
Rated voltage: up to 1000V
Maximum current: up to 1250A
Material: steel
RAL 7032
Coating: powder style painting
IP code: IP 65
Mounting:
vertically on flat surface
152
Type
Nominal
Thickness of
Metal box dimensions (mm)
working cur- Packing /
metal sheet
rent In
Box
(mm)
L (height) W (width) H (depth)
(A)
Catalogue
number
JXF 25/25/15
1.0
250
250
150
80
53025
JXF 25/30/15
1.0
250
300
150
100
53026
JXF 30/25/15
1.0
300
250
150
100
53030
JXF 30/40/20
1.0
300
400
200
160
53031
JXF 40/30/20
1.0
400
300
200
160
53040
JXF 40/50/20
1.2
400
500
200
250
53041
JXF 40/40/20
1.2
400
400
200
250
53044
JXF 50/40/20
1.2
500
400
200
250
53050
JXF 40/60/20
1.2
400
600
200
250
53051
JXF 60/40/20
1.2
600
400
200
250
53060
JXF 60/60/20
1.2
600
600
200
250
53066
JXF 70/50/20
1.2
700
500
200
350
53070
JXF 80/60/25
1.5
800
600
250
400
53080
JXF 100/80/30
1.5
1000
800
300
630
53100
JXF 120/80/30
1.5
1200
800
300
630
53120
JXF 140/80/30
1.5
1400
800
300
800
53140
JXF 180/80/30
1.5
1800
800
300
1000
53188
JXF 180/100/30*
1.5
1800
1000
300
1250
53180
Note: *Metal boxes with double door
DISTRIBUTION BOXES
the product:
Standard EN 60439-1;
EN 60 439-3
Electric Switchboards with Type-Approval Certificates

The company has produced and successfully passed the type-approval procedures for the following metal and
plastic electric control boxes and boards with ELMARK automation:
Low Voltage Meter Box Type TEPO
Low Voltage Main Switchboard Type GRT
DISTRIBUTION BOXES
Tower Mounted Switchgear

Low Voltage Meter Box
Low Voltage Main Switchboard
Distribution Switchboard
Power Compensation System
Tower Mounted Switchgear Type MTT
Distribution Switchboard Type KRSH
Power Compensation System Type CCU
153
DISTRIBUTION BOXES
Plastic distribution boards - ABS IP65
YEAR
WARRANTY
Plastic distribution boards of various sizes. Intended for extension or distribution of cable lines. They can also
be used as meter boxes. They are resistant to chemical agents, thermal and UV rays.
the product:
Standard EN 60439 -1
EN 60439 -5
Resistance: chemical agents, weak acids, alkali, oils, salts, etc.
Rated Voltage: up to 690V
Maximum Current: up to 800A
Thermal Deformation: over 240C
Operating Temperature: -35C + 65C
Material: ABS
IP code: IP65
Colour: RAL7035 grey
Recyclable
adjustable mounting plate position
Mounting:
Vertically on flat surface
DISTRIBUTION BOXES
ABS halogen free distribution boards - gray door
154
Board Type
Material Type
L (mm)
W (mm)
H (mm)
Packing /
Box
Catalogue number
PP 3001
ABS
300
200
130
5312030130
PP 3002
ABS
350
250
150
5312535150
PP 3004
ABS
400
300
170
5313040170
PP 3005
ABS
400
300
220
5313040220
PP 3006
ABS
500
350
190
5313550190
PP 3007
ABS
500
400
240
5314050240
PP 3008
ABS
600
400
200
5314060190
Note: Open door angle 180
ABS halogen free distribution boards - transparent door

Board Type
Material Type
L (mm)
W (mm)
H (mm)
Packing /
Box
Catalogue number
PP 3011
ABS
300
200
130
5342030130
PP 3012
ABS
350
250
150
5342535150
PP 3014
ABS
400
300
170
5343040170
PP 3015
ABS
400
300
220
5343040220
PP 3016
ABS
500
350
190
5343550190
PP 3017
ABS
500
400
240
5344050240
PP 3018
ABS
600
400
200
5344060190
PP 3020
ABS
700
500
250
5345070250
DISTRIBUTION BOXES
ABS halogen free distribution module boards - transparent door
Board Type
Material Type
L (mm)
W (mm)
H (mm)
Packing /
Box
Catalogue number
PP 3112-18modules
ABS
350
250
150
5322535150
PP 3114-24modules
ABS
400
300
170
5323040170
PP 3116-45modules
ABS
500
350
190
5323550190
PP 3118-60modules
ABS
600
400
200
5324060190
Note: Transperent door
YEAR
WARRANTY
Colour: grey RAL 7035.
IP65 protection degree.
Material: made of halogen free reinforced fiberglass polyester, self-extinguishing V0 degree according to
UL94.
Double insulation, shock resistance: IK10, 20j, according to EN 62262.
Application temperature: minimum 25, maximum +65.
Resistance to abnormal heat (GWT)- board with blank door up to 960C - board with transparent window
up to 650C.
Application voltage 1000V, suitable for photovoltaic plants.
Right or left reversible door with stainless steel pins it can be opened more than 180.
Plain and smooth headboards for easy opening and conduit inlet.
Removable frame ready to install slotted trunkings in the back.
Back plates made up of metal or insulating material can be fixed directly to the board back, also if the frame
is used, or can be adjusted to different heights through the kit EC625REG.
Possibility to mount 48-75mm high switches or 102mm high switches starting from the board with dimensions 435x505x215.
One-Screw-System: only one type of screws is used for the different accessories in order to permit a simple
and easy assembly.
Left or right reversible counter door with stainless steel pins, ergonomic handle, triangle lock, adjustable at
two different heights with reference grid for the fixing of the devices.
Fixing of the single/double blank or windowed panels through a turn screws.
DISTRIBUTION BOXES
Surface mounting polyester boards EC - IP65
155
Type
Material
L (mm)
W (mm)
H (mm)
Packing /
Box
Catalogue number
PBBD 5001
Polyester
305
270
170
5332730170
PBBD 5002
Polyester
430
325
185
5333243185
PBBD 5003
Polyester
505
435
215
5334350215
PBBD 5004
Polyester
655
435
215
5334365215
PBBD 5005
Polyester
655
545
265
5335465265
PBBD 5006
Polyester
810
620
320
5336281320
*Detailed installation instructions and information about the functions and applications of all additional accessories for polyester boxes, you can find on: www.elmarkholding.eu
Halogen free polyester boards EC- blank door
DISTRIBUTION BOXES
Plastic distribution boards and accessories
Halogen free polyester boards EC - transparent door
Type
Material
L (mm)
W (mm)
H (mm)
Packing /
Box
Catalogue number
PBTD 5001
Polyester
305
270
170
5362730170
PBTD 5002
Polyester
430
325
185
5363243185
PBTD 5003
Polyester
505
435
215
5364350215
PBTD 5004
Polyester
655
435
215
5364365215
PBTD 5005
Polyester
655
545
265
5365465265
PBTD 5006
Polyester
810
620
320
5366281320
Polyester hinger counterdoor EC

Type
Material
Used for type boards
Packing /
Box
Catalogue number
CD 5002
Polyester
PBTD/PBBD 5002
53502CD
CD 5003
Polyester
PBTD/PBBD 5003
53503CD
CD 5004
Polyester
PBTD/PBBD 5004
53504CD
CD 5005
Polyester
PBTD/PBBD 5005
53505CD
CD 5006
Polyester
PBTD/PBBD 5006
53505CD
DISTRIBUTION BOXES
Metal back plate EC

Type
Dimensions
Packing /
Box
Catalogue number
MP 5001
207x239
PBTD/PBBD 5001
53501MP
MP 5002
264x364
PBTD/PBBD 5002
53502MP
MP 5003
372x439
PBTD/PBBD 5003
53503MP
MP 5004
372x589
PBTD/PBBD 5004
53504MP
MP 5005
482x589
PBTD/PBBD 5005
53505MP
MP 5006
556x739
PBTD/PBBD 5006
53506MP
156
Plastic distribution boards and accessories
Insulanting plastic back plate EC

Type
Dimensions
Packing /
Box
Catalogue number
IBP 5001
207x239
PBTD/PBBD 5001
53501IBP
IBP5002
264x364
PBTD/PBBD 5002
53502IBP
IBP5003
372x439
PBTD/PBBD 5003
53503IBP
IBP 5004
372x589
PBTD/PBBD 5004
53504IBP
IBP 5005
482x589
PBTD/PBBD 5005
53505IBP
IBP 5006
556x739
PBTD/PBBD 5006
53506IBP
*Detailed installation instructions and information about the functions and applications of all additional accessories for polyester boxes, you can find on: www.elmarkholding.eu
DISTRIBUTION BOXES
Accessories for plastic distribution boards
Pair of uprights for rail DIN and panels EC
Type
Packing /
Box
Catalogue number
DP 5002
PBTD/PBBD 5002
1 pair
53502DP
DP 5003
PBTD/PBBD 5003
1 pair
53503DP
DP 5004
PBTD/PBBD 5004/5005
1 pair
53504DP
DP 5006
PBTD/PBBD 5006
1 pair
53506DP
DIN rail with support EC

Type
Module capacity
Packing /
Box
Catalogue number
DS 5002
12
PBTD/PBBD 5002
53502DS
DS 5003
18
PBTD/PBBD 5003/5004
53503DS
DS 5004
24
PBTD/PBBD 5005
53504DS
DS 5005
28
PBTD/PBBD 5006
53505DS
Type
Module capacity
Packing /
Box
Catalogue number
CMW 5002
12
PBTD/PBBD 5002
53502CMW
CMW 5003
18
PBTD/PBBD 5003/5004
53503CMW
CMW 5004
24
PBTD/PBBD 5005
53504CMW
CMW 5005
28
PBTD/PBBD 5006
53505CMW
Blank cover module EC

Heigth of
single/double
cover (mm)
Packing
/Box
Catalogue
number
single cover
Catalogue
number
double cover
125/250
PBTD/PBBD 5002
53502S
53502D
150/300
PBTD/PBBD 5003/5004
53503S
53503D
150/300
PBTD/PBBD 5005
53505S
53505D
150/300
PBTD/PBBD 5006
53506S
53506D
Blank cover
module
Deep adjusment back plate kit EC

Type
Deep adjusment
back plate kit
157
Need kits
Packing /Box
Catalogue number
PBTD/PBBD 5002/5003
2kit
1 kit (2 pcs)
53507
PBTD/PBBD 5004/5005
3kit
1 kit (2 pcs)
57508
PBTD/PBBD 5006
4kit
1 kit (2 pcs)
53509
Spare brass and brackets for fixing- galvanized EC

Type
Packing /Box
Catalogue number
Galvanized brackets
All type
1 kit (4 pcs)
53510
Spare brass insert kit
All type
1 kit (10 pcs)
53512
Type
Packing /Box
Catalogue number
Safety lock
All type
53511
Safety lock EC
Note: Lock supplied with two unified keys. The keys are inified and open all the locks
Accessories for plastic distribution boards
Type
DISTRIBUTION BOXES
Cover module with window EC
CABLE TERMINALS
CABLE
TERMINALS
Connection tubes | 160

Isolated cable terminals | 163
CABLE TERMINALS
Cable terminals without isolation
Connection tubes - GTY type
YEAR
WARRANTY
Copper pipes with galvanic tin coating, used for joining of copper rigid or multicore conductors with different
sections. The assembling is made by mechanical pressing with crimping tool.
Technical data:
Material: copper alloy
Coating: tin
Application: general
Type
Standard: EN 61 238-1
Inner
diameter
d (mm)
Cable
(mm2)
Packing / Box (pcs)
CABLE TERMINALS
Catalogue
number
GTY-4
20
1000 / 16000
59213
GTY-6
25
5.3
3.7
500 / 1500 / 12000
59201
GTY-10
30
6.3
4.5
10
500 / 1500 / 12000
59202
GTY-16
35
7.5
5.7
16
100 / 200 / 4800
59203
GTY-25
40
7.2
25
100 / 500 / 2000
59204
GTY-35
45
10.8
8.5
35
100 / 200 / 1600
59205
GTY-50
50
12.5
9.8
50
20 / 200 / 1600
59206
GTY-70
55
14.5
11.5
70
10 / 100 / 800
59207
GTY-95
60
17
13.7
95
10 / 80 / 640
59208
GTY-120
65
19
15
120
10 / 60 / 480
59209
GTY-150
70
21
16.7
150
10 / 50 / 400
59210
GTY-185
75
23
18.5
185
10 / 40 / 320
59211
GTY-240
80
26
21
240
10 / 30 / 240
59212
Bimetallic connection tube - GTL type
YEAR
WARRANTY
Pipes made of two metals copper and aluminum without galvanic coating. They are designed for joining
copper and aluminum conductors rigid or multicore conductors with different section. The connection is
accomplished through crimping pliers, through mechanical pressing of the butt terminals and the conductor.
They are used for protection against electrochemical corrosion got at two metals contact with different chemical properties and conductivity at electrical current feed. They are manufactured under modern technology and
have high quality and long exploitation period.
Technical data:
Material: copper aluminum alloy
Coating: none
Application: general for joining of two types of conductors
160
Outer
diameter
D (mm)
Length
L (mm)
Type
d1
D1
d2
D2
l1
l2
Packing / Box (pcs)
Catalogue
number
GTL - 16
10
30
30
75
20 / 200 / 1200
59214
GTL - 25
10
12
30
33
82
20 / 400 / 1500
59215
GTL - 35
11
8.5
14
30
40
90
20 / 300 / 1000
59216
GTL - 50
8.5
13
9.8
16
32
42
95
20 / 800
59217
GTL - 70
9.5
15
11.5
18
38
50
105
10 / 600
59218
GTL - 95
11.5
17
13.5
21
40
50
110
10 / 500
59219
GTL - 120
13.5
19
15
23
42
55
112
10 / 400
59220
GTL - 150
15
21
17
25
44
55
118
10 / 350
59221
GTL - 185
17
23
18.5
27
46
60
125
10 / 300
59222
GTL - 240
19
26
21
30
54
60
130
10 / 200
59223
CABLE TERMINALS
Connection tubes
Cable terminals without isolation - JM type
YEAR
WARRANTY
They are used for joining copper conductors - multicore conductors with different section to electrical devices
or connections to combine all cores of the conductor, to provide safe connection at tightening in terminals
and safe connection at the base of the terminal. Thus the connection stability against vibrations is increased
and the possibility for short circuit is decreased. They are made of copper alloy with galvanic tin coating. The
connection is realized through crimping pliers, through mechanic pressing of the terminal and conductor.
Two types are offered with standard length SC and extended base JM. They are manufactured under modern
technology and have high quality and long exploitation period.
Technical data:
Coating: tin
Application: general for joining conductors to electrical devices.
d1 (mm)
D (mm)
d2 (mm)
L (mm)
Packing / Box (pcs)
Catalogue
number
JM - 2.5/6
2.2
4.5
24
1000 / 3000 / 24000
59240
JM - 4/6
3.0
4.8
24
1000 / 2000 / 16000
59241
JM - 6/6
3.8
5.5
24
500 / 2000 / 16000
59035
JM - 6/8
3.8
5.5
24
500 / 2000 / 16000
59059
J - 10/6
4.8
6.8
25.5
100 / 1500 / 12000
59036
JM - 10/8
4.8
6.8
25.5
500 / 1500 / 12000
59037
JM - 16/6
5.5
7.5
30.5
400 / 800 / 6400
59038
JM - 16/8
5.5
7.5
30.5
400 / 800 / 6400
59039
JM - 16/10
5.5
7.5
10
30.5
400 / 800 / 6400
59040
JM - 25/8
34
100 / 500 / 4000
59041
JM - 25/10
10
34
250 / 500 / 4000
59042
JM - 35/8
8.2
10.5
38
200 / 400 / 3200
59043
JM - 35/10
8.2
10.5
10
38
200 / 400 / 3200
59044
JM - 35/12
8.2
10.5
12
38
200 / 400 / 3200
59045
JM - 50/8
9.8
12.5
45
100 / 200 / 1600
59046
JM - 50/10
9.8
12.5
10
45
100 / 100 / 1600
59047
JM - 50/12
9.8
12.5
12
45
100 / 200 / 1600
59048
JM - 70/10
11.5
14.5
10
50
80 / 100 / 1280
59049
JM - 70/12
11.5
14.5
12
50
80 / 100 / 1280
59050
JM - 95/10
13.8
17.5
10
55.5
50 / 200 / 800
59051
JM - 95/12
13.8
17.5
12
55.5
50 / 200 / 800
59052
JM - 120/10
15.5
19.5
10
63
30 / 60 / 480
59053
JM - 120/12
15.5
19.5
12
63
30 / 60 / 480
59054
JM - 150/12
16.5
21
12
71
10 / 50 / 400
59055
JM - 185/12
18.8
23.5
12
78
10 / 40 / 320
59056
JM - 185/16
18.8
23.5
16
78
10 / 40 / 320
59057
JM - 240/16
21.3
26.5
16
92
10 / 30 / 240
59058
161
Connection tubes
Type
CABLE TERMINALS
CABLE TERMINALS
Bimetalic non-isolated cable terminals for
crimping DTL
YEAR
WARRANTY
They are used for joining aluminum conductors - multicore conductors with different section to electrical
devices or connections to combine all cores of the conductor, to provide safe connection at tightening in
terminals and safe connection at the base of the terminal. Thus the connection stability against vibrations is
increased and the possibility for short circuit is decreased. They are made of copper and aluminum alloys as in
the aluminum billet is made under special technology the copper terminal formed like an ear. The connection is realized through crimping pliers, through mechanic pressing of the terminal and conductor. They are
manufactured under modern technology and have high quality and long exploitation period.
Technical data:
Material: copper aluminum
Application: general for joining conductors to electrical devices.
CABLE TERMINALS
162
Type
d1
(mm)
D
(mm)
d2
(mm)
L
(mm)
l
(mm)
B
(mm)
Packing / Box (pcs)
Catalogue
number
DTL - 1 - 16
11
70
30
16
20 / 200 / 1440
59224
DTL - 1 - 25
12
75
34
18
20 / 180 / 1080
59225
DTL - 1 - 35
8.5
14
10
85
38
20.5
20 / 100 / 600
59226
DTL - 1 - 50
9.8
16
10
90
40
23
20 / 70 / 420
59227
DTL - 1 - 70
11.5
18
12
102
48
26
10 / 60 / 360
59228
DTL - 1 - 95
13.5
21
12
112
50
28
10 / 40 / 180
59229
DTL - 1 - 120
15
23
14
120
53
30
10 / 30 / 120
59230
DTL - 1 - 150
16.5
25
14
126
56
34
5 / 25 / 120
59231
DTL - 1 - 185
18.5
27
16
133
58
37
5 / 20 / 120
59232
DTL - 1 - 240
21
30
16
140
60
40
4 / 12 / 72
59233
Copper cable wire fork terminal connector
YEAR
WARRANTY
Type
Length
(mm)
Colour
Conductor
(mm2)
Packing (pcs.)
Packing / Box
(pcs.)
Catalogue number
SVS1.25-4
21.2
Red
0.5-1.5
100
10 / 240
59080
SVS1.25-5
21.2
Red
0.5-1.5
100
15 / 180
59081
SVS1.25-6
21.2
Red
0.5-1.5
100
15 / 180
59082
SVS 2-4
21.0
Blue
1.5-2.5
100
15 / 180
59083
SVS 2-5
22.5
Blue
1.5-2.5
100
15 / 180
59084
SVS 2-6
27,6
Blue
1.5-2.5
100
10 / 120
59085
SVS 5,5-4
24.5
Yellow
4-6
100
5 / 60
59086
SVS 5,5-5
27,9
Yellow
4-6
100
5 / 60
59087
SVS 5,5-6
27,9
Yellow
4-6
100
5 / 60
59088
CABLE TERMINALS
Isolated cable terminals
Isolated cable joints
YEAR
WARRANTY
Metal pipes with outside PVC insulation. They are used for joining/extending multicore conductors with section up to 6mm2. It increases the connection stability against vibrations and decreases the possibility for short
circuit. The connection is realized through crimping pliers, through mechanic pressing of the terminal and
conductor. The different insulation colour corresponds to different conductor sections.
Technical data:
Coating: polyvinylchloride
Application: general for joining of copper conductors
Type
Length
(mm)
Colour
Conductor
(mm2)
Packing (pcs.)
Packing / Box
(pcs.)
Catalogue number
PVT 1.25
16
red
100
10 / 120
59015
BV 1.25
25
red
100
10 / 120
59001
PVT 2
16
blue
1.5-2.5
100
10 / 120
59034
BV 2
25
blue
1.5-2.5
100
10 / 60
59002
PVT 5.5
20
yellow
4-6
100
5 / 60
59014
BV 5.5
25
yellow
4-6
100
5 / 60
59003
YEAR
WARRANTY
They represent a cable terminal made of brass alloy with galvanic tin coating and insulated with polyvinylchloride. They are used as non-insulated terminals, as the insulated part protects the cores from bending and
breaking in the joining point and at the same time it protects the staff from direct contact to the current - carrying parts. They are used for conductors with section up to 6 mm. The connection is realized through crimping pliers, through mechanic pressing of the terminal and cable. The different insulation colour corresponds
to different conductor sections. They are manufactured under modern technology and have high quality and
long exploitation period.
All insulated cable terminals are being offered in 100 pcs. packing
Technical data:
Coating: polyvinylchloride
Application: general for joining copper conductors
CABLE TERMINALS
Isolated cable terminals - MDD/FDD types
163
Type
Shape
Colour
Conductor
(mm2)
Shoe
width
Packing
(pcs.)
Packing / Box
(pcs.)
Catalogue
number
MDD 1.25 - 187
male
red
187
100
10 / 240
59012
MDD 1.25 - 250
male
red
250
100
10 / 240
59009
MDD 2 - 187
male
blue
1.5-2.5
187
100
10 / 240
59013
MDD 2 - 250
male
blue
1.5-2.5
250
100
10 / 180
59011
MDD 5.5 - 250
male
yellow
4-6
250
100
10 / 120
59010
FDD 1.25 - 187
female
red
187
100
20 / 240
59008
FDD 1.25 - 187
female
red
250
100
15 / 180
59006
FDD 2 - 187
female
blue
1.5-2.5
187
100
20 / 240
59007
FDD 2 - 250
female
blue
1.5-2.5
250
100
10 / 180
59004
FDD 5.5 - 250
female
yellow
4-6
250
100
10 / 120
59005
CABLE TERMINALS
Isolated cable terminals - E type

Terminal
Conductor
length (mm)
(mm2)
Packing
(pcs.)
Packing / Box
(pcs.)
Catalogue number
0.5
100
50 / 600
59023
0.75
100
50 / 600
59024
red
1.0
100
50 / 600
59025
1510
black
10
1.5
100
30 / 360
59026
2512
grey
12
2.5
100
30 / 300
59027
4012
orange
12
4.0
100
20 / 240
59028
6018
green
18
6.0
100
5 / 120
59029
10-18
dark green
18
10
100
8 / 96
59030
16-18
milky yellow
18
16
100
6 / 60
59031
25-16
black
16
25
100
5 / 36
59032
35-25
grey-yellow
25
35
100
2 / 24
59033
Type
Colour
0508
white
7508
blue
1008
Isolated cable terminals - PTV type
CABLE TERMINALS
YEAR
WARRANTY
YEAR
WARRANTY
Type
Shape
Colour
Conductor
(mm2)
Shoe
width
Packing
(pcs.)
Packing / Box
(pcs.)
Catalogue
number
PTV 1.25 - 10
male
red
0.25-1.5
1.9
100
20 / 240
59101
PTV 1.25 - 12
male
red
0.25-1.5
1.9
100
20 / 240
59102
PTV 2 - 10
male
blue
1.5-2.5
1.9
100
20 / 240
59103
PTV 2 - 12
male
blue
1.5-2.5
1.9
100
15 / 180
59104
PTV 5.5 - 13
male
yellow
4-6
2.9
100
8 / 96
59105
164
Isolated cable terminals - RVL type
YEAR
WARRANTY
Type
Size of the
opening (mm)
Colour
RVL 1.25-4
red
100
20 / 240
59021
RVL 1.25-5
red
100
15 / 180
59022
RVL 2-4
blue
1.5-2.5
100
15 / 180
59018
RVL 2-5
blue
1.5-2.5
100
10 / 120
59019
RVL 5.5-4
yellow
4-6
100
8 / 96
59020
RV 5.5-5
yellow
4-6
100
8 / 96
59016
RV 5.5-6
yellow
4-6
100
8 / 96
59017
Conductor
Packing / Box
Packing (pcs.)
Catalogue number
(mm2)
(pcs.)
CABLE TERMINALS
YEAR
WARRANTY
Type
Shape
Colour
Conductor
(mm2)
Shoe
width
Packing
(pcs.)
Packing / Box
(pcs.)
Catalogue
number
PBDD 1.25 - 250
male
red
0.25-1.5
6.3
100
5 / 60
59106
PBDD 2 - 250
male
blue
1.5-2.5
6.3
100
5 / 60
59107
PBDD 5.5 - 250
male
yellow
4-6
6.3
100
5 / 60
59108
YEAR
WARRANTY
Type
Shape
Colour
Conductor
(mm2)
Shoe
width
Packing
(pcs.)
Packing / Box
(pcs.)
Catalogue
number
MPD 1.25 - 156
male
red
0.25-1.5
6.3
100
10 / 240
59109
MPD 2 - 195
male
blue
1.5-2.5
6.3
100
10 / 120
59110
MPD 5.5 - 195
male
yellow
4-6
6.3
100
10 / 120
59111
Isolated cable terminals - MDFN type
YEAR
WARRANTY
Type
Shape
Colour
Conductor
(mm2)
Shoe
width
Packing
(pcs.)
Packing / Box
(pcs.)
Catalogue
number
MDFN 1.25 - 250
male
red
0.25-1.5
100
5 / 60
59112
MDFN 2 - 250
male
blue
1.5-2.5
100
5 / 60
59113
MDFN 5 - 250
male
yellow
4-6
100
4 / 48
59114
Isolated cable terminals - FDFNY type
YEAR
WARRANTY
Type
Length
(mm)
Conductor
(mm2)
Colour
Packing (pcs.)
FDFNY
250
1,25
red
100
10 / 60
59242
FDFNY
250
blue
100
10 / 60
59243
FDFNY
250
5,5
yellow
100
10 / 60
59244
Packing / Box
Catalogue number
(pcs.)
Isolated cable terminals - CHS type
YEAR
WARRANTY
Type
Length (mm)
Conductor (mm2)
Packing / Box
(pcs.)
Packing / Box
(pcs.)
Catalogue
number
CHS3
18.1
0.25-1.5
100
250
59115
CHS4
20.1
1.5-2.5
100
200
59116
CHS5
25.5
4-6
100
200
59117
CHS6
27.3
100
100
59118
CABLE TERMINALS
Isolated cable terminals - MPD type
165
Isolated cable terminals - PBDD type
CABLE INSTALATION
SYSTEM
CABLE
INSTALATION
Plastic cable trunking | 168

Plastic cable trunking accessories | 169
Cable support systems | 172
Distribution boxes | 180
Waterproof junction boxes | 182
CABLE INSTALLATION SYSTEMS

Plastic cable trunking
Plastic cable trunking CT2
YEAR
WARRANTY
Cable trunkings are practical solution of organizing power and communication cables in office and residential
buildings. They increase the reliability in operation of the electrical systems and allow quick adaptation if necessary to rearrange the interior. Fast and simple installation. In combination with a wide range of accessories,
building irregularities are quickly overcome. Non- flammable material, easy to cut and paint.
168
Type
Size(mm)
Length
Colour
Packing
(pcs)
Catalogue
number
PLASTIC CABLE TRUNKING CT2
12x12
2m
white
100
5621212
15X10
2m
white
100
5621510
16X16
2m
white
100
5621616
25X16
2m
white
80
5622516
25X25
2m
white
50
5622525
40X16
2m
white
50
5624016
40X25
2m
white
50
5624025
40X40
2m
white
40
5624040
60X40
2m
white
30
5626040
60X60
2m
white
32
5626060
80X40
2m
white
18
5628040
80X60
2m
white
24
5628060
100X40
2m
white
16
56210040
100X60
2m
white
16
56210060
Switches and sockets frames for cable trunking
YEAR
WARRANTY
Cable trunking frames are decorative solution for installation of switches and sockets on places where their
normal mounting is not possible. The assembly set includes subframe and main white frame. Universal sizes,
suitable for mounting of switches and sockets from different manufacturers. Single, double and triple frames
are offered.
Type
Used for cable trunking
Colour
Packing
(pcs)
Catalogue
number
SINGLE FRAME
100X40/100X60
White
20
562100441
DOUBLE FRAME
100X40/100X60
White
14
562100442
TRIPLE FRAME
100X40/100X60
White
562100443

Plastic cable trunking accessories
Type
Colour
Packing
(pcs)
Catalogue
number
Outside corner
12x12
white
50
56212121
Outside corner
15X10
white
50
56215101
Outside corner
16X16
white
50
56216161
Outside corner
25X16
white
30
56225161
Outside corner
25X25
white
30
56225251
Outside corner
40X16
white
30
56240161
Outside corner
40X25
white
30
56240251
Outside corner
40X40
white
30
56240401
Outside corner
60X40
white
10
56260401
Outside corner
60X60
white
10
56260601
Outside corner
80X40
white
56280401
Outside corner
80X60
white
56280601
Outside corner
100X40
white
562100401
Outside corner
100X60
white
562100601
Inside corner
YEAR
WARRANTY
Type
Colour
Packing
(pcs)
Catalogue
number
Inside corner
12x12
white
50
56212122
Inside corner
15X10
white
50
56215102
Inside corner
16X16
white
50
56216162
Inside corner
25X16
white
30
56225162
Inside corner
25X25
white
30
56225252
Inside corner
40X16
white
30
56240162
Inside corner
40X25
white
30
56240252
Inside corner
40X40
white
30
56240402
Inside corner
60X40
white
10
56260402
Inside corner
60X60
white
10
56260602
Inside corner
80X40
white
56280402
Inside corner
80X60
white
56280602
Inside corner
100X40
white
562100402
Inside corner
100X60
white
562100602
YEAR
WARRANTY
169
Outside corner

T- corner
170
YEAR
WARRANTY
Type
Colour
Packing
(pcs)
Catalogue
number
T- corner
12x12
white
50
56212123
T- corner
15X10
white
50
56215103
T- corner
16X16
white
50
56216163
T- corner
25X16
white
20
56225163
T- corner
25X25
white
20
56225253
T- corner
40X16
white
30
56240163
T- corner
40X25
white
30
56240253
T- corner
40X40
white
30
56240403
T- corner
60X40
white
16
56260403
T- corner
60X60
white
16
56260603
T- corner
80X40
white
56280403
T- corner
80X60
white
56280603
T- corner
100X40
white
562100403
T- corner
100X60
white
562100603
L- corner
YEAR
WARRANTY
Type
Colour
Packing
(pcs)
Catalogue
number
L- corner
12x12
white
50
56212124
L- corner
15X10
white
50
56215104
L- corner
16X16
white
50
56216164
L- corner
25X16
white
30
56225164
L- corner
25X25
white
30
56225254
L- corner
40X16
white
30
56240164
L- corner
40X25
white
30
56240254
L- corner
40X40
white
30
56240404
L- corner
60X40
white
16
56260404
L- corner
60X60
white
16
56260604
L- corner
80X40
white
12
56280404
L- corner
80X60
white
12
56280604
L- corner
100X40
white
562100404
L- corner
100X60
white
562100604

Type
Colour
Packing
(pcs)
Catalogue
number
Connector
12x12
white
50
56212125
Connector
15X10
white
50
56215105
Connector
16X16
white
50
56216165
Connector
25X16
white
30
56225165
Connector
25X25
white
30
56225255
Connector
40X16
white
30
56240165
Connector
40X25
white
30
56240255
Connector
40X40
white
30
56240405
Connector
60X40
white
25
56260405
Connector
60X60
white
25
56260605
Connector
80X40
white
50
56280405
Connector
80X60
white
50
56280605
Connector
100X40
white
50
562100405
Connector
100X60
white
30
562100605
End cap
YEAR
WARRANTY
Type
Colour
Packing
(pcs)
Catalogue
number
End cap
12x12
white
50
56212126
End cap
15X10
white
50
56215106
End cap
16X16
white
50
56216166
End cap
25X16
white
50
56225166
End cap
25X25
white
50
56225256
End cap
40X16
white
30
56240166
End cap
40X25
white
30
56240256
End cap
40X40
white
30
56240406
End cap
60X40
white
50
56260406
End cap
60X60
white
50
56260606
End cap
80X40
white
60
56280406
End cap
80X60
white
60
56280606
End cap
100X40
white
50
562100406
End cap
100X60
white
50
562100606
Separator
YEAR
WARRANTY
Type
Length
(m)
Colour
Packing
(pcs)
Catalogue
number
SEPARATOR 40
60x40, 80x40, 100x40
white
40
56261111
SEPARATOR 60
60x40, 80x40, 100x40
white
40
56261112
YEAR
WARRANTY
171
Connector

Plastic cable trunking self-adhesive

Type

self-adhesive
Size(mm)
Length
Colour
Packing
m/pcs
Catalogue
number
12x12
2m
white
250/125
5621212A
15x10
2m
white
250/125
5621510A
1616
2m
white
250/125
5621616A
25x16
2m
white
100/50
5622516A
2525
2m
white
100/50
5622525A
40x16
2m
white
50/25
5624016A
40x25
2m
white
80/40
5624025A
40x40
2m
white
80/40
5624040A
Plastic cable trunking - Dark Walnut
Type

dark walnut
Type

light beech
YEAR
WARRANTY
Size(mm)
Length
Colour
Packing
m/pcs
Catalogue
number
12x12
2m
dark walnut
250/125
5621212DW
15x10
2m
dark walnut
250/125
5621510DW
16x16
2m
dark walnut
250/125
5621616DW
25x16
2m
dark walnut
150/75
5622516DW
25x25
2m
dark walnut
100/50
5622525DW
40x25
2m
dark walnut
80/40
5624025DW
Plastic cable trunking - Light Beech

172
YEAR
WARRANTY
YEAR
WARRANTY
Size(mm)
Length
Colour
Packing
m/pcs
Catalogue
number
12x12
2m
light beech
250/125
5621212LB
15x10
2m
light beech
250/125
5621510LB
16x16
2m
light beech
250/125
5621616LB
25x16
2m
light beech
150/75
5622516LB
25x25
2m
light beech
100/50
5622525LB
40x25
2m
light beech
80/40
5624025LB


pear
Size(mm)
Length
Colour
Packing
m/pcs
Catalogue
number
12x12
2m
pear
250/125
5621212P
15x10
2m
pear
250/125
5621510P
16x16
2m
pear
250/125
5621616P
25x16
2m
pear
150/75
5622516P
25x25
2m
pear
100/50
5622525P
40x25
2m
pear
80/40
5624025P
Floor type plastic cable trunking CT2

Type
Floor type plastic cable

trunking CT2
Size(mm)
Length
Colour
Packing
(pcs)
Catalogue
number
50x12
2m
grey
60
5625012F
75x20
2m
grey
40
5627520F
90x20
2m
grey
20
5629020F
Slotted plastic cable trunking CT2

Type
Slotted plastic cable

trunking CT2
YEAR
WARRANTY
YEAR
WARRANTY
Size(mm)
Length
Colour
Packing
(pcs)
Catalogue
number
25x25
2m
grey
196
5622525S
25x40
2m
grey
64
5622540S
40x40
2m
grey
64
5624040S
40x60
2m
grey
60
5624060S
60x40
2m
grey
60
5626040S
60x60
2m
grey
48
5626060S
80x40
2m
grey
40
5628040S
80x60
2m
grey
40
5628060S
100x40
2m
grey
32
56210040S
100x60
2m
grey
32
56210060S
Type
YEAR
WARRANTY
173
Plastic cable trunking - Pear

Cable support systems
Self-extinguishing pliable conduits with draw tape EC
YEAR
WARRANTY
Technical data:
Material- technopolymer on PVC base, Self extinguishing V0 degree to UL94
Compresion resistance- 320N
Standard- EN 61386-1; EN61386-22
RAL- 7035
Type
Inner Diameter
(mm)
Outer Diameter
(mm)
Packing (m)
Catalogue number
10,7
16
100
500N16
14,1
20
100
500N20
18,2
25
50
500N25
Self-extinguishing pliable
conduits with draw tape
24,3
32
25
500N32
32,3
40
25
500N40
Spiral flexible PVC conduits- UV rays resistant EC
YEAR
WARRANTY
Technical data:
Material (spiral+cover)- shock resistance technopolymer on PVC base
Self extinguishing V0 degree to UL94
Instalation temperature: -15/+70
Operating temperature: -5/+65
Type: UV rays resistance
Type
UV flexible pvc conduit
Inner Diameter
(mm)
Outer Diameter
(mm)
Packing (m)
Catalogue number
12
16,2
30
500UV12
16
20,2
30
500UV16
20
24,2
30
500UV20
25
29,6
30
500UV25
32
37,2
30
500UV32
174
Nylon cable draw tape EC

Type
Nylon cable draw tape
Diameter
(mm)
Lenght (m)
Colour
Packing (pcs)
YEAR
WARRANTY
Catalogue
number
Transparent
1/340
500305
15
Transparent
1/120
500315

PVC insulated steel spirals
YEAR
WARRANTY
Technical data:
Material - Galvanized steel, helically wound, flexible steel conduit with PVC coating
PVC-resistance against corrosion
Colour- black
Operating temperature: -5/+65
Outer Diameter
(mm)
Packing (m)
Catalogue number
11
15,2
50
500P11
14
18,4
50
500P14
16
20,4
50
500P16
18
22,4
50
500P18
26
30,4
25
500P26
37
42,4
25
500P37
PVC self-extiguishing rigid insulating conduit EC
YEAR
WARRANTY
Rigid insulating conduit are practical solution of organizing power and communication cables in office and residential buildings. They increase the reliability in operation of the electrical systems. Fast
and simple installation. In combination with a wide range of accessories, building irregularities are
quickly overcome. Non- flammable material, easy to cut and paint.
Technical data:
Material - shock resistance technopolymer on rigid PVC base
Self extinguishing V0 degree to UL94
Standard- EN 61386-1; EN 61386-21
Type
Plastic cable
conduit, with
sleeve
External
diameter
(mm)
Length (m)
Colour
IP code
Packing
(pcs)
Catalogue
number
16
GREY
40
34
50016
20
GREY
40
34
50020
25
GREY
40
20
50025
32
GREY
40
10
50032
40
GREY
40
10
50040
PVC insulated steel spirals
Inner Diameter
(mm)
175
Type

Accessories for PVC self-extiguishing rigid insulating
conduits and flexible spiral conduits, IP 65 EC
YEAR
WARRANTY
Technical data:
Material- shock resistant technopolymer on PVC base
Self-extinguishing V0 degree to UL94
Glow wire test: up to 960C
O-ring to compensate the conduit tolerances
Standard- EN 61386-1; EN61386-21
RAL- 7035
Type
PVC bend flexible
Type
176
PVC bend 90
Type
Conduit-conduit PVC joint
Type
Conduit-box PVC joint
Used for cable

conduit (mm)
IP code
Colour
Packing/Box
(pcs)
Catalogue
number
16
65
GREY
50/200
500FB16
20
65
GREY
50/200
500FB20
25
65
GREY
35/140
500FB25
32
65
GREY
20/80
500FB32
Used for cable

conduit (mm)
IP code
Colour
Packing/Box
(pcs)
Catalogue
number
16
65
GREY
100/1000
500BB16
20
65
GREY
50/600
500BB20
25
65
GREY
25/300
500BB25
32
65
GREY
100
500BB32
40
65
GREY
100
500BB40
Used for cable

conduit (mm)
IP code
Colour
Packing/Box
(pcs)
Catalogue
number
16
65
GREY
10/350
500CM16
20
65
GREY
10/350
500CM20
25
65
GREY
10/200
500CM25
32
65
GREY
10/100
500CM32
40
65
GREY
5/80
500CM40
Used for cable

conduit (mm)
IP code
Colour
Packing/Box
(pcs)
Catalogue
number
16
65
GREY
10/350
500CB16
20
65
GREY
10/350
500CB20
25
65
GREY
10/200
500CB25
32
65
GREY
10/100
500CB32
40
65
GREY
5/80
500CB40

Type
PVC rigid conduit - flexible

spiral conduits joint
Conduit
diameter
(mm)
Flexible
spiral
diameter
(mm)
IP
code
Colour
Packing/
Box (pcs)
Catalogue
number
16
12
65
GREY
10/350
500DD16
20
16
65
GREY
10/350
500DD20
25
20
65
GREY
10/200
500DD25
32
25
65
GREY
10/100
500DD32
40
32
65
GREY
5/100
500DD40
Accessories for PVC self-extiguishing rigid insulating

conduits and flexible spiral conduits, IP 40 EC
YEAR
WARRANTY
PVC bend flexible
Type
PVC bend 90
Type
Plastic bend small 90
Type
PVC T-joint
Used for cable

conduit (mm)
IP code
Colour
Packing/Box
(pcs)
Catalogue
number
16
44
GREY
50/200
500FK16
20
44
GREY
50/200
500FK20
25
44
GREY
35/140
500FK25
32
44
GREY
20/80
500FK32
Used for cable

conduit (mm)
IP code
Colour
Packing/Box
(pcs)
Catalogue
number
16
40
GREY
100/1000
500BK16
20
40
GREY
50/600
500BK20
25
40
GREY
25/300
500BK25
32
40
GREY
100
500BK32
40
40
GREY
100
500BK40
Used for cable

conduit (mm)
IP code
Colour
Packing/Box
(pcs)
Catalogue
number
16
40
GREY
100/400
500SK16
20
40
GREY
100/300
500SK20
25
40
GREY
100/200
500SK25
32
40
GREY
50/150
500SK32
Used for cable

conduit (mm)
IP code
Colour
Packing/Box
(pcs)
Catalogue
number
16
40
GREY
100/300
500T16
20
40
GREY
100/200
500T20
25
40
GREY
50/100
500T25
32
40
GREY
50/100
500T32
177
Type
Technical data:
Material- shock resistant technopolymer on PVC base
Self-extinguishing V0 degree to UL94
Glow wire test: up to 960C
Standard- EN 61386-1; EN61386-21
RAL- 7035

Type
Used for cable

conduit (mm)
IP code
Colour
Packing/Box
(pcs)
Catalogue
number
16
40
GREY
100/1200
500C16
20
40
GREY
100/800
500C20
25
40
GREY
50/500
500C25
PVC coupling
Type
32
40
GREY
25/250
500C32
40
40
GREY
25/150
500C40
Used for cable conduit

(mm)
Colour
Packing/Box
(pcs)
Catalogue
number
16
GREY
100/1500
500CC16
20
GREY
100/1000
500CC20
25
GREY
100/1000
500CC25
32
GREY
100/800
500CC32
40
GREY
50/400
500CC40

(mm)
Colour
Packing/Box
(pcs)
Catalogue
number
PVC conduit clips
Type
16
GREY
100/1000
500CS16
20
GREY
100/1000
500CS20
25
GREY
100/800
500CS25
32
GREY
50/400
500CS32

(mm)
Colour
Packing/Box
(pcs)
Catalogue
number
PVC conduit clips with

plug and steel screw
Type
16
GREY
100/1000
500C16
20
GREY
100/1000
500C20
25
GREY
100/800
500C25
32
GREY
50/500
500C32
Type
Length (mm)
Colour
Packing
Catalogue
number
PVC modular fixing guide for clips
200
GREY
400
500BC
PVC collar conduit clips
178
Cable trays and accessories
YEAR
WARRANTY
The universal cable support systems are used for construction of cable link in closed production
premises for direct mounting on even vertical surfaces. They are perforated metal grates and accessories with standard lengths and sizes. They allow quick construction of cable systems with many angles
and derivations.
Type
Size (mm)
Tickness
Length
(mm)
Catalogue
number
CT1 UT CABLE TRAY
40x50
0,8
2500
56050825U
CT1 UT CABLE TRAY
40x100
0,8
2500
56100825U
CT1 UT CABLE TRAY
40x150
0,8
2500
56150825U
CT1 UT CABLE TRAY
40x200
0,8
2500
56200825U
CT1 UT CABLE TRAY
40x300
0,8
2500
56300825U
CT1 UT CABLE TRAY
40x400
0,8
2500
56400825U

Type
Size (mm)
Tickness
Length
(mm)
Catalogue
number
CT1 UT CABLE TRAY
60x100
0,8
2500
56100826U
CT1 UT CABLE TRAY
60x200
0,8
2500
56200826U
CT1 UT CABLE TRAY
60x300
0,8
2500
56300826U
Type
Size (mm)
Tickness
Length
(mm)
Catalogue
number
CT1 CABLE TRAY COVER
10x50
0,8
2500
56050825C
10x100
0,8
2500
56100825C
10x150
0,8
2500
56150825C
10x200
0,8
2500
56200825C
10x300
0,8
2500
56300825C
mountaing scheme
Size (mm) Length (mm) Catalogue number
CT1 COUPLER FOR TRAYS WITH THE SAME SIZE
40
250
56250C
Type
Tickness
Length
(mm)
Catalogue
number
CT1 U-HANGING SUPPORT
1,5
100
56100HSW
1,5
150
56150HSW
1,5
200
56200HSW
1,5
300
56300HSW
1,5
400
56400HSW
Type
Tickness
Length
(mm)
Catalogue
number
CT1 HOLDER
1,5
100
56100HOL
CT1 HOLDER
1,5
150
56150HOL
CT1 HOLDER
1,5
200
56200HOL
CT1 HOLDER
1,5
300
56300HOL
mountaing scheme
mountaing scheme
Type
mountaing scheme
mountaing scheme
Type
Metric bolt
diameters
Length
(mm)
Catalogue
number
CT1 THREADED HANGING ROD
2000
56082
CT1 THREADED HANGING ROD
10
2000
56102
179

Distribution boxes
Universal console box for plasterboard

Type
d (mm)
Packing (pcs)
Catalogue number
Console box for plasterboard- 65
65
240
19273
Universal console box-flush mounting
180
YEAR
WARRANTY
Type
d (mm)
Packing (pcs)
Catalogue number
Console box- 65
65
300
1927302
Console box multi
YEAR
WARRANTY
Type
d (mm)
Packing (pcs)
Catalogue number
Console box multi- 65
65
250
1927301
Distribution boxes-square type

Type
Distribution boxes
YEAR
WARRANTY
Size
YEAR
WARRANTY
Packing (pcs)
Catalogue number
50
100
1927402
50
100
1927401
Distribution Box 80/80/50
80
80
100
100

Distribution boxes
YEAR
WARRANTY
Packing (pcs)
Catalogue number
45
100
1927405
45
100
1927404
80
80
100
100
Distribution boxes for plasterboard-round type
YEAR
WARRANTY
Type
d (mm)
Packing (pcs)
Catalogue number
Distribution Box 65
65
240
1927403
Distribution Box 70
70
200
1927407
Distribution Box 80
80
100
1927409
Distribution boxes - round type
YEAR
WARRANTY
Type
d (mm)
Packing (pcs)
Catalogue number
Distribution Box 70
70
300
1927406
Distribution Box 80
80
200
1927408
Size
Type
181
Distribution boxes
Distribution boxes for plasterboard-square type

Waterproof junction boxes
Waterproof junction boxes IP44
YEAR
WARRANTY
Plastic junction boxes with different shapes and dimensions. Designed for cable lines extension or
tapping at cable installations laying. Made of ABS material with openings for input - output conductors, with rubber gasket to provide the corresponding IP code. Resistant to chemical, thermal and UV
rays. Direct wall mounting with screws.
Standard: EN 60670-1
Technical data:
* Rated voltage: up to 1000V
* Material: ABS
* IP code: IP 44
182
Gasket dimensions (mm)
Box dimensions (mm)
Box type
IP code
Packing / Box
Catalogue
number
WB50/50
50
50
22.5
17
44
320
8070
WB80/50
80
50
22.5
17
44
240
8071
WB85/85/50
85
85
50
22.5
18.5
44
200
8072

Hole/pcs
IP code
Packing /
Box
Catalogue
number
27
65
100
8001
70
27
10
65
60
8002
150
70
27
65
60
8003
200
100
70
27
65
50
8004
WBG 200/155/80
200
155
80
35
10
65
30
8005
WBG 200/200/80
200
200
80
35
12
65
30
8006
WBG 255/200/80
255
200
80
35
12
65
30
8007
WBG 300/250/120
300
250
120
35
12
65
20
8008
WBG 400/350/120
400
350
120
35
16
65
8009
Box type
L
WBG 100/100/70
100
100
70
WBG 150/110/70
150
110
WBG 150/150/70
150
WBG 200/100/70
Waterproof junction boxes IP66 with transparent cover

Box dimensions (mm)
YEAR
WARRANTY
IP code
Packing / Box
Catalogue
number
55
66
200
8010
100
50
66
150
8011
80
110
70
66
100
8012
WBT 80/130/85
80
130
85
66
100
8013
WBT 80/180/70
80
180
70
66
86
8014
WBT 80/250/85
80
250
85
66
60
8015
WBT 125/125/75
125
125
75
66
48
8016
WBT 125/125/100
125
125
100
66
36
8022
WBT 125/175/100
125
175
100
66
40
8017
WBT 150/200/100
150
200
100
66
24
8018
WBT 150/250/130
150
250
130
66
18
8019
WBT 200/200/130
200
200
130
66
27
8020
WBT 280/190/130
280
190
130
66
18
8021
Box type
WBT 65/95/55
65
95
WBT 100/100/50
100
WBT 80/110/70
Box dimensions (mm)
YEAR
WARRANTY
183
Waterproof junction boxes IP65
ACCESSORIES
ACCESSORIES
Consummative | 186
Heat shrinkage tubes | 192
Terminal blocks | 193
ACCESSORIES
Consummative
Supply busbar
YEAR
WARRANTY
ACCESSORIES
Functions:
enables the supply of a group of conductors
provides simultaneous supply
conducting section electrotechnical copper
insulation of the conducting section
Technical data:
Rated operating voltage: 230/400V
Abnormal heating wear resistance and fire of the outer parts: 960/3sec.
Rated current (phase): 63/100A
Connecting:
to the joining terminal of the breaker
Consummative
186
Type
(copper busbar)
Length
(m)
Poles
(number)
In with one
point
of power
supply
In with two
points
of power
supply
Packing / Box
(pcs)
Catalogue
number
1P 63
54
63
90
20 / 100
14163
1P 100
54
100A
120A
20 / 100
14190
2P 63
28
63A
90A
10 / 50
14263
3P 63
18
63
90
6 / 30
14363
3P 100
18
100A
120A
5 / 50
14390
DP 1N
56
63A
90A
10 / 50
14463
C100 1P
125A
150A
20 / 100
14190T
C100 2P
125A
150A
10 / 50
14290T
C100 3P
125A
159A
5 / 20
14390T
U 1P 63
54
63A
90A
20 / 100
14163U
U 2P 63
28
63A
90A
10 / 50
14263U
U 3P 63
18
63A
90A
6 / 30
14363U
U 4P 63
13
63A
90A
5 / 20
14463U
Zero rails
YEAR
WARRANTY
They represent a brass rail with rectangular section with factory made openings for the conductors and bolts for
clamping of the conductor. They are offered in types with insulated and non-insulated rail. They are used in the
electrical distribution boxes for zeroing and earthing.
Technical data:
Material: brass for the current leading elements
Insulation material: plastic
Colour: gray/blue
Rail
type
Length
L (mm)
Height
H (mm)
Width
W (mm)
D (mm)
Bolt
BRASS
1000
7.8
M4
54
100
14002
ZERO
insulated
250
M4
16
200
14012
Number of Packing / Box Catalogue

terminals
(pcs)
number
ACCESSORIES
Consummative
Zero terminals
YEAR
WARRANTY
SP 031
L (mm)
H (mm)
W (mm)
Packing / Box (pcs)
Catalogue
number
SP 029-4
82.9
21.5
12
5x10
10 / 500
14204
SP 029-6
100.9
21.5
12
5x10
10 / 800
14206
SP 029-8
118.9
21.5
12
5x10
20 / 300
14208
SP 029-10
136.9
21.5
12
5x10
20 / 300
14210
SP 029-12
182.4
21.5
12
5x10
20 / 250
14212
SP 031-4
59.5
31.5
12.4
5x10
5 / 400
14304
SP 031-6
76.5
31.5
12.4
5x10
5 / 400
14306
SP 031-8
93
31.5
12.4
5x10
5 / 400
14308
SP 031-10
111
31.5
12.4
5x10
5 / 400
14310
SP 031-12
128
31.5
12.4
5x10
5 / 300
14312
Mounting (DIN) rail
YEAR
WARRANTY
YEAR
WARRANTY
Length
(m)
Packing / Box
(pcs)
Catalogue
number
1m
20 / 100
14001
ACCESSORIES
Functions:
serves for mounting breakers, residual current devices, contactors and other elements
provides a firm fixation of the elements
Technical data:
brass alloy with galvanic cover
factory drilled mounting openings
length up to 1m
Connecting:
with bolts or other fixing elements to the mounting surface
Insulating mounting terminal - TB25

Functions:
provides a firm joining of rigid or flexible conductors up to 35mm2 to power supply busbar
provides a firm joining of the power supply conductor to the breaker
provides enough contact surface of the conductor
Technical data:
Brass alloy with galvanic cover
Fabric isolated with plastic cover
Appropriate for joining to copper or aluminum cables
Rated voltage: 230V
Rated current: up to 63A
IP code: IP>20
Section of power supply conductor: up to 35mm2
Connecting:
to the joining terminal of the breaker
Type
Section of the conductor (mm2)
Rated current
In (A)
Packing / Box
(pcs)
Catalogue
number
TB 25
2.5 to 35
63
20 / 2000
31025
187
Consummative
SP 029
Rail type
ACCESSORIES
Consummative
Cable glands PG type
YEAR
WARRANTY
Plastic pipes supplied with the corresponding gaskets and nuts. Designed to provide necessary IP code on the
points where conductors pass through the walls of the electric distribution boxes. All cable gland elements are
made of high quality plastic (PE) and rubber.
Technical data:
Material: polyethylene (PE)
Colour: gray
IP code: IP 55
Standard: EN 60 423; 48580-81
ACCESSORIES
Type
Consummative
188
Overlapping
Packing / Box
T (mm) B (mm) d (mm) D (mm) L1 (mm) L2 (mm)
field
(pcs)
Catalogue
number
PG-7
3.5-6.8
16.3
18
12
6.6
10
22
100 / 4000
500070
PG-9
5-8
18.9
21.7
15.5
8.5
10
25
100 / 4000
500090
PG-11
6-10
21.7
23.5
18.5
10.4
8.5
29
100 / 3000
500110
PG-13.5
7-12
23.6
26.5
20
13
10
29
100 / 2000
500135
PG-16
8-14
26.5
29.3
21.5
14
29
100 / 2000
500160
PG-19
9-17
29
32
23
17
12
29
100 / 2000
500190
PG-21
10-18
32.3
35.6
28
19
12
35
100 / 1000
500210
PG-25
15-22
32.6
32.6
29.8
24
13
31
100 / 1000
500250
PG-29
16-24
41.1
45.4
36
26
12.5
40
50 / 500
500290
PG-36
18-28
52
58
46
31.5
12.5
45
50 / 350
500360
PG-42
26-36
57.4
61.9
51
37.6
17.5
47
20 / 200
500420
PG-48
32-39
65.2
70.7
58
43
21
50
20 / 200
500480
Support insulator for low voltage
YEAR
WARRANTY
Support insulators are used in control and distribution cabinets mounting when bars isolation is required.
Provides reliable insulation of live parts.
Rated voltage: 1000V
Insulating voltage: 5000 V
Ambient temperature : -40 to +65C
Dimmensions (mm)
Type
Impulse
voltage
kV
Strength
Fasting
strength
Bolt
SM 25
500
SM 30
550
SM 35
10
SM 40
Packing
(pcs.)
Catalogue
number
25
30
13
23
10 / 600
31725
30
32
10
27
10 / 500
31730
600
10
35
32
10
28
10 / 400
31735
12
650
12
40
40
10
33
10 / 240
31740
SM 51
15
1000
20
51
50
12
28
10 / 240
31751
SM 76
25
1500
40
10
76
45
16
34
10 / 120
31776
ACCESSORIES
Consummative
Cable fixing clips
YEAR
WARRANTY
Support insulators are used in control and distribution cabinets mounting when bars isolation is required.
Provides reliable insulation of live parts.
Rated voltage: 1000V
Insulating voltage: 5000 V
Ambient temperature : -40 to +65C
Type
Diameter (mm)
Packing (pcs)
Packing / Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
CHR-4
100
500
500004
CHR-5
100
500
500005
CHR-6
100
300
500006
CHR-7
100
300
500007
CHR-8
100
250
500008
CHR-9
100
200
500009
CHR-10
10
100
200
500010
CHR-12
12
100
100
500012
CHR-14
14
100
50
500014
CHR-16
16
100
50
500016
Cable tie mounts-adhesive

Dimmensions (mm)
colour
L
Packing (pcs.)
Catalogue number
-25
white
25
25
7,5
6,2
100
500041
-25
black
25
25
7,5
6,2
100
500042
-30
white
30
30
8,7
6,4
100
500043
-30
black
30
30
8,7
6,4
100
500039
ACCESSORIES
Type
YEAR
WARRANTY
PVC insulating tape
YEAR
WARRANTY
Colour
Thickness (mm)
Width
(mm)
Length
(m)
Packing / Box
(pcs)
Catalogue number
Black
0.15
19
18,28
10 / 200
51001
Red
0.15
19
18,28
10 / 200
51002
Yellow / Green
0.15
19
18,28
10 / 200
51004
White
0.15
19
18,28
10 / 200
51005
Blue
0.15
19
18,28
10 / 200
51006
Consummative
189
ACCESSORIES
Consummative
ACCESSORIES
Cable tags sets
Consummative
190
Number in a Packing / Box

roller
(pcs)
Catalogue
number
Type
Section (mm)
100
318000
EC-1-0
2.6 - 4.2
1000
150
318010
1000
100
318001
EC-1-1
2.6 - 4.2
1000
150
318011
1.5 - 3.2
1000
100
318002
EC-1-2
2.6 - 4.2
1000
150
318012
EC-0-3
1.5 - 3.2
1000
100
318003
EC-1-3
2.6 - 4.2
1000
150
318013
EC-0-4
1.5 - 3.2
1000
100
318004
EC-1-4
2.6 - 4.2
1000
150
318014
EC-0-5
1.5 - 3.2
1000
100
318005
EC-1-5
2.6 - 4.2
1000
150
318015
EC-0-6
1.5 - 3.2
1000
100
318006
EC-1-6
2.6 - 4.2
1000
150
318016
EC-0-7
1.5 - 3.2
1000
100
318007
EC-1-7
2.6 - 4.2
1000
150
318017
EC-0-8
1.5 - 3.2
1000
100
318008
EC-1-8
2.6 - 4.2
1000
150
318018
EC-0-9
1.5 - 3.2
1000
100
318009
EC-1-9
2.6 - 4.2
1000
150
318019
EC-0-a
1.5 - 3.2
1000
100
31800a
EC-1-a
2.6 - 4.2
1000
150
31801a
EC-0-b
1.5 - 3.2
1000
100
31800b
EC-1-b
2.6 - 4.2
1000
150
31801b
EC-0-R
1.5 - 3.2
1000
100
31800R
EC-1-R
2.6 - 4.2
1000
150
31801R
EC-0-S
1.5 - 3.2
1000
100
31800S
EC-1-S
2.6 - 4.2
1000
150
31801S
EC-0-T
1.5 - 3.2
1000
100
31800T
EC-1-T
2.6 - 4.2
1000
150
31801T
EC-0-N
1.5 - 3.2
1000
100
31800N
EC-1-N
2.6 - 4.2
1000
150
31801N
EC-0-P
1.5 - 3.2
1000
100
31800P
EC-1-P
2.6 - 4.2
1000
150
31801P
EC-0-
1.5 - 3.2
1000
100
31800E
EC-1-
2.6 - 4.2
1000
150
31801E
EC-0-
1.5 - 3.2
1000
100
31800A
EC-1-
2.6 - 4.2
1000
150
31801A
EC-0-B
1.5 - 3.2
1000
100
31800B
EC-1-B
2.6 - 4.2
1000
150
31801B
EC-0-C
1.5 - 3.2
1000
100
31800C
EC-1-C
2.6 - 4.2
1000
150
31801C
EC-0-Q
1.5 - 3.2
1000
100
31800Q
EC-1-Q
2.6 - 4.2
1000
150
31801Q
Type
Section (mm)
EC-0-0
1.5 - 3.2
1000
EC-0-1
1.5 - 3.2
EC-0-2

roller
(pcs)
YEAR
WARRANTY
Catalogue
number
ACCESSORIES
Consummative
Type
Section (mm)
150
318020
EC-3-0
5 - 7.2
250
150
318030
500
150
318021
EC-3-1
5 - 7.2
250
150
318031
3.6 - 5.2
500
150
318022
EC-3-2
5 - 7.2
250
150
318032
EC-2-3
3.6 - 5.2
500
150
318023
EC-3-3
5 - 7.2
250
150
318033
EC-2-4
3.6 - 5.2
500
150
318024
EC-3-4
5 - 7.2
250
150
318034
EC-2-5
3.6 - 5.2
500
150
318025
EC-3-5
5 - 7.2
250
150
318035
EC-2-6
3.6 - 5.2
500
150
318026
EC-3-6
5 - 7.2
250
150
318036
EC-2-7
3.6 - 5.2
500
150
318027
EC-3-7
5 - 7.2
250
150
318037
EC-2-8
3.6 - 5.2
500
150
318028
EC-3-8
5 - 7.2
250
150
318038
EC-2-9
3.6 - 5.2
500
150
318029
EC-3-9
5 - 7.2
250
150
318039
EC-2-a
3.6 - 5.2
500
150
31802a
EC-3-a
5 - 7.2
250
150
31803a
EC-2-b
3.6 - 5.2
500
150
31802b
EC-3-b
5 - 7.2
250
150
31803b
EC-2-R
3.6 - 5.2
500
150
31802R
EC-3-R
5 - 7.2
250
150
31803R
EC-2-S
3.6 - 5.2
500
150
31802S
EC-3-S
5 - 7.2
250
150
31803S
EC-2-T
3.6 - 5.2
500
150
31802T
EC-3-T
5 - 7.2
250
150
31803T
EC-2-N
3.6 - 5.2
500
150
31802N
EC-3-N
5 - 7.2
250
150
31803N
EC-2-P
3.6 - 5.2
500
150
31802P
EC-3-P
5 - 7.2
250
150
31803P
EC-2-
3.6 - 5.2
500
150
31802E
EC-3-
5 - 7.2
250
150
31803E
EC-2-
3.6 - 5.2
500
150
31802A
EC-3-
5 - 7.2
250
150
31803A
EC-2-B
3.6 - 5.2
500
150
31802B
EC-3-B
5 - 7.2
250
150
31803B
EC-2-C
3.6 - 5.2
500
150
31802C
EC-3-C
5 - 7.2
250
150
31803C
EC-2-Q
3.6 - 5.2
500
150
31802Q
EC-3-Q
5 - 7.2
250
150
31803Q
EC-2-0
3.6 - 5.2
500
EC-2-1
3.6 - 5.2
EC-2-2

roller
(pcs)
Catalogue
number
ACCESSORIES
Catalogue
number
Section (mm)
191
Consummative

roller
(pcs)
Type
ACCESSORIES
Heat shrinkage tubes
Heat shrinkage tubes ZDG type
Standard: EN 60 684
Thin-wall heat shrinkage tubes are used for insulation

of cable connection, at conductors repair to protect the
cable head from corrosion, for protection of the cable
insulation from water and moisture, for restoring the
cable insulation integrity, etc. It is a plastic thin wall pipe
which at temperature higher than 120C shrinks its initial
diameter to a certain degree. The material has high
temperature and UV rays wear resistance. The material
represents the so called permanently netted plastic.
This material is obtained as the plastic billet is processed
with the help of high energy electron rays so that inner
molecular bonds between adjacent molecules are
formed. After that the pipe is heated to the boiling point,
the pipe inflates, so do the inner molecular bonds. Then
the pipe is sharply refrigerated and the molecules stay in
the condition of inflated bonds for indefinite long time.
Heating the pipe repeatedly (after being mounted to
ACCESSORIES
Type
Heat shrinkage tubes
192
D1 (mm)
YEAR
WARRANTY
the given cable) the crystals melt again but due to the
net structure, they resume the initial pipe diameter and
take the form of the cable, pressing it and not allowing
the moisture to get under the pipe.
Technical data:
Material: triple cross - linked polyolefin
Colours: blue, black, red, yellow, yellow-green, green,
white
Shrinkage ratio: min 2 : 1
Ambient temperature: -40 to + 100C
Shrinkage temperature: min 120C
Condition of the material during fire exposure: slight
burning
The material does not emit hazardous substances
Insulation resistance: 1 10 12 /cm
Insulating voltage 1000 V
D2 (mm)
S (mm)
Packing / Box (m)
Catalogue number *
ZDG
0.5
0.04
200 / 4000
301001x
ZDG
1.5
0.75
0.04
200 / 4000
301115x
ZDG
1.0
0.05
200 / 4000
301002x
ZDG
1.5
0.05
200 / 2000
301003x
ZDG
2.0
0.08
100 / 1700
301004x
ZDG
2.5
0.08
100 / 1200
301005x
ZDG
3.0
0.08
100 / 1000
301006x
ZDG
3.5
0.08
100 / 1000
301007x
ZDG
4.0
0.08
100 / 1500
301008x
ZDG
4.5
0.08
100 / 1500
301009x
ZDG
10
5.0
0.08
100 / 1500
301010x
ZDG
11
5.5
0.08
100 / 1500
301011x
ZDG
12
6.0
0.08
100 / 1200
301012x
ZDG
13
6.5
0.08
100 / 1200
301013x
ZDG
14
7.0
0.08
100 / 1200
301014x
ZDG
15
7.5
0.08
100 / 1200
301015x
ZDG
16
8.0
0.08
100 / 1200
301016x
ZDG
18
9.0
0.08
50 / 600
301018x
ZDG
20
10
0.08
50 / 500
301020x
ZDG
22
11
0.08
50 / 500
301022x
ZDG
25
12.5
0.08
25 / 600
301025x
ZDG
28
14
0.08
25 / 300
301028x
ZDG
30
15
0.08
25 / 300
301030x
ZDG
35
17.5
0.08
25 / 300
301035x
ZDG
40
20
0.08
25 / 250
301040x
ZDG
50
25
0.08
25 / 200
301050x
ZDG
60
30
0.08
25 / 300
301060x
ZDG
70
35
0.08
25 / 250
301070x
ZDG
80
40
0.08
25 / 100
301080x
ZDG
90
45
0.08
25 / 150
301090x
ZDG
100
50
0.08
25 / 100
301100x
ZDG
120
60
0.08
25 / 200
301120x
ZDG
150
75
0.08
25 / 100
301150x
Note: * At orders after the catalogue number of the corresponding diameter a letter showing the colour must be
added: B blue; R red; K - black; G - green; Y yellow;
ACCESSORIES
Terminal blocks
Fixed terminal blocks - LTU2 UK series
YEAR
WARRANTY
single-core multicore
Size of the
terminal (mm)
L
In () Un (V) Colour
Packing / Box
(pcs)
Catalogue
number
LTU2UK 3N
0.2-4
0.2-2.5
42.5 47
5.2
32
800
grey
50 / 3000
31033
LTU2UK 3N
0.2-4
0.2-2.5
42.5 47
5.2
32
800
red
50 / 3000
31032
LTU2UK 3N
0.2-4
0.2-2.5
42.5 47
5.2
32
800
black
50 / 3000
31031
LTU2UK 3N
0.2-4
0.2-2.5
42.5 47
5.2
32
800
blue
50 / 3000
31035
Packing / Box
(pcs)
Catalogue
number
Type
Section of the
conductor (mm2)
Size of the
terminal (mm)
L
In () Un (V) Colour
LTU2UK 5N
0.2-6
0.2-4
42.5 47
6.2
41
800
grey
50 / 2000
31053
LTU2UK 5N
0.2-6
0.2-4
42.5 47
6.2
41
800
red
50 / 2000
31052
LTU2UK 5N
0.2-6
0.2-4
42.5 47
6.2
41
800
black
50 / 2000
31051
LTU2UK 5N
0.2-6
0.2-4
42.5 47
6.2
41
800
blue
50 / 2000
31055
Packing / Box
(pcs)
Catalogue
number
Type
Section of the
conductor (mm2)
Size of the
terminal (mm)
L
In () Un (V) Colour
LTU2UK 6N
0.2-10
0.2-6
42.5 47
8.2
57
800
grey
50 / 1000
31063
LTU2UK 6N
0.2-10
0.2-6
42.5 47
8.2
57
800
red
50 / 1000
31062
LTU2UK 6N
0.2-10
0.2-6
42.5 47
8.2
57
800
black
50 / 1000
31061
LTU2UK 6N
0.2-10
0.2-6
42.5 47
8.2
57
800
blue
50 / 1000
31065
193
Terminal blocks
Type
Section of the
conductor (mm2)
ACCESSORIES
Fixed terminal blocks with universal application into electrical distribution boxes. For DIN-rail mounting. Variety
of sizes for optimum using of available space by selection of appropriate terminals for the corresponding conductors. Made of non-flammable insulation polymeric material.
ACCESSORIES
Terminal blocks
Section of the
conductor (mm2)
Type
Size of the
terminal (mm)
In () Un (V) Colour
Packing / Box
(pcs)
Catalogue
number
LTU2UK 10N
0.5-16
0.5-10
42.5 47 10.2
76
800
grey
50 / 1000
31103
LTU2UK 10N
0.5-16
0.5-10
42.5 47 10.2
76
800
red
50 / 1000
31102
LTU2UK 10N
0.5-16
0.5-10
42.5 47 10.2
76
800
black
50 / 1000
31101
LTU2UK 10N
0.5-16
0.5-10
42.5 47 10.2
76
800
blue
50 / 1000
31105
Packing / Box
(pcs)
Catalogue
number
Section of the
conductor (mm2)
Type
Size of the
terminal (mm)
LTU2UIK 16
2.5-25
4-16
LTU2UIK 35
10-35
10-35
In () Un (V) Colour
42.5 47 12.2 101

55
62 15.2 125
800
grey
50 / 1000
31163
800
grey
20 / 400
31353
Fixed terminal blocks - JD series
YEAR
WARRANTY
ACCESSORIES
Two-sided insulated fixed terminal blocks designed to connect groundes conductors.

Made of non-flammable insulation polymeric material.
Terminal blocks
194
Type
Section of the
conductor (mm2)
Size of the
terminal (mm)
L
In () Un (V)
Colour
Packing / Box
(pcs)
Catalogue
number
5JD
0.2-4
0.2-4
42.5 47
6.2
34
800 yellow-green 50 / 1000
31054
6JD
0.2-10
0.2-6
42.5 47
8.2
37
31064
10JD
0.5-10
0.5-6
42.5 47
8.2
61
31104
16JD
2.5-25
2.5-16
42.5 47 12.2 108
31164
35JD
2.5-35
2.5-35
42.5 47
31354
15
135
Marking tags - ZB type
YEAR
WARRANTY
Accessories for marking and separation of different electrical circuits, different voltages
and fixing of elements for DIN-rail mounting.
Type
Pieces in a strip
Colour
Size (mm)
Packing / Box (pcs) Catalogue number
ZB6
20
white
100 / 1200
31906
ZB8
10
white
100 / 1200
31908
ACCESSORIES
Terminal blocks
YEAR
WARRANTY
Type
Colour
Thickness (mm)
Packing / Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
EC
grey
200 / 6000
31901
YEAR
WARRANTY
Type
Colour
Thickness (mm)
Packing / Box (pcs)
Catalogue number
E/UK
grey
200 / 2400
31902
Terminal blocks TBH type

Type
Pieces
In ()
in a strip
Un (V)
Colour
Section of the Packing / Box

conductor (mm2)
(pcs)
YEAR
WARRANTY
Catalogue
number
TBH 3A
12
660
semitransparent
t 1.5
10 / 1000
31003
TBH 6A
12
660
semitransparent
t 4
10 / 1000
31006
TBH 10A
12
10
660
semitransparent
t 6
10 / 500
31010
TBH 15A
12
15
660
white
t 6
10 / 500
31015
TBH 20A
12
20
660
white
t 10
10 / 400
31020
ACCESSORIES
Universal end fixed pieces E/UK type
195
Terminal blocks
End cover
ACCESSORIES
Terminal blocks
Cable tie bases fixed with screws

D (mm) Packing/(pcs)
ACCESSORIES
Terminal blocks
Catalogue
number
Type
Color
a (mm)
b (mm)
L (mm)
d (mm)
CTH-2C
white
22
16,5
5,8
9,5
100
500048
CTH-2C
black
22
16,5
5,8
9,5
100
500038
Cable tie holder
196
YEAR
WARRANTY
Type
Bore dicolour ameter

(mm)
-6
black
-6
YEAR
WARRANTY
W1
W2
Packing/
(pcs)
Catalogue
number
9,7
6,2
7,2
12,7
11,9
37
100
500044
white
9,7
6,2
7,2
12,7
11,9
37
100
500045
-8
black
9,7
6,3
9,9
12,7
12,6
43
100
500046
-8
white
9,7
6,3
9,9
12,7
12,6
43
100
500047
ACCESSORIES
Consummative
YEAR
WARRANTY
Packing / Box
(pcs)
Catalogue
number
100
10 / 800
500100
2.5
100
10 / 500
500152
white
2.5
100
10 / 500
500162
200
white
2.5
100
10 / 400
500202
Cable ties
250
white
3.5
100
10 / 250
500253
Cable ties
280
white
3.5
100
10 / 200
500283
Cable ties
300
white
3.5
100
10 / 200
500303
Cable ties
300
white
4.8
100
10 / 120
500304
Cable ties
370
white
3.5
100
10 / 120
500373
Cable ties
380
white
4.8
100
10 / 100
500384
Cable ties
450
white
4.8
100
10 / 70
500454
Cable ties
500
white
7.9
100
5 / 40
500507
Length (mm)
Colour
Width (mm) Packing (pcs)
Cable ties
100
white
2.5
Cable ties
150
white
Cable ties
160
Cable ties
Cable ties - black
YEAR
WARRANTY
Packing / Box
(pcs)
Catalogue
number
100
10 / 500
500151
2.5
100
10 / 500
500161
black
3.5
100
10 / 250
500251
280
black
3.5
100
10 / 200
500281
Cable ties
300
black
3.5
100
10 / 200
500301
Cable ties
500
black
7.9
100
40
500501
Type
Length (mm)
Colour
Width (mm) Packing (pcs)
Cable ties
150
black
2.5
Cable ties
160
black
Cable ties
250
Cable ties
ACCESSORIES
Type
197
Consummative
Cable ties - white
TOOLS
TOOLS
Manual meters | 200

Crimping tools | 206
Mechanical cutting tools | 211
Isolated VDE tools | 212
TOOLS
Manual meters
Digital multimeter 5510
YEAR
WARRANTY
This is a digital device for measuring of humidity, illumination, temperature and all electric values. It features
automatic range adjustment, manual value selection. It has an LCD display showing the measured value in
digits with the size of 3 . It is of high accuracy of analogue-digital conversion, precision in measuring and
resistance to electro-magnetic interferences. It has an automatic switch off.
Type
Packing (pcs)
/ carton
Catalogue
number
5510
1/10
5195510
Technical features:
DC voltage: 0.4 / 4 / 40 / 400 / 600 V
AC voltage : 4 / 40 / 400 / 600V
DC current: 400 / 4000 / 40m / 400m / 10A
AC current: 400 / 4000 / 40m / 400m / 10A
Resistance: 400 / 4K / 40K / 400K / 4M / 40M
Capacitors: 4 / 40 / 400 / 4 / 40 / 100F
Frequency: 10 / 100 / 1k / 10k / 100k / 200kHz
Loading cycles: from 0.1% to 99.9%
Temperature: -20 up to 1000
Humidity: 30% to 95%
Illumination: 4000 Lux / 40000 Lux
Noise level: 35 to 100dB
Circuit control: yes
Diodes control: yes
Weight: 310 g (including battery)
Battery: 1x9V
Dimensions: 83 162 47mm
Digital multimeter 420C
YEAR
WARRANTY
TOOLS
This is a digital device for measuring of humidity, illumination, temperature and all electric values. It features
automatic range adjustment, manual value selection. It has an LCD display showing the measured value in 4
digits with the size of 16 mm. It is of high accuracy of analogue-digital conversion, precision in measuring and
resistance to electro-magnetic interferences. It has an automatic switch off.
Manual meters
200
Type
Packing (pcs)
/ carton
Catalogue
number
420C
1/10
519420
Technical features:
DC voltage: 200m/ 2 / 20 / 200 / 600 V
AC voltage : 2 / 20 / 200 / 600V
DC current: 200 / 2000 / 20m / 200m / 2 / 10A
AC current: 00 / 2000 / 20m / 200m / 2 / 10A
Battery test: 1.5 / 3 / 9 / 12 V
Diodes control: yes
battery: 3x1.5 V
dimensions: 75 158 35mm
TOOLS
Manual meters
YEAR
WARRANTY
This is a digital device for measuring of all electric values. It features manual range adjustment. It has an LCD
display showing the measured value in 4 digits with the size of 3 . It is of high accuracy of analogue-digital
conversion, precision in measuring and resistance to electro-magnetic interferences.
Type
Packing (pcs)
/ carton
Catalogue
number
EM3055
1/10
5193055
Technical features:
DC voltage: 200m/ 2 / 20 / 200 / 1000 V
AC voltage: 2 / 20 / 200 / 750V
DC current: 2m / 20m / 200m / 10A
AC current: 200m / 10A
Resistance: 200 / 2K / 20K / 200K / 2M / 20M / 200M
Capacity: 2000p / 20 / 200 / 20F
Temperature: 0 up to 1000
Battery test: 1.5 / 3 / 9 / 12 V
Transistor test: Vce3V , Ib10F
Diodes control: yes
battery: 1x9V
YEAR
WARRANTY
Packing (pcs)
/ carton
Catalogue
number
EM3058
1/10
5193058
201
Manual meters
Type
Technical features:
DC voltage: 200m/ 2 / 20 / 200 / 1000 V
AC voltage: 200 m / 2 / 20 / 200 / 750V
DC current: 20 / 200 / 2m / 200m / 10A
AC current: 20 / 200 / 2m / 200m / 2 / 10A
Resistance: 200 / 2K / 20K / 200K / 2M / 20M / 200M
Capacitors: 2 / 20 / 200 / 2 / 20F
Frequency: 20kHz to 2000kHz
Loading cycles: 0.1% to 99.9%
Temperature: 0 up to 1000
Logical level: High > 2.0 V; Low < 0.8 V
Diodes control: yes
battery: 1x9V
dimensions: 97 200 47 mm
TOOLS
This is a digital device for measuring of temperature and all electric values. It features manual range adjustment, manual value selection. It has an LCD display showing the measured value in digits with the size of 3 .
It is of high accuracy of analogue-digital conversion, precision in measuring and resistance to electro-magnetic interferences. It has an automatic switch off.
TOOLS
Manual meters
YEAR
WARRANTY
This is a digital device for measuring of electric values. It features automatic range adjustment, manual value
selection. It has an LCD display showing the measured value in 4 digits with the size of 16 mm. It is of high
accuracy of analogue-digital conversion, precision in measuring and resistance to electro-magnetic interferences. It has an automatic switch off and low battery indication.
Type
Packing (pcs)
/ carton
Catalogue
number
EM31
1/10
519031
Technical features:
DC voltage: 240m/ 2400m / 24 / 240 / 600 V
AC voltage: 240m/ 2400m / 24 / 240 / 600 V
DC current: 240 / 2400 / 24m / 240m / 10A
AC current: 240 / 2400 / 24m / 240m / 10A
Resistance: 400 - 40M
Capacity: 51.2F to 51.2F
Frequency: 50 / 500 / 5000 / 50k / 50MHz
Diodes control: yes
battery: 9V
Digital multimeter / pen 3215
YEAR
WARRANTY
TOOLS
This is a digital device for measuring of electric values in the form of a pen. It features automatic range adjustment, manual value selection. It has an LCD display, data retain function, automatic reset, polarity selection,
range overload indication. It is of high accuracy of analogue-digital conversion, precision in measuring and
resistance to electro-magnetic interferences. It has an automatic switch off and low battery indication and a
torch.
Manual meters
202
Type
Packing (pcs)
/ carton
Catalogue
number
EM3215
1/10
5193215
Technical features:
DC voltage: 200m/ 2 / 20 / 200 / 600 V
AC voltage: 2 / 20 / 200 / 600V
DC current: 20m to 200mA
AC current: 20m to 200mA
Logical level: High > 2.3V; Low < 0.8 V
Diodes control: yes
battery: 1x9V
TOOLS
Manual meters
Digital clamp meter EM202
YEAR
WARRANTY
This is a digital clamp meter for measuring of electric values. It features manual range adjustment, manual
value selection. It has an LCD display showing the measured value in digits with the size of 3 mm. It is of
high accuracy of analogue-digital conversion, precision in measuring and resistance to electro-magnetic
interferences. It has an automatic switch off.
Technical features:
DC voltage: 1000 V
AC voltage: 750V
AC current: 20 / 200 / 1000A
Resistance: 200 k
Diodes control: yes
battery: 1x9V
Type
Packing (pcs)
/ carton
Catalogue
number
EM202
1/10
519202
YEAR
WARRANTY
Type
Packing (pcs)
/ carton
Catalogue
number
EM204
1/10
519204
203
Manual meters
Technical features:
DC voltage: 1000 V
AC voltage: 750V
DC current: 200 / 1000A
AC current: 200 / 1000A
Resistance: 200 k
Frequency: 2 kHz
battery: 1x9V
TOOLS
This is a digital clamp meter for measuring of electric values. It features automatic range adjustment, manual
value selection. It has an LCD display, low battery indication, overload protection. It is of high accuracy of
analogue-digital conversion, precision in measuring and resistance to electro-magnetic interferences. It has an
automatic switch off.
TOOLS
Manual meters
YEAR
WARRANTY
This is a digital clamp meter for measuring of electric values. It features manual range adjustment. It has an
LCD display and retain function option, low battery indication and overload protection.
Technical features:
DC voltage: 1000 V
AC voltage: 750V
AC current: 200 / 1000A
Resistance: 200 / 20 k
Diodes control: yes
battery: 1x9V
Type
Packing (pcs)
/ carton
Catalogue
number
EM266
1/10
519266
Infrared temperature meter EM520A
YEAR
WARRANTY
This is a digital device for measuring of temperature.The temperature is measured with no contact. It has a laser counter for precision measuring, suitable large LCD display, battery low indication and overload protection.
TOOLS
Technical features:
Temperature: -20 up to 320 / -4 to 608 F
Distance to point size: 6:1
Precision: 2 C or 2% in reading
battery: 1x9V
Manual meters
204
Type
Packing (pcs)
/ carton
Catalogue
number
EM520A
1/5
519520
Voltage tester
YEAR
WARRANTY
The voltage tester screwdriver is used for detecting the presence of electrical voltage. Existence of voltage is
shown via lighting signal indicator located in the handle of the screwdriver. It can detect voltage in the range
from 100V to 250V. The screwdriver has a flat tip.
Technical features:
Length-3.5*140mm
Voltage range 100-250V~
GS, CE certifycates
Type
Packing (pcs)
/ carton
Catalogue
number
DN-8203
1/480
519203
TOOLS
Manual meters
Phase meter Gk7
YEAR
WARRANTY
A device indicating phase availability in the system. No contact phase indicator featuring sound and light
indication of phase availability.
Technical features:
Voltage range: from 50 to 1000V
Frequency range: from 50 Hz to 500 Hz
dimensions: length 62mm
Type
Packing (pcs)
/ carton
Catalogue
number
GK7
60
519GK7
Digital detector 4 in 1 series TS530
YEAR
WARRANTY
This is a device for detecting metals, voltage and live conductors, wooden struts, or piping sections. The device
has a 2-meter measuring tape. It features light and sound indication. When an object is located, the display
light blinks and marks with increasing position. Once the exact position is located, a light point is marked on
the wall through a button.
Catalogue
number
TS530
1/10
519530
Industrial repair kit ETK06A
TOOLS
Packing (pcs)
/ carton
205
YEAR
WARRANTY
A finely packaged repair kit containing four elements in a metal briefcase, sealed with special plastic foam and
struts for each instrument.
The kit includes:
Digital multimeter EM420
Digital clamp-on ammeter EM465
Phase meter GK7
Infrared temperature meter EM520A
Type
Packing (pcs)
/ carton
Catalogue
number
ETK06A
1/6
51906A
Manual meters
Type
Technical features:
2-meter measuring tape
Pen: marking the located detail
Piping section: metal pipe up to 25mm
Wooden struts: 30x30mm
Live conductors detection: 50mm for 90 ~ 250V; 50/60Hz
battery: 1x9 V
dimensions: 73 x 180 x 32mm
TOOLS
Crimping tools
Hydraulic crimping pliers HT - 300 type
YEAR
WARRANTY
Functions:
Crimping of aluminum or copper conductors with cable terminals or bush in the corresponding size
Technical data:
Crimping head turning at 360 which facilitates the crimping of static conductors
Device for automatic following of the effort at crimping completion
Form of the crimping element: hexahedral
Size of the crimping element: 16, 25, 35, 50, 70, 95, 120, 150, 185, 240, 300 mm2
Section of the crimping conductors:
- AI conductors - from 16 to 300 mm2
- Cu conductors from 16 to 240 mm2
Element pressing power: 60kN
Width of the element: 17mm
Weight of the instrument: 3.3 kg
Length: 460mm
Used hydraulic oil: #15 (hydraulic oil with viscosity 15)
Metal box for the instrument
A set of congestion hoops for the hydraulic cylinder
Type
Packing (pcs)
/ carton
Catalogue number
HT - 300
59300
TOOLS
Hydraulic crimping pliers KYQ-300B type
Crimping tools
206
YEAR
WARRANTY
Functions:
Technical data:
Device for automatic following of the effort at crimping completion
Size of the crimping element: 16, 25, 35, 50, 70, 95, 120, 150, 185, 240, 300 mm2
Length: 500mm
Type
Packing (pcs)
/ carton
Catalogue number
KYQ-300B
59302
TOOLS
Crimping tools
Hydraulic crimping pliers YQK-300 type
YEAR
WARRANTY
Functions:
Technical data:
Size of the crimping element: 10, 16, 25, 35, 50, 70, 95, 120, 150, 185, 240, 300 mm2
Length: 500mm
Type
Packing (pcs)
/ carton
Catalogue number
YQK-300
59301
YEAR
WARRANTY
Functions:
Technical data:
Size of the crimping element: 4, 6, 10, 16, 25, 35, 50 mm2
- AI conductors - from 4 to 50mm2
Element pressing power: 8T
Length: 310mm
Type
Packing (pcs)
/ carton
Catalogue number
YQK 50
59303
TOOLS
207
Crimping tools
Hydraulic crimping pliers YQK 50 type
TOOLS
Crimping tools
Hydraulic punching pliers WK - 8 type
YEAR
WARRANTY
Functions:
Cutting through openings in sheet metal with gauge up to 3mm without rotary motion
Technical data:
Piercing head turning at 360
Form of the cutting element: round
Size of the cutting element: 22, 27.5, 34.3, 40, 49, 60.8mm
Piercing capacity:
- sheet metal 3mm openings up to 30mm
- sheet metal 2mm openings up to 60mm
Thickness of the element: 25mm
Additional set of cutting elements for cable glands 16, 20, 26.2, 32.5, 39, 51, 63 and a square for display
devices 46.5x46.5, 68x68 (ordered additionally); Catalogue number 54002
Type
Packing (pcs)
/ carton
Catalogue number
WK - 8
54000
Additional set
54002
TOOLS
Hydraulic punching press SYK 15 type
Crimping tools
208
YEAR
WARRANTY
Functions:
Cutting through openings in sheet metal with gauge up to 3mm without rotary motion
Technical data:
Protracting piercing head supplied with a hose for the hydraulic oil that gives possibility for piercing openings everywhere on the metal surface
Form of the cutting element:
- round
- square
Size of the cutting element:
- square: 32x32mm
- round openings: 22, 27.5, 34.3, 40, 49, 60.8mm
Piercing capacity:
- sheet metal 3mm openings up to 60.8mm
- sheet metal 2mm openings up to 115.5mm
- square opening up to 110x110mm
Element pressing power: 15T
Thickness of the element: 25mm
Additional set of cutting elements for cable glands 16, 20, 26.2, 32.5, 39, 51, 63 and a square for display
devices 46.5x46.5, 68x68 (ordered additionally); Catalogue number 54002
Type
Packing (pcs)
/ carton
Catalogue number
SYK 15
54001
Additional set
54002
TOOLS
Crimping tools
Combined scissors HS 2103 type
YEAR
WARRANTY
Functions:
Cleaning of the plastic insulation of conductors and conductors
Cutting of aluminum or copper cable conductors up to 6mm2
Cutting of bearing steel plated wires up to 2mm2
Crimping of cable terminals
Technical data:
Possibility for crimping of automobile high voltage conductors
Possibility for crimping of cable conductors up to 6mm2
Maximum section of the cable: up to 6mm2
Weight of the instrument: 0.21kg
Length of the instrument: 213mm
Packing: blister
Type
Packing (pcs)
/ carton
Catalogue number
HS 2103
50
59310
YEAR
WARRANTY
TOOLS
Functions:
Cleaning of the plastic insulation of conductors and conductors
Cutting of aluminum or copper cable conductors up to 6mm2
Cutting of bearing steel plated wires up to 2mm2
Crimping of cable terminals
Technical data:
Maximum section of the cable:
- cleaning of a rigid conductor: from 0.5 to 6mm2
- cleaning of a flexible conductor: from 0.75 to 6mm2
Presence of openings for cutting of bolts: from M2.5 to M5
Packing: blister
209
Type
Packing (pcs)
/ carton
Catalogue number
HS 2603
50
59311
Crimping tools
Combined scissors HS 2603 type
TOOLS
Crimping tools
Instrument for manual crimping of conductors
HD 005 type
YEAR
WARRANTY
Functions:
Crimping of naked cable terminals
Technical data:
Form of the crimping head: hexahedral
Packing: blister
Type
Packing (pcs)
/ carton
Catalogue number
HD 005
20
59308
Instrument for manual crimping of conductors

G 301H type
YEAR
WARRANTY
TOOLS
Functions:
Crimping of isolated cable terminals
Technical data:
Packing: blister
Type
Packing (pcs)
/ carton
Catalogue number
G 301H
20
59307
210
Crimping tools
Crimping pliers SN 003 type
YEAR
WARRANTY
Functions:
Crimping of naked cable terminals and joining bushes
Technical data:
Possibility for crimping of cable conductors from 6 to 16mm2
Packing: blister
Type
Packing (pcs)
/ carton
Catalogue number
SN 003
10 / 20
59309
TOOLS
Mechanical cutting tools
Mechanical cable cutting pliers CC 325 type
YEAR
WARRANTY
Functions:
Cutting of aluminum or copper cable conductors
Cutting of conductors with metal bearing core
Technical data:
- for aluminum conductors up to 150mm2
- for copper conductors up to 150mm2
Cutting power: 15T
Presence of cutting mechanism type ratchet
Presence of brake of the cutting mechanism
Packing: blister
Type
Packing (pcs)
/ carton
Catalogue number
CC 325
5 / 10
59305
Mechanical cable cutting pliers CC 400 type
YEAR
WARRANTY
Type
Packing (pcs)
/ carton
Catalogue number
CC 400
59304
Mechanical cable cutting pliers HS 250 type
TOOLS
Functions:
Technical data:
Cutting power: 15T
Presence of cutting mechanism type ratchet
Presence of brake of the cutting mechanism
Packing: blister
211
YEAR
WARRANTY
Mechanical cutting tools
Functions:
Technical data:
Packing: blister
Type
Packing (pcs)
/ carton
Catalogue number
HS 250
10
59306
TOOLS
Isolated VDE tools
1000V vde pliers
YEAR
WARRANTY
Manufactured to exact standarts.

Chrome Vanadium Steel
Induction hardened cutting edges.
Bi-material TPR soft-grip handle.
Ergonomic design for comfortable, firm grip.
GS/TUV approved.
VDE Combination Pliers

Type
Size (mm)
Packing (pcs)
hanging card / box / carton
Catalogue number
VDE Combination Pliers
180
1 / 6 / 60
599100180
Type
Size (mm)
Packing (pcs)
Catalogue number
VDE Long Nose Pliers
180
1 / 6 / 60
599300180
Type
Size (mm)
Packing (pcs)
Catalogue number
VDE Side Cutting Pliers
160
1 / 6 / 60
599200160
180
1/6/60
599200180
TOOLS
VDE Long Nose Pliers
Isolated VDE tools
212
TOOLS
Isolated VDE tools
VDE Cable Cutting Pliers

Type
Size (mm)
Packing (pcs)
Catalogue number
VDE Cable Cutting Pliers
160
1 / 6 / 60
599600180
1000V vde screwdriver
YEAR
WARRANTY
Designer for great performance with thumb pressure points.

Extra torque and comfort.
Chrome vanadium steel.
Magnetic tip.
Ergonomic comfort-grip handle
VDE Screwdriver, Slotted

Size (mm)
L (mm)
Packing (pcs) hanging

card / box / carton
Catalogue number
100
1 / 12 / 240
599030100
100
1 / 12 / 240
599040100
TOOLS
Type
VDE Screwdriver
Type
Size (mm)
L (mm)
Packing (pcs) hanging

card / box / carton
Catalogue number
VDE Screwdriver
PH0
60
1 / 12 / 240
599000060
VDE Screwdriver
PH1
80
1 / 12 / 240
599001080
VDE Screwdriver
PH2
100
1 / 12 / 120
599020100
Isolated VDE tools
213
ELECTRICAL SWITCHES
AND SOCKETS
ELECTRICAL
City series | 216

Lecce series | 222
Rhyme series | 228
Splendor series | 234
Life style series | 238
Basic series | 242
Waterproof for surface mounting | 246
Plugs | 247
ELECTRICAL SWITCHES AND SOCKETS
City series
CITY
YEAR
WARRANTY
City series
216
White
Champagne metallic
Orange
Yellow
Green
Red
Blue
Orange metallic
Bordo metallic
Grey

City series
1 button 1 way switch
Type
Type
Dimmer LED 3-300W
Colour
White metallic
Champagne metallic
White metallic
Champagne metallic
Colour
White metallic
Champagne metallic
White metallic
Champagne metallic
Colour
Rated current In (A)
Packing
(pcs)
10
10/100
10
10/100
Packing
(pcs)
10
10/100
10
10/100
Packing
(pcs)
White metallic
6/10
Champagne metallic
Catalogue number
190011
190012
190021
190022
Catalogue number
190041
190042
190051
190052
Catalogue number
190191
190192
Type
Type
Door bell switch
Colour
White metallic
Champagne metallic
Packing
(pcs)
10/100
Catalogue number
190181
190182
City series
217

City series
Type
German type socket
City series
218
Colour
White metallic
Champagne metallic
Packing
(pcs)
16
10/100
Catalogue number
190211
190212
Type
Colour
Packing
(pcs)
Catalogue number
German type socket IP44
White metallic
16
10/100
190211C
Type
Colour
Packing
(pcs)
Catalogue number
16
8/80
Packing
(pcs)
German type socket double
Type
Phone socket RJ11
White metallic
Champagne metallic
Colour
White metallic
Champagne metallic
10/100
190371
190372
Catalogue number
190261
190262

City series
Phone socket RJ11

+ computer socket RJ45
White metallic
Champagne metallic
Type
Colour
Computer socket RJ45
Phone socket RJ11

+ computer socket RJ45
White metallic
Champagne metallic
Type
Colour
White metallic
Champagne metallic
Packing
(pcs)
10/100
Champagne metallic
Colour
Packing
(pcs)
10/100
White metallic
Type
TV socket
Packing
(pcs)
10/100
Packing
(pcs)
10/100
Catalogue number
190731
190732
Catalogue number
190281
190282
Catalogue number
190711
190712
Catalogue number
Colour
219
190251
190252
City series
Type
City series
City series
220
Type
Colour
Packing (pcs)
Catalogue number
single
White
20/200
190441
single
Champagne
20/200
190442
single
Orange
20/200
190443
single
Yellow
20/200
190444
single
Green
20/200
190445
single
Red
20/200
190446
single
Blue
20/200
190447
single
Orange metallic
20/200
190448
single
Bordo metallic
20/200
190449
single
Grey
20/200
190450
Type
Colour
Packing (pcs)
Catalogue number
double
White
10/100
190551
double
Champagne
10/100
190552
double
Orange
10/100
190553
double
Yellow
10/100
190554
double
Green
10/100
190555
double
Red
10/100
190556
double
Blue
10/100
190557
double
Orange metallic
10/100
190558
double
Bordo metallic
10/100
190559
double
Grey
10/100
190560
Type
Colour
Packing (pcs)
Catalogue number
triple
White
15/150
190661
triple
Champagne
15/150
190662
triple
Orange
15/150
190663
triple
Yellow
15/150
190664
triple
Green
15/150
190665
triple
Red
15/150
190666
triple
Blue
15/150
190667
triple
Orange metallic
15/150
190668
triple
Bordo metallic
15/150
190669
triple
Grey
15/150
190670
Type
Colour
Packing (pcs)
Catalogue number
quadruple
White
10/100
190361
quadruple
Champagne
10/100
190362
quadruple
Orange
10/100
190363
quadruple
Yellow
10/100
190364
quadruple
Green
10/100
190365
quadruple
Red
10/100
190366
quadruple
Blue
10/100
190367
quadruple
Orange metallic
10/100
190368
quadruple
Bordo metallic
10/100
190369
quadruple
Grey
10/100
190370
Type
Colour
Packing (pcs)
Catalogue number
fivefold
White
10/100
190601
fivefold
Champagne
10/100
190602
fivefold
Orange
10/100
190603
fivefold
Yellow
10/100
190604
fivefold
Green
10/100
190605
fivefold
Red
10/100
190606
fivefold
Blue
10/100
190607
fivefold
Orange metallic
10/100
190608
fivefold
Bordo metallic
10/100
190609
fivefold
Grey
10/100
190610
Outlet safety cap
Colour
White
Brown
Packing (pcs)
10/100
Catalogue number
192215
221
192214
City series
Type
City series
Lecce series
LECCE
YEAR
WARRANTY
Lecce series
222
White
Blue
Silver grey
Golden
Graphite mat
Champagne
Green
Onix
Cherry-tree
Tabac
Graphite

Lecce series
double
triple
sixfold
Packing (pcs)
Catalogue number
White
26100
Blue
26101
Silver grey
26102
Golden
26103
Graphite mat
26104
Graphite
40/400
26105
Champagne
26106
Green
26107
Onix
26108
Cherry-tree
26109
Tabac
26110
White
26200
Blue
26201
Silver grey
26202
Golden
26203
Graphite mat
26204
Graphite
40/400
26205
Champagne
26206
Green
26207
Onix
26208
Cherry-tree
26209
Tabac
26210
White
26300
Blue
26301
Silver grey
26302
Golden
26303
Graphite mat
26304
Graphite
40/400
26306
Green
26307
Onix
26308
Cherry-tree
26309
Tabac
26310
White
26600
Graphite
Champagne
20/200
223
26305
Champagne
Silver grey
single
Colour
26602
26605
26606
Lecce series
Type
Lecce series
224
Rated current
Packing (pcs) Catalogue number
In (A)
Type
Colour
Size
White
1 mod.
10AX
20/200
26001
White
1 mod.
10AX
20/200
26003
1 button cross switch
White
1 mod.
10AX
16/160
26004
Type
Colour
Size

with light
White
1 mod.
Type
Colour
Size
door bell switch
White
1 mod.
Type
Colour
Size
curtain switch
White
1 mod.
Type
Colour
Size
boiler switch with neon**
White
kompl.
Rated current
In (A)
10AX
20/200
26002
Rated current
In (A)
10AX
20/200
26005
Rated current
In (A)
10AX
20/200
26006
Rated current
In (A)
45A
10/100
26024
Lecce series
*The product comes without decorative tripple panel
Type
Colour
Size
Packing (pcs)
Catalogue number
LED dimmer 250W
White
1 mod.
20/200
26055

Lecce series
Rated current
In (A)
Type
Colour
Size
italian standard multi

socket
White
1 mod.
Type
Colour
Size
german type socket
White
2 mod.
Type
Colour
Size
universal socket
White
2 mod.
10A
16/160
26007
Rated current
In (A)
16A
8/80
26008
Rated current
In (A)
26009
Type
Colour
Size
Packing (pcs)
Catalogue number
TV socket
White
1 mod.
28/280
26010
Type
Colour
Size
Packing (pcs)
Catalogue number
satellite socket
White
1 mod.
28/280
26011
Type
Colour
Size
Packing (pcs)
Catalogue number
phone socket
White
1 mod.
28/280
26012
8/80
225
Lecce series
13A

Lecce series
Type
Colour
Size
Packing (pcs)
Catalogue number
computer socket
White
1 mod.
28/280
26013
Type
Colour
Size
Packing (pcs)
Catalogue number
2 port USB socket*
White
1 mod.
12/120
26014
Type
Colour
Size
Packing (pcs)
Catalogue number
door bell
White
2 mod.
8/80
26015
Type
Colour
Size
Packing (pcs)
Catalogue number
sound dimmer
White
2 mod.
8/80
26016
Type
Colour
Size
Packing (pcs)
Catalogue number
blanc cover
White
1 mod.
40/400
26017
Type
Colour
Size
Packing (pcs)
Catalogue number
button without functional

part
White
3 mod.
20/200
26023
*Input: 90-240V; Output: 5V 2A
Lecce series
226
Size
1 mod
mounting frames
3 mod
Packing (pcs)
Catalogue number
20/200
26019
Type
Size
Packing (pcs)
Catalogue number
mounting frames
2 mod
20/200
26018
Type
Size
Packing (pcs)
Catalogue number
mounting frames
6 mod
10/100
26056
Type
console box for plasterboard
Size
Packing (pcs)
Catalogue number
1-3 mod
10/300
24205
6 mod
5/150
26626
* Single, double and triple switch or socket use triple console
Type
Size
Packing (pcs)
Catalogue number
console box for brick and

concrete
1-3 mod
10/300
24203
6 mod
5/150
26616
227
Lecce series
Type
Lecce series
Rhyme series
RHYME
YEAR
WARRANTY
Rhyme series
228
White metallic
Champagne metallic
Grey metallic
Graphite metallic
Coffee metallic

Rhyme series
Type
2 buttons 1 way switch
Type
Packing
(pcs)
Catalogue number
White metallic
11011
Champagne metallic
11012
Grey metallic
10
10/100
11014
Graphite metallic
11015
Coffee metallic
11016
White metallic
11021
Champagne metallic
11022
Grey metallic
10
10/100
11024
Graphite metallic
11025
Coffee metallic
11026
White metallic
11341
Champagne metallic
11342
Grey metallic
10
10/100
11344
Graphite metallic
11345
Coffee metallic
11346
Colour
Packing
(pcs)
Catalogue number
White metallic
11041
Champagne metallic
11042
Grey metallic
10
10/100
11044
Graphite metallic
11045
Coffee metallic
11046
White metallic
11051
Champagne metallic
11052
Grey metallic
10
10/100
11054
Graphite metallic
11055
Coffee metallic
11056
Colour
Packing
(pcs)
Catalogue number
White metallic
11721
Champagne metallic
11722
Grey metallic
10
10/100
11724
Graphite metallic
11725
Coffee metallic
11726
Colour
229
Rhyme series
Type

Rhyme series
Type
curtain control switch
Type
sensor switch
Type
Rhyme series
230
dimmer switch
Type
door bell switch
Type
door bell switch with name

card
Colour
Packing
(pcs)
Catalogue number
White metallic
11171A
Champagne metallic
11172A
Grey metallic
10
10/100
11174A
Graphite metallic
11175A
Coffee metallic
11176A
Colour
Packing (pcs)
Catalogue number
White metallic
11411
Champagne metallic
11412
10/100
Grey metallic
11414
Graphite metallic
11415
Coffee metallic
11416
Colour
Packing
(pcs)
Catalogue number
White metallic
11191
Champagne metallic
11192
Grey metallic
10
10/100
11194
Graphite metallic
11195
Coffee metallic
11196
Colour
Packing
(pcs)
Catalogue number
White metallic
11181
Champagne metallic
11182
Grey metallic
10
10/100
11184
Graphite metallic
11185
Coffee metallic
11186
Colour
Packing
(pcs)
Catalogue number
White metallic
11181B
Champagne metallic
11182B
Grey metallic
10
10/100
11184B
Graphite metallic
11185B
Coffee metallic
11186B

Rhyme series
Type
German type socket
Type
German type socket with cover
Type
German type socket (double)
Packing
(pcs)
Catalogue number
White metallic
11181C
Champagne metallic
11182C
Grey metallic
10
10/100
11184C
Graphite metallic
11185C
Coffee metallic
11186C
Colour
Packing
(pcs)
Catalogue number
White metallic
11211
Champagne metallic
11212
Grey metallic
10
10/100
11214
Graphite metallic
11215
Coffee metallic
11216
Colour
Packing
(pcs)
Catalogue number
White metallic
11211C
Champagne metallic
11212C
Grey metallic
16
10/100
11214C
Graphite metallic
11215C
Coffee metallic
11216C
Colour
Packing
(pcs)
Catalogue number
White metallic
11371
Champagne metallic
11372
Grey metallic
16
5/50
Push light switch
Colour
231
11374
Graphite metallic
11375
Coffee metallic
11376
Rhyme series
Type

Rhyme series
Type
Phone socket
RJ11
Phone socket RJ11 - double
Phone socket RJ11 + computer

socket RJ45
Type
Rhyme series
232
Computer socket (cat5e)

RJ45
Colour
Packing
(pcs)
White metallic
11261
Champagne metallic
11262
Grey metallic
10/100
Computer socket RJ45 - double
Type
TV socket
11264
Graphite metallic
11265
Coffee metallic
11266
White metallic
11741
Champagne metallic
11742
Grey metallic
10/100
11744
Graphite metallic
11745
Coffee metallic
11746
White metallic
11731
11732
Champagne metallic
Grey metallic
10/100
11734
Graphite metallic
11735
Coffee metallic
11736
Colour
Packing
(pcs)
Catalogue number
White metallic
11281
Champagne metallic
11282
Grey metallic
10/100
11284
Graphite metallic
11285
Coffee metallic
11286
White metallic
112816E
112826E
Champagne metallic
Computer socket RJ45 (CAT6e)
Catalogue number
Grey metallic
10/100
112846E
Graphite metallic
112856E
Coffee metallic
112866E
White metallic
11711
Champagne metallic
11712
Grey metallic
10/100
11714
Graphite metallic
11715
Coffee metallic
11716
Colour
Packing
(pcs)
Catalogue number
White metallic
11251
Champagne metallic
11252
Grey metallic
10/100
11254
Graphite metallic
11255
Coffee metallic
11256
TV socket+FM socket + SAT

socket
White metallic
11681
Champagne metallic
11682
*The model is available for individual

installation only and cannot be combined
with other frames of Rhyme series.
Graphite metallic
11685
Coffee metallic
11686
Grey metallic
10/100
11684

Rhyme series
Packing
(pcs)
White metallic
11331
Champagne metallic
11332
10
Grey metallic
10/100
11335
Coffee metallic
11336
Packing
(pcs)
Colour
Catalogue number
White metallic
11551
Champagne metallic
11552
2 gangs
20/200
Grey metallic
11554
Graphite metallic
11555
Coffee metallic
11556
White metallic
11661
Champagne metallic
11662
Grey metallic
3 gangs
20/200
11664
Graphite metallic
11665
Coffee metallic
11666
White metallic
11361
Champagne metallic
11362
Grey metallic
4 gangs
10/100
11364
11365
Graphite metallic
Coffee metallic
11366
White metallic
11601
Champagne metallic
11602
Grey metallic
5 gangs
20/200
11604
Graphite metallic
11605
Coffee metallic
11606
White metallic
11621
Champagne metallic
11622
Grey metallic
6 gangs
Outlet safety cap
11334
Graphite metallic
Type
Type
Catalogue number
20/200
11624
Graphite metallic
11625
Coffee metallic
11626
Colour
White
Brown
Packing (pcs)
10/100
Key card power switch
Colour
Catalogue number
192215
192214
233
Rhyme series
Type
Splendor series
SPLENDOR
YEAR
WARRANTY
Splendor series
234
White
Silver grey
Pear-tree
Cherry-tree
Black
Type
Colour
Packing (pcs)
Catalogue number
1 gang
White
30/300
06301
1 gang
Silver grey
30/300
06302
1 gang
Pear-tree
30/300
06305
1 gang
Cherry-tree
30/300
06306
1 gang
Black
30/300
06303
Type
Colour
Packing (pcs)
Catalogue number
2 gangs
White
20/200
06311
2 gangs
Silver grey
20/200
06312
2 gangs
Pear-tree
20/200
06315
2 gangs
Cherry-tree
20/200
06316
2 gangs
Black
20/200
06313
Type
Colour
Packing (pcs)
Catalogue number
3 gangs
White
15/150
06321
3 gangs
Silver grey
15/150
06322
3 gangs
Pear-tree
15/150
06325
3 gangs
Cherry-tree
15/150
06326
3 gangs
Black
15/150
06323
Type
Colour
Packing (pcs)
Catalogue number
Splendor series
single with cover
White
0629
Silver grey
06292
Pear-tree
20/200
06295
Cherry-tree
06296
Black
1629
Splendor series
235

Splendor series
Colour
Rated current
In (A)
Packing (pcs)
Catalogue number
white
10
10/100
0601
dark grey
10
10/100
1601
white
10
10/100
0602
dark grey
10
10/100
1602
white
10
10/100
0603
dark grey
10
10/100
1603
Colour
Rated current
In (A)
Packing (pcs)
Catalogue number
white
10
10/100
0610
dark grey
10
10/100
1610
white
10
10/100
0612
dark grey
10
10/100
1612
white
10
10/100
0611
dark grey
10
10/100
1611
Colour
Rated current
In (A)
Packing (pcs)
Catalogue number
white
16
10/100
0616
dark grey
16
10/100
1616
Type
Colour
Rated current
In (A)
Packing (pcs)
Catalogue number

with light
white
10
10/100
0606
dark grey
10
10/100
1606
Type
Type

with light
Splendor series
236
Type
German type socket

with light
white
10
10/100
0607
dark grey
10
10/100
1607
Type
Colour
Rated current
In (A)
Packing (pcs)
Catalogue number
white
10
10/100
0605
dark grey
10
10/100
1605
white
10
10/100
0609
dark grey
10
10/100
1609
Push light switch

Door bell switch with
light

Splendor series
Type
Colour
Power(W)
Packing (pcs)
Catalogue number
white
600
10/100
0618
dark grey
600
10/100
1618
white
500
10/100
0619
dark grey
500
10/100
1619
Colour
Packing (pcs)
Catalogue number
white
10/100
0621
dark grey
10/100
1621
TV socket+FM
socket+SAT socket
white
10/100
0668
*The model is available for

individual installation only and
cannot be combined with other
frames of Rhyme series.
dark grey
10/100
1668
white
10/100
0648
dark grey
10/100
1648
Dimmer switch
Fan speed switch
Type
V socket
white
10/100
0645
dark grey
10/100
1645
Type
Colour
Packing (pcs)
Catalogue number
white
10/100
0623
dark grey
10/100
1623
white
10/100
06232
dark grey
10/100
16232
white
10/100
0624
dark grey
10/100
1624
white
10/100
0646
dark grey
10/100
1646
237
Phone socket RJ11

Phone socket RJ11
(2 gangs)
Phone socket RJ11+
Colour
Rated current
In (A)
Packing (pcs)
Catalogue number
white
10
10/100
0633
dark grey
10
10/100
1633
Type
Colour
Rated current
In (A)
Packing (pcs)
Catalogue number
German type socket

(2 gangs)
white
16
10/100
0637
Type
Key card power switch
TV socket (female)+
Splendor series
TV socket (female)+
Phone socket RJ11
Life style series
LIFE STYLE
YEAR
WARRANTY
Life style series
238
White
Chrome
Silver grey
Yellow
Pear-tree
Golden
Bordo
Cherry-tree
Dark grey
Green
Light blue
Dark blue
1 gang
2 gangs
3 gangs
4 gangs
1 gang
2 gangs
3 gangs
4 gangs
1 gang
2 gangs
3 gangs
4 gangs
1 gang
2 gangs
3 gangs
4 gangs
1 gang
2 gangs
3 gangs
4 gangs
1 gang
2 gangs
3 gangs
4 gangs
1 gang
2 gangs
3 gangs
4 gangs
1 gang
2 gangs
3 gangs
4 gangs
1 gang
2 gangs
3 gangs
4 gangs
1 gang
2 gangs
3 gangs
4 gangs
1 gang
2 gangs
3 gangs
4 gangs
1 gang
2 gangs
3 gangs
4 gangs
6 gangs
6 gangs
6 gangs
Colour
White
Chrome
Silver grey
Yellow
Pear-tree
Golden
Bordo
Cherry-tree
Dark grey
Green
Light blue
Dark blue
White
Silver grey
Dark grey
Packing (pcs)
Catalogue number
40/480
40/480
40/480
35/420
40/480
40/480
40/480
35/420
40/480
40/480
40/480
35/420
40/480
40/480
40/480
35/420
40/480
40/480
40/480
35/420
40/480
40/480
40/480
35/420
40/480
40/480
40/480
35/420
40/480
40/480
40/480
35/420
40/480
40/480
40/480
35/420
40/480
40/480
40/480
35/420
40/480
40/480
40/480
35/420
40/480
40/480
40/480
35/420
35/420
35/420
35/420
34601
34613
34625
34637
34609
34621
34633
34645
34610
34622
34634
34646
34602
34614
34626
34638
34611
34623
34635
34647
34608
34620
34632
34644
34606
34618
34630
34642
34162
34624
34636
34648
34607
34619
34631
34643
34603
34615
34627
34639
34605
34617
34629
34641
34604
34616
34628
34640
34660
34662
34661
239
Life style series
Type
Life style series

Life style series
Type
Colour
Rated current
In (A)
Packing (pcs)
Catalogue number
one button one way

switch
white
16
8/48/960
20501
dark grey
16
8/48/960
21501
white
16
8/48/960
20579
dark grey
16
8/48/960
21579
Type
Colour
Rated current
In (A)
Packing (pcs)
Catalogue number
one button two way

switch
white
16
8/48/960
20506
dark grey
16
8/48/960
21506
one button cross switch
240
one button two way

switch with light
white
16
8/48/960
20507
dark grey
16
8/48/960
21507
Type
Colour
Rated current
In (A)
Packing (pcs)
Catalogue number
door bell switch with

light
white
10
8/48/960
20510A
dark grey
10
8/48/960
21510A
push light switch with

light
white
10
8/48/960
20510B
dark grey
10
8/48/960
21510B
Type
Colour
Rated current
In (A)
Packing (pcs)
Catalogue number
white
10
8/48/960
20521
dark grey
10
8/48/960
21521
Colour
Power(W)
Packing (pcs)
Catalogue number
white
500
8/48/960
20803
dark grey
500
8/48/960
21803
curtain switch
Type
dimmer switch
white
500
8/48/960
20803A
dark grey
500
8/48/960
21803A
Colour
Rated current
In (VA)
Packing (pcs)
Catalogue number
white
8/48/960
20616
dark grey
8/48/960
21616
Colour
Rated current
In (A)
Packing (pcs)
Catalogue number
white
16
4/24/480
20265
dark grey
16
4/24/480
21265
Type
Colour
Rated current
In (A)
Packing (pcs)
Catalogue number
Italian standard multi

socket
white
16
8/48/960
20203
dark grey
16
8/48/960
21203
fan speed switch
Type
Life style series
bell 230V
Type
German type socket
TV socket
Satellite socket
Type
phone socket RJ 11
computer socket RJ 45
Type
decorative cover
Colour
Packing (pcs)
Catalogue number
white
8/48/960
20228
dark grey
8/48/960
21228
white
8/48/960
30301
dark grey
8/48/960
31301
Colour
Packing (pcs)
Catalogue number
white
8/48/960
20251
dark grey
8/48/960
21251
white
8/48/960
20266
dark grey
8/48/960
21266
Colour
Packing (pcs)
Catalogue number
white
8/48/960
20056
dark grey
8/48/960
21056
Type
Packing (pcs)
Catalogue number
double
5 / 250
2702
triple
5 / 200
2703
IP code
Packing (pcs)
Catalogue number
triple
44
1 / 100
22451
quadruple
44
1 / 100
22461
Packing (pcs)
Catalogue number
double frame
10 / 400
24262
triple frame
10 / 400
24201
quadruple frame
10 / 400
24202
sixfold frame
10 / 200
24206LF
Packing (pcs)
Catalogue number
triple
10 / 300
24203
quadruple
10 / 200
71304
sixfold
10 / 200
68206
Packing (pcs)
Catalogue number
triple
160
24205
quadruple
150
24206
Surface mounting box - for LIFE

STYLE series
Type
Watertight box - for

LIFE STYLE series
Type
Frame - for LIFE STYLE series
* Single switch or socket use triple frame
Type
Console box for brick and concrete - for LIFE STYLE series
Type
Console box for plasterboard
241
Life style series
Type
Life style series
Basic series
BASIC
YEAR
WARRANTY
Basic series
242
White
Cream
Silver grey
Pear tree
Type

with light
Type
Cross switch
Type
Type
Dimmer switch
Colour
Rated current
In (A)
Packing (pcs)
Catalogue number
White
10
10/100
38000
Cream
10
10/100
38001
Silver grey
10
10/100
38002
Pear tree
10
10/100
38005
White
10
10/100
38010
Cream
10
10/100
38011
Silver grey
10
10/100
38012
Pear tree
10
10/100
38015
Colour
Rated current
In (A)
Packing (pcs)
Catalogue number
White
10
10/100
38700
Cream
10
10/100
38701
Silver grey
10
10/100
38702
Pear tree
10
10/100
38705
Colour
Rated current
In (A)
Packing (pcs)
Catalogue number
White
10
10/100
38070
Cream
10
10/100
38071
Silver grey
10
10/100
38072
Pear tree
10
10/100
38075
Colour
Rated current
In (A)
Packing (pcs)
Catalogue number
White
10
10/100
38050
Cream
10
10/100
38051
Silver grey
10
10/100
38052
Pear tree
10
10/100
38055
Colour
Power(W)
Packing (pcs)
Catalogue number
White
400
10/100
38800
Cream
400
10/100
38801
Silver grey
400
10/100
38802
Pear tree
400
10/100
38805
243
Basic series
Type
Basic series

Basic series
Type
Push light switch
Type
Door bell switch
Type
German type socket
Type
German type socket

with cover
Basic series
244
Type
Phone socket
Colour
Rated current
In (A)
Packing (pcs)
Catalogue number
White
10
10/100
38100
Cream
10
10/100
38101
Silver grey
10
10/100
38102
Pear tree
10
10/100
38105
Colour
Rated current
In (A)
Packing (pcs)
Catalogue number
White
10
10/100
38120
Cream
10
10/100
38121
Silver grey
10
10/100
38122
Pear tree
10
10/100
38125
Colour
Rated current
In (A)
Packing (pcs)
Catalogue number
White
16
10/100
38200
Cream
16
10/100
38201
Silver grey
16
10/100
38202
Pear tree
16
10/100
38205
Colour
Rated current
In (A)
Packing (pcs)
Catalogue number
White
16
10/100
38250
Cream
16
10/100
38251
Silver grey
16
10/100
38252
Pear tree
16
10/100
38255
Colour
Packing (pcs)
Catalogue number
White
10/100
38350
Cream
10/100
38351
Silver grey
10/100
38352
Pear tree
10/100
38355
Computer socket
Type
TV socket
Type
2 gang panel
3 gang panel
Type
Outlet safety cap
Colour
Packing (pcs)
Catalogue number
White
10/100
38300
Cream
10/100
38301
Silver grey
10/100
38302
Pear tree
10/100
38305
Colour
Packing (pcs)
Catalogue number
White
10/100
38360
Cream
10/100
38361
Silver grey
10/100
38362
Pear tree
10/100
38365
Colour
Packing (pcs)
Catalogue number
White
20/200
38900
Cream
20/200
38901
Silver grey
20/200
38902
Pear tree
20/200
38905
White
15/150
38910
Cream
15/150
38911
Silver grey
15/150
38912
Pear tree
15/150
38915
Colour
White
Brown
Packing (pcs)
10/100
Catalogue number
245
192215
192214
Basic series
Type
Basic series

Waterproof for surface mounting
German type socket waterproof with
transparent cover
Type
German type socket waterproof with transparent cover
IP code
Packing (pcs)
Catalogue number
Single
44
120
19221304
Double
44
60
1922100311
Triple
44
50
1922100312
German type socket waterproof with white cover

Type
German type socket waterproof with white cover
YEAR
WARRANTY
YEAR
WARRANTY
IP code
Packing (pcs)
Catalogue number
Single
44
120
1922130101
Double
44
60
1922100307
Triple
44
50
1922100309
246
Switch - waterproof
IP
code
Packing
(pcs)
Catalogue number
One way switch
44
120
1922130104
One button two way switch
44
120
1922130106
Two buttons one way switch
44
120
1922130105
Push light switch/door bell switch
44
120
1922130107
Type
Switch - waterproof
YEAR
WARRANTY

IP code
Packing (pcs)
Catalogue number
One button two way switch
20
120
19221305
Puch light switch
20
120
19221306
Two buttons one way switch
20
120
19221307
Switch
Socket
YEAR
WARRANTY
Type
IP code
Packing (pcs)
Catalogue number
Socket
20
120
19221308
Multisocket
YEAR
WARRANTY
Type
Colour
Rated
current in
(A)
Rated
power in
(W)
Packing (pcs)
Catalogue number
Multisocket double
black
16
3500
60
192216
Multisocket double
white
16
3500
60
192217
Multisocket triple
black
16
3500
60
192218
Multisocket triple
white
16
3500
60
192219
Adapters
YEAR
WARRANTY
247
Type
Colour
Rated
current in
(A)
Rated
power in
(W)
Packing (pcs)
Catalogue
number
Adapter double
White
16
3500
50
192213
Adapter double
Graphite
16
3500
50
192212
Adapter double with key
White
16
3500
50
192211
Adapter double with key
Graphite
16
3500
50
192210
Adapter triple
White
16
3500
40
192209
Adapter triple
Graphite
16
3500
40
192208
Adapter triple with key
White
16
3500
40
192207
Adapter triple with key
Graphite
16
3500
40
192206
Type
YEAR
WARRANTY
Switch

Plugs
Rubber- coated socket

Type
Colour
IP code
Packing (pcs)
Catalogue number
Rubber- coated socket
black
44
25 / 100
192220
Rubber-coated plug

Plugs
YEAR
WARRANTY
Type
Colour
IP code
Packing (pcs)
Catalogue number
Rubber- coated plug
black
44
25 / 100
192221
Plug with PVC muff
248
YEAR
WARRANTY
YEAR
WARRANTY
Type
Rated current
In (A)
Colour
Material
Packing (pcs)
Catalogue number
Plug
16
black / white
with pvc muff
300
192113
Plug bakelite
YEAR
WARRANTY
Type
Rated current
In (A)
Colour
Material
Packing (pcs)
Catalogue number
Plug
16
white
bakelite
80
19211102
Plug
16
black
bakelite
80
19211101

ELMARK Electric

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ELMARK Electric

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

ELMARK Electric

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ELMARK HOLDING SE United Kingdom

The Brand of Electricity

DEVICES FOR CONTROLAND

Capacitor batteries Cos regulator

TIMERS, RELAYS AND

ELEMENTS FOR AUTOMATION,

Devices for telpher

INDUSTRIAL PLUGS AND

Plastic distribution Metal distribution

Plastic distribution Plastic distribution

CABLE INSTALATION SYSTEM

Plastic cable trunking Cable support

Mechanical cutting Isolated VDE tools

ELECTRICAL SWITCHES AND

is a leading European certified trademark of LOW

The holder of the trademark ELMARK is the

It represents a group of 14 affiliate companies in

EUROPEAN FACTORY AND

ELMARK INDUSTRIES SC, Dobrich, Bulgaria

MIDDLE EAST FACTORY AND

ELMARK INDUSTRIES SC Branch, Dubai, UAE

INTERNATIONAL TRADE OFFICE

ELMARK TRADE LTD, Varna, Bulgaria

Our successful commercial policy is due to the high

AND LIGHTING SOLUTIONS

Intertek Sweden and RoHs certificate

Intertek Sweden and RoHs certificate

Intertek Sweden and RoHs certificate

Intertek Sweden and RoHs certificate

EMC and LVD certificate

EMC and LVD certificate

EMC and LVD certificate

EMC and LVD certificate

Miniature circuit breakers (MCB) | 14

MAXIMUM CURRENT RELEASE

AUXILIARY CONTACT (accessory)

UNDER VOLTAGE RELEASE (accessory)

SHUNT RELEASE (accessory)

Miniature circuit breakers (MCB)

Circuit breakers are automatically-operated electrical switches, designed to protect

number of poles (1,2,3)

Miniature circuit breakers (MCB) C40N

thickness: 0.6mm (up to 40A) and 0.8mm (up

Miniature circuit breakers (MCB)

Miniature circuit breakers (MCB)

Miniature circuit breakers (MCB)

number of poles (1,2,3,4)

Miniature circuit breakers (MCB) C60N

Maximum current release containing:

Miniature circuit breakers (MCB)

Miniature circuit breakers (MCB)

Rated Breaking Recommended

Rated Breaking Recommended

Rated Breaking Recommended

Rated Breaking Recommended

Miniature circuit breakers (MCB) C100L

Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles):

number of poles (1,2,3)

Miniature circuit breakers (MCB)